Yaskawa F7 Drive Installation Guide
Advertentie
Advertentie
YASKAWA
Varispeed F7S
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SUPER ENERGY-SAVING VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
MODEL: CIMR-F7S
200V CLASS 0.4 to 75kW (1.2 to 110kVA)
400V CLASS 0.4 to 300kW (1.4 to 510kVA)
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions thoroughly, and retain for future reference.
YASKAWA MANUAL NO. TOEP C710616 16B
Copyright
©
2007 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
Preface
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of Varispeed F7S-Series Inverters. Read this manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect an Inverter and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference. Be sure you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application.
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details.
Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according to the instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.
• If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
i
ii
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed precautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
Failure to heed a precaution classified as a caution can result in serious consequences depending on the situation.
Indicates important information that should be memorized.
IMPORTANT
Safety Precautions
Confirmations upon Delivery
CAUTION
• Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
Installation
CAUTION
• Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
• Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
• Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45 ° C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
Wiring
WARNING
• Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V Class:
Ground to 10 Ω or less)
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
• Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, an electric shock or ground short can occur.
• If the power supply is turned ON during the FWD (or REV) Run Command is given, the motor will start automatically.
Turn the power supply ON after verifying that the RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal constant is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
• The IPM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets mounted in the rotor.
Unlike the induction motor, high motor-terminal voltage is generated while the motor is running, even when the Inverter power is OFF. Maintenance, inspection, or wiring must be done while the motor is stopped.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
• For applications where the overhauling load causes the motor to turn even when the Inverter power is OFF, be sure to connect a low-voltage manual starter on the Inverter's output side.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
iii
iv
CAUTION
• Motors of any other type, such as induction motors, can be connected only in the sequence test mode (A1-02=0). This Inverter is used exclusively for IPM motor drives.
Failure to observe this caution may result in damage to the Inverter or the motors.
• If connecting a motor in the sequence test mode (A1-02=0), the motor must be separated from the load (machine, equipment, etc).
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury or damage to the product.
• Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the
Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
• Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
• Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur and the Inverter, braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units can be damaged.
• Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
• Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
• Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt if these devices are connected.
• Do not connect magnetic contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the
Inverter to operate.
• Do not ground nor connect the AC terminal on the control circuit to the unit.
Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter.
Setting User Constants
CAUTION
• Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before performing PG home position offset.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set with the motor attached to a load.
• Stay clear of the motor until PG home position offset has been successfully completed.
The motor could stop and then start again unexpectedly and this could result in injury.
• Always confirm the following before PG home position offset:
• The lock key has been removed from the motor shaft.
• There are neither people nor objects around the motor shaft.
• The motor is at a complete stop.
Failure to do so may result in injury.
• Be careful when handling the shaft and coupling.
Failure to do so may result in injury.
• Be careful not to injure yourself with the key groove when turning the motor shaft by hand.
Failure to do so may result in injury.
• For an initial operation or the first operation after replacing the Inverter or the motor, correctly set the motor constants. Then, be sure to double check if the settings were correctly made.
If the settings are incorrect, the overhauling load might cause the motor to turn because of insufficient torque, or the motor might not run in accordance with an issued command (reverses, does not move, or shortly accelerates).
Trial Operation
WARNING
• Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply.
An electric shock may occur.
• Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared, the machine may start moving suddenly.
Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
• Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its function is set.
Injury may occur.
• Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
• Don't touch the radiation fins (heatsink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
• Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the Inverter.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• Don't check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
• Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings. For the
Inverters in the 400 V class of 75 kW or more, however, select the correct connector according to the input voltage.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
• For the initial operation or the first operation after replacing the motor, set the motor constants before starting operation. Also, reconfirm the motor constants after they have been set.
Improper setting may cause the Inverter to malfunction. Failure to observe this caution may result in damage to the equipments, motors or Inverter.
Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
• Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• Turn OFF the main circuit power supply, wait for the time indicated on the front cover, and make sure the CHARGE indicator light has gone out, and then perform maintenance and inspection.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
v
vi
WARNING
• Maintenance or inspection must be done while the motor is stopped.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
• Do not carry out maintenance or inspections for at least 5 minutes after the low-voltage manual switching device on the output side is turned OFF.
Because the IPM motor contains a permanent magnet, voltage occurs between the terminals during rotation even if power is not applied. This voltage is dangerous and may cause electric shock.
• Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always make any adjustments other than those involving the operation of the Inverter with the holding brake released.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
CAUTION
• A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
• Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
Other
• Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.
Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.
WARNING
CAUTION
• Do not subject the Inverter to halogen gases, such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, at any time even during transportation or installation.
Otherwise, the Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt.
Warning Information and Position
There is warning information on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration.
Always heed the warnings.
Warning information position
Warning information position
Illustration shows the CIMR-F7S20P4
Illustration shows the CIMR-F7S2022
Warning Information
!
WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
Read manual before installing.
Wait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge after disconnecting power supply.
After opening the manual switch between
the drive and motor, please wait 5 minutes
before inspecting, performing maintenance
or wiring the drive.
!
AVERTISSEMENT
Risque de décharge électrique.
Lire le manuel avant l' installation.
Attendre 5 minutes aprés la coupure de
l' allmentation. Pour permettre la
décharge des condensateurs.
Après avoir déconnécte la protection
entra le drive et le moteur, veuillez
patienter 5 minutes avant d' inspecter,
d' effectuer une opération de montage
ou de câblage du variateur.
!
vii
viii
Warranty Information
Free Warranty Period and Scope
Warranty Period
This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa’s customer or if applicable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa’s factory whichever comes first.
Scope of Warranty
Inspections
Periodic inspections must be conducted by the customer. However, upon request, Yaskawa or one of Yaskawa’s Service Centers can inspect the product for a fee. In this case, if after conferring with the customer, a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period, then this fee will be waived and the problem remedied free of charge.
Repairs
If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period, Yaskawa will provide a replacement, repair the defective product, and provide shipping to and from the site free of charge.
However, if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center determines that the problem with a
Yaskawa product is not due to defects in Yaskawa’s workmanship or materials, then the customer will be responsible for the cost of any necessary repairs. Some problems that are outside the scope of this warranty are:
•
•
•
•
Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or other reasons where the customer is determined to be responsible.
Problems due to additions or modifications made to a Yaskawa product without Yaskawa’s understanding.
Problems due to the use of a Yaskawa product under conditions that do not meet the recommended specifications.
Problems caused by natural disaster or fire.
• Or other problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or materials.
Warranty service is only applicable within Japan.
However, after-sales service is available for customers outside of Japan for a reasonable fee.
Contact your local Yaskawa representative for more information.
Exceptions
Any inconvenience to the customer or damage to non-Yaskawa products due to Yaskawa's defective products whether within or outside the warranty period are NOT covered by this warranty.
Restrictions
• The Varispeed F7S was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly affect or threaten human lives or health.
•
•
Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems relating to transportation, health care, space aviation, atomic or electric power, or underwater use must contact their Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office beforehand.
This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this product is to be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a facility where failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the likelihood of any accident.
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
•
•
•
InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
L ON W ORKS is a registered trademark of the Echelon.
Before Reading This Manual
This manual explains both the conventional Varispeed F7S-Series Inverters and the F7S-series
Inverters with SPEC: C or later.
The shaded sections or those specified as being for SPEC: C or later apply only to F7S-series
Inverters with SPEC: C or later (Inverter with design revision order of C or later.)
Be certain to check the specification on the Inverter nameplate.
Example of Inverter Nameplate
D es i gn rev i s i on order
(52
8
52'%2%
10
50
8#M8#
24)224
(+.'01'
MI
24)
Precautions when Using a F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: B or Earlier
The design revision number and software version of the F7S-series Inverters with SPEC: C or later have been modified as shown in the table below. The design revision order and software version can be found on the Inverter nameplate. When using a F7S-series Inverter with SPEC:
B or earlier, observe the following precautions.
Inverter
Inverter with SPEC: B or earlier
Inverter with SPEC: C or later
Design Revision Order
A or B
C or later
Software Version
PRG:103
PRG:104
Precautions
• The factory settings of C6-01 (CT/VT selection) and the constants related to C6-01 of the
F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: B or earlier are different from those of the F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: C or later.
Refer to Application and Overload Selections of Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function , and set the constants according to your application.
• The COPY function of the Digital Operator for the F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: B or earlier is limited because of the software version different from that of the F7S-series Inverter with SPEC: C or later.
Set the related constants, referring to Application and Overload Selections of Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function .
ix
x
1
2
Contents
Safety Information ...........................................................................................ii
Safety Precautions .........................................................................................iii
Warning Information and Position .................................................................vii
Warranty Information .................................................................................... viii
Registered Trademarks ..................................................................................ix
Before Reading This Manual ..........................................................................ix
Handling Inverters ...................................................................1-1
Varispeed F7S Introduction .......................................................................... 1-2
Varispeed F7S Applications............................................................................................ 1-2
Varispeed F7S Models ................................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................ 1-4
Checks ........................................................................................................................... 1-4
Nameplate Information ................................................................................................... 1-4
Component Names ........................................................................................................ 1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .............................................................. 1-7
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ....................................................................................... 1-7
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)] ..................................................... 1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site............................................ 1-10
Installation Site ............................................................................................................. 1-10
Controlling the Ambient Temperature........................................................................... 1-10
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter ................................................................. 1-10
Installation Orientation and Space.............................................................. 1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............................................. 1-12
Removing the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-12
Attaching the Terminal Cover ....................................................................................... 1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................ 1-13
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less ........................................................................................ 1-13
Inverters of 22 kW or More........................................................................................... 1-16
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover .......................................... 1-17
Removing the Protection Cover ................................................................................... 1-17
Attaching the Protection Cover..................................................................................... 1-18
Wiring .......................................................................................2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices .............................................................. 2-2
Connection Diagram .................................................................................... 2-3
Terminal Block Configuration ....................................................................... 2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals....................................................................... 2-6
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................... 2-6
Main Circuit Terminal Functions................................................................................... 2-12
3
4
Main Circuit Configurations...........................................................................................2-13
Standard Connection Diagrams....................................................................................2-14
Wiring the Main Circuits................................................................................................2-15
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals .................................................................2-23
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ......................................................................2-23
Control Circuit Terminal Functions ...............................................................................2-25
Control Circuit Terminal Connections ...........................................................................2-29
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions................................................................................2-30
Wiring Check ..............................................................................................2-31
Checks..........................................................................................................................2-31
Installing and Wiring Option Cards .............................................................2-32
Option Card Models and Specifications........................................................................2-32
Installation.....................................................................................................................2-33
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications..................................................2-34
Wiring............................................................................................................................2-35
Wiring Terminal Blocks .................................................................................................2-36
Digital Operator and Modes................................................... 3-1
Digital Operator ............................................................................................3-2
Digital Operator Display..................................................................................................3-2
Digital Operator Keys......................................................................................................3-2
Modes...........................................................................................................3-5
Inverter Modes................................................................................................................3-5
Switching Modes.............................................................................................................3-6
Drive Mode .....................................................................................................................3-7
Quick Programming Mode ..............................................................................................3-8
Advanced Programming Mode .......................................................................................3-9
Verify Mode................................................................................................................... 3-11
Autotuning Mode...........................................................................................................3-12
Trial Operation ........................................................................ 4-1
Overview of Trial Operation Procedure ........................................................4-2
Trial Operation Procedures...........................................................................4-3
Application Confirmation.................................................................................................4-3
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher).4-3
Power ON .......................................................................................................................4-4
Checking the Display Status ...........................................................................................4-4
Basic Settings .................................................................................................................4-5
Motor Constant Settings .................................................................................................4-7
Application Settings ......................................................................................................4-24
No-load Operation ........................................................................................................4-25
Loaded Operation .........................................................................................................4-25
Check and Recording User Constants .........................................................................4-26
Adjustment Suggestions.............................................................................4-27 xi
xii
5
6
User Constants ........................................................................5-1
User Constant Descriptions.......................................................................... 5-2
Description of User Constant Tables .............................................................................. 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels........................................... 5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode.................................................. 5-4
User Constant Tables ................................................................................... 5-8
A: Setup Settings............................................................................................................ 5-8
Application Constants: b............................................................................................... 5-10
Autotuning Constants: C .............................................................................................. 5-16
Reference Constants: d................................................................................................ 5-20
Motor Constants: E....................................................................................................... 5-25
Option Constants: F ..................................................................................................... 5-30
Terminal Function Constants: H................................................................................... 5-36
Protection Function Constants: L ................................................................................. 5-45
N: Special Adjustments ................................................................................................ 5-54
Digital Operator Constants: o ....................................................................................... 5-55
T: Motor Autotuning...................................................................................................... 5-59
U: Monitor Constants.................................................................................................... 5-61
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)................................... 5-69
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)................................. 5-70
Factory Settings that Change with Inverter Capacity Selection (o2-04) and Motor
Capacity Selection (E5-01)........................................................................................... 5-75
Constant Settings by Function...............................................6-1
Application and Overload Selections ........................................................... 6-2
Select the Overload to Suit the Application .................................................................... 6-2
Speed Reference ......................................................................................... 6-5
Selecting the Speed Reference Source ......................................................................... 6-5
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation................................................................................. 6-9
Varispeed F7S Function Block ..................................................................................... 6-12
Run Command ........................................................................................... 6-14
Selecting the Run Command Source ........................................................................... 6-14
Stopping Methods ...................................................................................... 6-16
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent .................................. 6-16
Using an Emergency Stop............................................................................................ 6-19
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics .......................................... 6-20
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times............................................................... 6-20
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function) .................................... 6-24
Preventing Overvoltage During Run............................................................................. 6-25
Adjusting Speed References...................................................................... 6-27
Adjusting Analog Speed References............................................................................ 6-27
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Speed Function) ............................................. 6-30
Adjusting Speed Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs ................................................. 6-32
Speed Limit (Speed Reference Limit Function).......................................... 6-33
Limiting Maximum Speed..............................................................................................6-33
Limiting Minimum Speed...............................................................................................6-33
Machine Protection.....................................................................................6-35
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function) .............................................................6-35
Using Speed Detection .................................................................................................6-38
Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................6-41
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input .......6-44
Motor Overload Protection............................................................................................6-45
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time .....................................................................6-48
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction..................................................................................6-49
Detecting Motor Overspeed..........................................................................................6-49
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference .......................6-50
Continuing Operation..................................................................................6-51
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored........................................................6-51
Speed Search ...............................................................................................................6-53
Continuing Operation During Momentary Power Loss .................................................6-56
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Speed Reference Is Lost ..................6-58
Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function).............................6-59
Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault (SPEC: C or Later Only).........................6-60
Inverter Protection ......................................................................................6-61
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors .............................6-61
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels..........................................6-62
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................6-63
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit
Terminals ......................................................................................................................6-63
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands) ......................................................6-64
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) .......6-65
Raising and Lowering Speed References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN) ...........6-66
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Speeds in the Analog References
(+/- Speed)....................................................................................................................6-69
Hold Analog Speed Using User-set Timing ..................................................................6-70
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit
Terminals ......................................................................................................................6-70
Jog Speed Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG).........6-71
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Fault Function) ..............................................................................................6-72
Output Terminal Functions..........................................................................6-73
Monitor Constants.......................................................................................6-76
Using the Analog Monitor Constants ............................................................................6-76
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents .............................................................................6-79
Individual Functions....................................................................................6-81
Using MEMOBUS Communications .............................................................................6-81
Using the Timer Function..............................................................................................6-93
Using PID Control .........................................................................................................6-94
Torque Control (SPEC: C or Later Only) ....................................................................6-104 xiii
xiv
7
8
Speed Control (ASR) Structure .................................................................................. 6-112
Droop Control Function (SPEC: C or Later Only)....................................................... 6-117
Digital Operator Functions........................................................................ 6-119
Setting Digital Operator Functions ............................................................................. 6-119
Copying Constants ..................................................................................................... 6-122
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator............................................. 6-126
Setting a Password .................................................................................................... 6-127
Displaying User-set Constants Only........................................................................... 6-128
Options..................................................................................................... 6-129
Performing Speed Control with PG ............................................................................ 6-129
Using Digital Output Boards ....................................................................................... 6-132
Using an Analog Reference Board (SPEC: C or Later Only) ..................................... 6-134
Using a Digital Reference Board (SPEC: C or Later Only)......................................... 6-135
Maintenance Timer Display Function (SPEC: C or Later Only) ............... 6-140
Settings Required to Use Maintenance Timer Display Function ................................ 6-140
Settings Required After Replacement of Cooling Fan or Electrolytic Capacitor......... 6-141
Troubleshooting ......................................................................7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions............................................................ 7-2
Fault Detection ............................................................................................................... 7-2
Alarm Detection............................................................................................................ 7-12
Operation Errors........................................................................................................... 7-16
Errors During Autotuning.............................................................................................. 7-18
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................ 7-18
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 7-20
If Inverter Constants Cannot Be Set............................................................................. 7-20
If the Motor Does Not Operate ..................................................................................... 7-21
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed........................................................ 7-24
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow.................................. 7-24
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference ....................................................... 7-24
If Motor Deceleration is Slow........................................................................................ 7-24
If the Motor Overheats.................................................................................................. 7-25
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio .......................... 7-26
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run ............................. 7-26
If There is Mechanical Oscillation................................................................................. 7-26
If Motor Speed Does Not Rise to Speed Reference ..................................................... 7-27
Maintenance and Inspection ..................................................8-1
Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................ 8-2
Outline of Free Warranty ................................................................................................ 8-2
Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2
Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ....................................................................................... 8-3
Types and Number of Cooling Fans Used in the Drive .................................................. 8-3
9
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline..................................................................................8-5
Circulation Fan Replacement Outline ...........................................................................8-14
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board .......................................8-18
Specifications ......................................................................... 9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications ...................................................................9-2
Specifications by Model ..................................................................................................9-2
Common Specifications ..................................................................................................9-4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ........................................9-6
10 Appendix ............................................................................... 10-1
Inverter Application Precautions.................................................................10-2
Selection .......................................................................................................................10-2
Installation.....................................................................................................................10-3
Settings.........................................................................................................................10-3
Handling........................................................................................................................10-3
Motor Application Precautions....................................................................10-5
Applicable Motor ...........................................................................................................10-5
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)......................10-5
Conformance to UL Standard .....................................................................10-6
Conformance to CE Markings ....................................................................10-8
CE Markings .................................................................................................................10-8
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings ..........................................................10-8
Wiring Examples.......................................................................................10-15
Using a Braking Resistor Unit.....................................................................................10-15
Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit .........................................................10-16
Using Braking Units in Parallel ...................................................................................10-17
Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel ............................10-18
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an Internal Power Supply............................................................................................10-19
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a +24-V Common in Sourcing Mode............10-20
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an External Power Supply ..........................................................................................10-21
Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs................................................................10-22
User Constants .........................................................................................10-23
Revision History
xv
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed F7S Introduction .........................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-4
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions..............................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ...........1-10
Installation Orientation and Space ............................. 1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator
and Front Cover.........................................................1-13
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover..........1-17
1
-2
Varispeed F7S Introduction
Varispeed F7S Applications
The Varispeed F7S is ideal for the following applications.
• Fan, blower, and pump applications
• Conveyors, pushers, metal tooling machines, etc.
Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation.
Varispeed F7S Models
Voltage
Class
200 V Class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity kW
37
45
55
75
15
18.5
22
30
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
The Varispeed F7S Series of Inverters included two Inverters in two voltage class es: 200 V and 400 V. Maximum motor capacities vary from 0.4 to 300 kW (39 models).
32
44
55
69
12
17
22
27
82
110
Output
Capacity kVA
1.2
1.6
2.7
3.7
5.7
8.8
Table 1.1 Varispeed F7S Models
Varispeed F7S
Basic Model Number
CIMR-F7S20P4
CIMR-F7S20P7
CIMR-F7S21P5
CIMR-F7S22P2
CIMR-F7S23P7
CIMR-F7S25P5
CIMR-F7S27P5
CIMR-F7S2011
CIMR-F7S2015
CIMR-F7S2018
CIMR-F7S2022
CIMR-F7S2030
CIMR-F7S2037
CIMR-F7S2045
CIMR-F7S2055
CIMR-F7S2075
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-F7S
Enclosed Wall-mounted
[IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)]
CIMR-F7S
20P41
20P71
21P51
22P21
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmounted model.
23P71
25P51
27P51
20111
20220
20300
20370
20450
20550
20750
20151
20181
20221
20301
20371
20451
20551
20751
Varispeed F7S Introduction
Voltage
Class
400 V Class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity kW
37
45
55
75
15
18.5
22
30
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
90
110
132
160
185
220
300
34
46
57
69
13
18
24
30
Output
Capacity kVA
1.4
1.6
2.8
4.0
5.8
9.5
200
230
280
390
510
85
110
140
160
CIMR-F7S40P4
CIMR-F7S40P7
CIMR-F7S41P5
CIMR-F7S42P2
CIMR-F7S43P7
CIMR-F7S45P5
CIMR-F7S47P5
CIMR-F7S4011
CIMR-F7S4015
CIMR-F7S4018
CIMR-F7S4022
CIMR-F7S4030
CIMR-F7S4037
CIMR-F7S4045
CIMR-F7S4055
CIMR-F7S4075
CIMR-F7S4090
CIMR-F7S4110
CIMR-F7S4132
CIMR-F7S4160
CIMR-F7S4185
CIMR-F7S4220
CIMR-F7S4300
Table 1.1 Varispeed F7S Models (Continued)
Varispeed F7S
Basic Model Number
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-F7S
Enclosed Wall-mounted
[IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)]
CIMR-F7S
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmount model.
40P41
40P71
41P51
42P21
43P71
45P51
47P51
40111
40220
40300
40370
40450
40550
40750
40900
41100
41320
41600
41850
42200
43000
40151
40181
40221
40301
40371
40451
40551
40751
40901
41101
41321
41601
-
-
-
1-
3
1
-4
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Item
Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered?
Table 1.2 Checks
Method
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic (Japan) Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 0.4 kW,
IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 (Type 1) standards
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output specifications
Lot number
Serial number
UL file number
(52
8
52'%2%
10
50
8#M8#
24)224
(+.'01'
MI
24)
Inverter specifications
Mass
Software version number
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
Confirmations upon Delivery
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CI MR - F7 S 2 0 P 4
I nverter
Var i speed F7
N o .
S
Spec i f i cat i on
I PM Motor D r i ve
N o .
2
4
Vo l tage Cl ass
A C i nput, 3phase, 200 V
A C i nput, 3phase, 400 V
N o .
0 P 4
0 P 7 to
300
Ma x. Motor
0.4
0.7
5 to
300
C kW kW apac kW i ty
" P " i nd i cates the dec i ma l po i nt .
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity, the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
N o .
2
4
Vo l tage Cl ass
A C i nput, 3phase, 200 V
A C i nput, 3phase, 400 V
D es i gn rev i s i on order
N o .
0 P 4
0 P 7 to
300
Ma x. Motor
0.4 to
300
C kW
0.7
5 kW kW apac i ty
" P " i nd i cates the dec i ma l po i nt .
N o .
0
1
Protect i ve Structure
O pen chass i s (IEC I P 00)
E nc l osed wa llmounted (IEC I P 20 ,
NE MA 1 (T ype 1))
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
TERMS
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Inverter is mounted in a control panel.
Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1))
The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 (Type 1) in the USA. The protective covers (see Fig. 1.4
) are required for an IEC IP20 or NEMA 1 (Type 1) protective structure.
1-
5
1
-6
Component Names
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4
. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5
.
Top protective cover
Mounting hole
Cooling fan
Front cover
Digital
Operator
Terminal cover
Mounting hole
Inverter cover
Front cover
Diecast case
Nameplate
Digital
Operator
Terminal cover
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
18.5 kW or Less
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance
22 kW or More
Charge indicator
E (G) FM
SC
S1 S2
A1
AC
S3
A2
AM
S4
A3
P1
+V
S5
P2
AC
S6
PC
S7
-V
SC
S8
MP
RP R+ R- S+ S-
IG
MA
M1
MB MC
M2 E (G)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
R1/L11
R/L1
S1/L21 T1/L21
S/L2 T/L3 U/T1
1
V/T2 W/T3
3
18.5 kW or Less 22 kW or More
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (Examples of Inverters with SPEC: C or later)
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
W1
4-d
W1 4-d
W D1
D 3
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW
W2
W1 t1 t1
D1
(5) W (5) (5) D
* (10) for 200 V Class Inverters of 37 to 75 kW or 400 V Class Inverters of 75 to 160 kW.
6-d
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 75 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW
(15)
W3
W1
W (15) (5)
400 V Class Inverters of 185 to 300 kW
D
D1 t1
Fig 1.6 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
1-
7
1
-8
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)]
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)] are shown below.
W1
4-d W1 4-d
W
3
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW
D1
D t1 t1
D1
(5) *
W (5)
*
(5) D
Grommet
* (7.5) for 200 V Class Inverters of 37 to 75 kW or 400 V Class Inverters of 75 to 160 kW.
200 V Class Inverters of 22 to 75kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW
Fig 1.7 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Voltage
Class
Max.
Applicable
Motor
Output
[kW]
0.4
200 V
(3-phase)
W H
Open Chassis (IP00)
D W1 H1 H2 D1
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
0.75
1.5
157 39
2.2
3.7
140 280 126 266 7
5.5
7.5
177 59
11
15
18.5
200 300 197 186 285
240 350 207 216 335
22 250 400
30 275 450
258
195 385
220 435
8
7.5
65.5
78
100
37 298 100
45
55
375 600
328
250 575
450 725 348 325 700
12.5
130
75
0.4
157 39
140 280
177
126 266 7
59 t1
5
2.3
3.2
5
400 V
(3-phase)
18.5
22
30
37
5.5
7.5
11
15
200 300 197 186 285
240 350 207 216 335
275 450 258 220 435
8
7.5
65.5
78
100
45
55
75
325 550 283 260 535 105
90
110
132
450 725 348 325 700 12.5
500 850 358 370 820 15
130
160 575 910 378 445 855 46 140
2.3
3.2
4.5
Approx.
Mass
Dimensions (mm)
W H
Enclosed Wall-mounted [NEMA1 (Type 1)]
D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes d*
Caloric Value
(W)
Exter nal
Internal
Total
Heat
Generation
20 39 59
Cooling
Method
3
140 280
157
126 280 266 7
0
39
5
3
M5
27 42 69
50 50 100
70 59 129
112 74 186
4 177 59 4
Natural
6
7
300
200
310
350
11 240
380
21 254 535
197 186 300 285
207 216 350 335
24 279 615
57
63
380 809
86
87
258
298
328
195 400 385
220 450 435
250 600 575
453 1027 348 325 725 700
8
7.5
12.5
10
0
30
135
165
209
302
65.5
78
100
100
130
2.3
3.2
6
7
11
24
27
62
68
94
95
M6
164 84 248
219 113 332
374 170 544
429 183 612
501 211 712
586 274 860
865 352 1217
1015 411 1426
Fan
3
4
140 280
157
177
126 280 266 7
0
39
59
5
3
4
M10
1266 505 1771
1588 619 2207
2019 838 2857
14 39 53
17 41 58
36 48 84
Natural
M5
59 56 115
80 68 148
127 82 209
193 114 307
6 200 300 197 186 300 285 8 65.5
6
10 240 350 207 216 350 335 78
2.3
10
M6
252 158 410
326 172 498
426 208 634
466 259 725
21 279 535 258 220 450 435
7.5
85
100 24
Fan
36 329
635
715
283 260 550 535
165
105 40
678 317 995
784 360 1144
901 415 1316
1203 495 1698
88
89
102
120
453 1027 348 325 725 700 12.5 302
504 1243 358 370 850 820 15 393
130
160 579 1324 378 445 916 855 46 408 140
3.2
4.5
96
97
122
130
170
M10
1399 575 1974
1614 671 2285
M12
2097 853 2950
2388 1002 3390
2791 1147 3938
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.
Table 1.4 400 VAC (185 to 300 kW) Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Voltage
Class
Max.
Applicable
Motor
Output
[kW]
400 V
(3-phase)
185
220
300
Dimensions (mm) Heat Generation (W)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Enclosed Wall-mounted [NEMA1 (Type 1)]
W H D W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1
Approx.
Mass
W H D W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes d*
260
External
3237
710 1305 413 540 240 270 1270 15 125.5
4.5
280 --M12 3740
Internal
1372
1537
Total
Heat
Generation
Cooling
Method
4609
5277
Natural
916 1475 413 730 365 365 1440 15 125.5
4.5
405 5838 2320 8158
1-
9
1
-10
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions and a pollution level of 2 or less (UL standard).
Table 1.5 Installation Site
Type
Enclosed wall-mounted
Open chassis
Ambient Operating Temperature
-10 to + 40 ° C
-10 to + 45 ° C
Humidity
95% RH or less (no condensation)
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel. Refer to Page 1-17 on how to remove the protection covers.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
•
•
•
When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
•
•
•
•
Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45 ° C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal powder produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
Installation Orientation and Space
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
A mm min.
B mm min.
Air
30 mm min.
50 mm min.
30 mm min.
Horizontal Space
120 mm min.
Vertical Space
Air
400 V Class Inverters of 160 to 220 kW*: A = 120, B = 120
400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW*: A = 300, B = 300
All other Inverters*: A = 50, B = 120
*If, however, there is a fan in the top of the control panel with sufficient exhaust capacity, the following dimensions may be used: A = 50, B = 120.
Fig 1.8 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted [IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)] Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5
kW or less in a panel. Refer to Page 1-17 on how to remove the protection covers.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
1-
11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 1, and then lift the terminal cover up to an angle of about 30 degrees in the direction indicated by arrow 2.
Remove the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 3.
1
2
1 Approx. 30
°
3
Fig 1.9 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7S20P4 Shown Above)
Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.10 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7S2022 Shown Above)
1
-12
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the grove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover are described in this section.
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
To attach optional boards or change the terminal board connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration.
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-F7S40P4 Shown Above)
1-
13
1
-14
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
1
2
Fig 1.12 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7S40P4 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order to the steps to remove the front cover.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverting using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
1
2
A
B
Fig 1.13 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover.
1-
15
1
-16
Inverters of 22 kW or More
For Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal board in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7S2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional board or setting the control circuit terminal board, attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or less have protection covers on the top and bottom as shown in Fig. 1.4.
Always remove the protection covers before installing an Inverter of 18.5 kW or less in a panel. Use the following procedure to remove and attach a protection cover.
Removing the Protection Cover
Top Protection Cover
Insert the tip of the straightedge screwdriver in the slot. Then, lift the cover up in the direction shown by the arrow to remove it.
Slot
Fig 1.15 Removing the Top Protection Cover (Model CIMR-F7S45P5 Shown Above)
Bottom Protection Cover
1. Remove the terminal cover as described on Page 1-12.
2. Loosen the two screws, and remove the protection cover.
3. Return the screws to their original position and tighten (them).
4. Reattach the terminal cover as described on Page 1-12.
Terminal Cover
Screws
Bottom Protection
Cover
Fig 1.16 Removing the Bottom Protection Cover (Model CIMR-F7S45P5 Shown Above)
1-
17
1
-18
Attaching the Protection Cover
Top Protection Cover
The protection cover has four hooks: two hooks on the bottom and two on the sides. Fit the bottom hooks into the holes, bend the cover slightly, and press the cover down until the hooks on the side snap.
Holes for bottom hooks
Fig 1.17 Attaching the Top Protection Cover (Model CIMR-F7S45P5 Shown Above)
Bottom Protection Cover
To attach the bottom protection cover, reverse the procedure used to remove it.
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2
Connection Diagram ....................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................2-23
Wiring Check .............................................................2-31
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-32
2
-2
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1
.
Power supply
Molded-case circuit breaker or ground fault interrupter
Magnetic contactor (MC)
AC reactor for power factor improvement
Zero phase reactor
Input noise filter
Braking resistor
Inverter
Varispeed F7
ᧂⓂ
DC reactor for power factor improvement
Ground
Output noise filter
Zero phase reactor
Low-voltage manual starter
Ground
Motor
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2
.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
2MCCB
Thermal switch contact
Thermal relay trip contact
Braking Unit
(optional)
P
1 2
+
3 4
+
0
+ 3
Inverter
CIMR-F7S2022
Level detector
-
-
U/T1
-
0
B
Braking Resistor Unit
(optional)
FU
FV
FW
Low-voltage manual starter
U
V
V/T2
W
W/T3
Motor
Cooling fan
IM
M
FW
3-phase power
200 to 240 V
50/60 Hz
R
S
T
1MCCB
MC
2MCCB THRX OFF
ON
Thermal relay trip contact for Braking Resistor Unit
MC
1 2
Thermal relay trip contact for motor cooling fan
1 2
MC
MC
SA
THRX
SA
TRX
SA
TRX
MC C MA
Fault contact
Multi-function contact inputs
Factory settings
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Thermal switch contact for Braking Unit
External fault 3 4
Fault reset
Multi-step speed reference 1
Multi-step speed reference 2
Jog speed selection
Not used
+ 1
S1
S2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
External speed references
CN5 (NPN setting)
SC
+24V 8mA
Pulse train input
2 k W
Speed setting adjustment
Speed setter
3
2 k W
1
2
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA P
0 to 10 V
MEMOBUS communications
RS-485/422
P
((
P
R+
R-
S+
S-
IG
E (G)
RP
+24V
Shield wire connection terminal
Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 kW)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
+V
A1
A2
A3
AC
Speed setting power
+15 V, 20 mA
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kW)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 W)
[0 to 10 V (20 k W) input]
0V
Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 kW)
Factory setting:
Not used
-V (15V 20mA)
Terminating resistance
(Ground to 100 max.)
PG-X2 TA1
(optional)
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
4
(E)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TA1
H
B
I
C
J
D
F
A
PG
TA3
TA2
Shield twisted-pair wires
Pulse A
Pulse B
Pulse Z
Pulse monitor output
30 mA max.
30 m max.
MP
AC
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 k W)
Default:
Output frequency
AM
FM
AC
AM
Ammeter adjustment
20 kW
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Motor speed
0 to +10 V
FM
Tachometer adjustment
20 kW
Multi-function analog output 1
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Motor speed
0 to +10 V
E(G)
MA
MB
MC
M1
M2
P1
P2
PC
MA A
Error contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min.
1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min.
1 A max.
Min. load
5 VDC, 10 mA
Multi-function contact oputput
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Default: Running signal
Min. load
5 VDC, 10 mA
Open collector 1
Default: Zerospeed
Open collector 2
Default: Speed agree signal
Multi-function open-collector outputs
48 VDC 50 mA max.
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-F7A2022 Shown Above)
2-
3
2
-4
IMPORTANT
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
Inverters with SPEC: B or earlier
E(G) 㧲㧹 AC AM P1 P2 PC SC
SC A1 A2 +V AC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7
AC
Inverters with SPEC: C or later
E(G) 㧲㧹 AC AM P1 P2 PC SC
SC A1 A2 A3 +V AC -V
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8
RP
RP
MP
MP
R+
R+
R-
R-
S+
S-
S-
1G
S-
1G
MA
M1
MB MC
M2 E(G)
MA MB MC
M1 M2 E(G)
2. The output current capacity of the +V and − V terminals are 20 mA. Do not short-circuit between the +V, − V, and AC terminals. Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter.
3. Disable the overvoltage inhibit selection during deceleration (set constant L3-11 to 0) when using a Braking
Resistor Unit. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during deceleration.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.
5. The wiring for a motor with a cooling fan is not required for self-cooling motors.
6. PG circuit wiring (i.e., wiring to the PG-X2 Board) is not required for control without a PG.
7. Sequence input signals S1 to S8 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode) for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V external power supply, refer to Table 2.13
.
8. The master speed reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
9. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
10.DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters for 22 to 75 kW and 400
V Class Inverters for 22 to 300 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
11.Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor (ERF). When using a Braking Resistor Unit, a shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.
12.The permissible load of a multi-function contact output and an error contact output is 10 mA. Use a multifunction open-collector output for a load less than 10 mA.
13.Do not ground nor connect the AC terminal on the control circuit to the unit. Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter.
14.
indicates shield wire and
P
indicates twisted-pair shield wire.
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2.3
and Fig 2.4
.
E (G) FM AC AM
SC A1 A2 A3
S1 S2 S3 S4
P1 P2 PC
+V AC -V
S5 S6 S7
SC
S8
MP
RP R+ R- S+ S-
IG
MA
M1
MB MC
M2 E (G)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter with SPEC: C or later for 0.4 kW Shown Above)
Control circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter with SPEC: C or later for 22 kW Shown Above)
2-
5
2
-6
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1
to Table 2.3
. Refer to instruction manual
TOBPC72060000 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Inverter
Model
CIMR
F7S20P4
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
Terminal
Screws
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
2
(14)
Wire Type
F7S20P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
F7S21P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7S22P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7S23P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7S25P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7S27P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
F7S2011 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5
F7S2015
F7S2018
F7S2022
F7S2030
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
B1, B2
M6
M5
M6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
B1, B2
M8
M5
M6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
2.5
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
5.5
(10)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
30 to 38
(4 to 2)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
30 to 38
(3 to 2)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
30 to 60
(3 to 1)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
3.5
(12)
5.5
(10)
2
(14)
2
(14)
8
(8)
14
(6)
-
22
(4)
50
(1)
-
22
(4)
-
22
(4)
30
(3)
30
(4)
-
22
(4)
30
(3)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR
F7S2037
F7S2045
F7S2055
F7S2075
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, / 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, / 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, / 2
, 1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11,
S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, / 2
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M12
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
17.6 to 22.5
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
30 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(1 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
100
(4/0)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
30 to 60
(3 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 125
(3/0 to 250)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
100 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
60
(2/0)
Wire Type
-
30
(2)
1.25
(16)
80
(3/0)
-
38
(1)
1.25
(16)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
100
(4/0)
-
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
50
(1/0)
1.25
(16)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
-
100
(3/0)
1.25
(16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 ° C
2-
7
2
-8
Inverter
Model
CIMR
F7S40P4
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm 2
(AWG)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
Wire Type
F7S40P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7S41P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7S42P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
M4
M4
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
F7S43P7
F7S45P5
F7S47P5
F7S4011
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
M4
M4
M5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.8
2.5
F7S4015
F7S4018
F7S4022
F7S4030
F7S4037
F7S4045
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
B1, B2
M5
M5
(M6)
M6
M5
M6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
2.5
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
4.0 to 5.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
5.5(10)
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14 to 38
(6 to 2)
22
(4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22 to 60
(4 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
38 to 60
(2 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8 to 38
(8 to 2)
8
(8)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
2
(14)
2
(14)
2
(14)
-
22
(4)
38
(2)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
8
(8)
8
(8)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
2
(14)
5.5
(10)
3.5
(12)
8
(8)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
3.5
(12)
22
(4)
22
(4)
14
(6)
14
(6)
38
(2)
-
22
(4)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR
F7S4055
F7S4075
F7S4090
F7S4110
F7S4132
F7S4160
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
3
3
3
3
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
Terminal
Screws
M8
M6
M8
M10
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M10
M8
M12
M4
M10
M10
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
17.6 to 22.5
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
17.6 to 22.5
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
17.6 to 22.5
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
17.6 to 22.5
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm 2
(AWG)
50
(1)
Wire Type
100
(4/0)
1.25
(16)
100 × 2P
(4/0 × 2P)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
-
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
-
22
(4)
60
(2/0)
50
(1/0)
-
50
(1)
1.25
(16)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
-
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
60
(2/0)
1.25
(16)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
60 × 2P
(2/0 × 2P)
-
38
(2)
1.25
(16)
100
(4/0)
100
(4/0)
-
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 200
(4/0 to 400)
80 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
50 to 100
(1 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
2-
9
2
-10
Inverter
Model
CIMR
F7S4185
F7S4220
F7S4300
, 1
3
, 1
3
, 1
3
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
Terminal
Screws
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
M4
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
M4
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
1.3 to 1.4
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4to 98
1.3 to 1.4
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
78.4 to 98
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size mm 2
(AWG)
150 × 2P
(300 × 2P)
125 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
325 × 2P
(600 × 2P)
-
125 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
Wire Type
125 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
125 × 4P
(250 × 4P)
125 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
125 × 4P
(4/0 × 4P)
200 × 4P
(400 × 4P)
-
100 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
250 × 2P
(500 × 2P)
200 × 2P
(400 × 2P)
125 × 4P
(250 × 4P)
-
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 ° C.
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm 2 ) Terminal Screws
M3.5
0.5
Size
1.25 to 3.5
M4
M3.5
1.25 to 4
1.25 to 3.5
0.75
M4 1.25 to 4
1.25
M3.5
M4
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
1.25 to 4
2 to 3.5
2
M4
M5
M6
2 to 4
2 to 5
2 to 6
3.5/5.5
8
14
22
30/38
50/60
M5
M6
M8
M6
M8
M6
M8
M8
M8
M10
M8
M4
M5
M6
M8
80
100
100
150
200
325
M10
M12
M12 x 2
M16
2 to 8
5.5 to 4
5.5 to 5
5.5 to 6
5.5 to 8
8 to 5
8 to 6
8 to 8
14 to 6
14 to 8
22 to 6
22 to 8
38 to 8
60 to 8
60 to 10
80 to 10
100 to 10
100 to 12
150 to 12
200 to 12
325 to 12
325 to 16
IMPORTANT
1. Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10 -3
2. Use a closed-loop connector (made by J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd. or an equivalent) for the main circuit input and output terminals of Inverters of 200V 11 kW or more and those of 400V 22 kW or more.
2-
11
2
-12
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4
. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose Terminal Symbol
Model: CIMR-F7S
200 V Class 400 V Class
20P4 to 2075 40P4 to 4300
Main circuit power input
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2022 to 2075 4022 to 4300
Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 20P4 to 2075 40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2075 40P4 to 4300 DC power input 1,
Braking Resistor Unit connection
B1, B2 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018
DC reactor connection 1, 2 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018
Braking Unit connection 3, 2022 to 2075 4022 to 4300
Ground 20P4 to 2075 40P4 to 4300
Note The 1 and input terminals for the DC power do not conform to UL/cUL standards.
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2.5
.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class
CIMR-F7S20P4 to 2018
B1 B2
400 V Class
CIMR-F7S40P4 to 4018
B1 B2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Power supply
Control circuits
Cooling fan is provided for
Inverters of 3.7 kW or more.
CIMR-F7S2022, 2030
㧗㧟
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Power supply
Control circuits
Cooling fan is provided for
Inverters of 2.2 kW or more.
CIMR-F7S4022 to 4055
㧗 㧟
㧗㧝
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Power supply
Control circuits
Power supply
Control circuits
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
r/
1
/
2
*
㧗㧝
CIMR-F7S2037 to 2075
㧗㧟 a b a b
Power supply
Control circuits
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Note Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
* These terminals are wired before shipment.
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
r/
1
200/
2
200
400/
2
400
㧗㧝
CIMR-F7S4075 to 4300
㧗㧟 a b
400/200 a b
Power supply
Control circuits
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
2-
13
2
-14
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5.
The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-F7S20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to 4018
DC reactor
(optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
㧗㧝 㧗 2 B1 B2
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2
T/L3
V/T2
W/T3
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
M
CIMR-F7S2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
3-phase 200
VAC (200 VAC)
㧗㧝
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
㧗 3 -
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
M
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor.
The DC reactor is built in.
IMPORTANT
When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR), connect the B1 terminal of the
Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the − terminal of the Inverter to the − terminal of the
Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used in this case.
CIMR-F7S2037 to 2075
3-phase
200 VAC
㧗㧝 㧗 3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
S1/L21
T1/L31 r/
1
/
2
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
M
CIMR-F7S4075 to 4300
3-phase
400 VAC
㧗㧝
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31 r/
1
200/
400/
㧗 3
2
200
2
400
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
M
Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models.
IMPORTANT
If a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor Unit is connected to a wrong terminal, the Inverter, Braking Unit, or
Braking Resistor Unit can be damaged.
Refer to FOR VARISPEED-600 SERIES INVERTER BRAKING UNIT BRAKING RESISTOR UNIT
INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC720600000) for connecting the Inverter with a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor
Unit.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for wiring the main circuit power supply inputs.
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
Always connect the power input terminals (R, S, and T) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker
(MCCB) suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.
•
•
For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at
120% of the rated output current).
If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Fig 2.6
.
Inverter
20P4 to 2030: 3-phase,
200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2037 to 2075: 3-phase,
200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
40P4 to 4300: 3-phase,
380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power supply
Fault output
(NC)
* For 400 V Class Inverters, connect a 400/200 V transformer.
Fig 2.6 MCCB Installation
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. At the Inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter for Inverters with a countermeasure against high frequency to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and to ignore high-frequency leakage current. Use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumulative sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
Using a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure against high frequency may result in a malfunction caused by high-frequency leakage current. If a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure malfunctions, replace it with a ground fault interrupter with a countermeasure against high frequency or reduce the carrier frequency of the Inverter. Alternatively, use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumulative sensitivity amperage of at least 200 mA per Inverter.
2-
15
2
-16
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter, however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop.
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
•
•
When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.
If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor or DC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side
Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter.
• Correct Noise Filter Installation
Power supply
MCCB
Noise filter
MCCB
Inverter
Other controllers
M
Use a special-purpose noise filter for Inverters.
Fig 2.7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation
Power supply MCCB
Inverter
MCCB
Generalpurpose noise filter
Other controllers
M
Power supply
MCCB
Generalpurpose noise filter
Inverter M
MCCB
Other controllers
Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No generalpurpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise generated from the Inverter.
Fig 2.8 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation
Do not use a Phase Advancing Capacitor
If a phase advancing capacitor or a surge absorber is connected to the input side of the inverter’s main circuit to improve the power factor, harmonics from the inverter may cause overheating or damage the phase advancing capacitor or the surge absorber. Also, the inverter may malfunction because of the overcurrent.
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U, V, and W to motor lead wires U, V, and W, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the Forward Run Command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the Forward Run Command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U, V, and W. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Installing a Low-voltage Manual Starter
For applications where the overhauling load causes the motor to turn even when the Inverter power is OFF, be sure to connect a low-voltage manual starter on the Inverter’s output side. Be sure to open the low-voltage manual starter when wiring and during maintenance and inspection of the Inverter.
E.g.: AICUT LB Series manufactured by AICHI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
2-
17
2
-18
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Switch the Magnetic Starter (Contactor) ON/OFF during Operation
Usually, a magnetic starter should not be connected between the Inverter and the motor. If a magnetic starter must be installed between the Inverter and the motor, never switch ON (close) or OFF (open) during operation, except during an emergency. Confirm that an inverter baseblock has occurred before turning the magnetic starter ON (close) or OFF (open). If the magnetic starter is turned ON (close) or OFF (open) while the
Inverter is running and not during a baseblock, an Inverter fault may occur. For example, a large inrush current could flow and activate the Inverter overcurrent protection.
Note The condition of the Inverter baseblock can be checked with the baseblock signal of the multi-function contact output. For details, refer to the User
Constant Tables in Chapter 5.
Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side
Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.
Power supply
MCCB
Inverter
Noise filter
M
Radio noise
Inductive noise
AM radio
Signal line
Controller
Inductive Noise:
Radio Noise:
Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise.
Fig 2.9 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side
Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.
Power supply
MCCB
Inverter
Metal pipe
M
30 cm min.
Signal line
Controller
Fig 2.10 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise, install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Steel box
Power supply
MCCB
Noise filter
Inverter
Noise filter
Metal pipe
M
Fig 2.11 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices or motor operations. To prevent this, adjust the carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6
. (For details, refer to
Chapter 5 User Constants .)
Cable length
Carrier frequency
Table 2.6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
50 m max.
12 kHz max.
100 m max.
8 kHz max.
More than 100 m
4 kHz max.
Note With open-loop vector control for PM (A1-02 = 7), the maximum length of the cable between the Inverter and the motor is 100 m, and the maximum carrier frequency is 4 kHz. If not, the performance of the motor might be abnormal.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
•
•
Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω .
Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
•
•
Always minimize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK
Fig 2.12 Ground Wiring
NO
2-
19
2
-20
Connecting the Braking Resistor (ERF)
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to 3.7 kW.
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.13
.
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor)
L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit selection)
Table 2.7
1 (Enables overheat protection)
0 (Disables overvoltage inhibit selection)
Inverter
Braking resistor
Fig 2.13 Connecting the Braking Resistor
IMPORTANT
The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equipment.
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Use the following settings if using a Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit.
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can also be used with Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to 3.7
kW.
Table 2.8
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor) 0 (Disables overheat protection)
L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit selection) 0 (Disables overvoltage inhibit selection)
L8-01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts (ERF type mounted to
Inverter) is connected.
When using the braking resister unit, set L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit selection) to 0 (Disabled). If L3-11 is not set to 0, the inverter might not stop within the set deceleration time.
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
To prevent the Unit from overheating, design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2.14
.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
Inverter
Thermal overload relay trip contact
IMPORTANT
When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR), connect the B1 terminal of the
Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the − terminal of the Inverter to the − terminal of the
Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used in this case.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output
CDBR Braking
Unit
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
Inverter
Thermal protector trip contact
Thermal overload relay trip contact
Fig 2.14 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in Fig 2.15
.
There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).
2-
21
2
-22
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Inverter
Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3
Braking Unit #1
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostat contacts)
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostatic contacts)
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermostatic contacts)
Fig 2.15 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Breaking Unit Application Precautions
When using a Braking Resistor Unit, create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking resistor and turn
OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
MCCB
Three-phase power:
200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz or
380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
Inverter
MC MA
Fault contacts
* Use a transformer with 200 and 400 V outputs for the power 400 V Inverter.
Fig 2.16 Power Shutoff Sequence
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting speeds from an external speed setter (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.
Shield terminal
E(G)
2k Ω
2k Ω
V Speed setting power supply +15 V 20 mA
A1 Master speed reference 0 to 10 V (-10 to 10 V)
A2 Master speed reference 4 to 20 A
(0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V)
2k Ω
2k Ω
P P
P P
A3 Auxiliary reference 0 to 10 V (-10 to 10 V)
RP Pulse train input 32 kHz max.
AC Analog common
-V Speed setting power supply -15 V 20 mA
Fig 2.17
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.9
.
Terminals
FM, AC, AM, P1, P2, PC,
SC, A1, A2,
S8
A3
M2
, +V, -V ,
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7,
, MA, MB, MC, M1,
Table 2.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N ⋅ m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
Wire Type
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2
*2
(20 to 14)
0.75
(18)
MP, RP, R+, R-, S+, S-,
IG
E (G)
Phoenix type
M3.5
0.5 to 0.6
0.8 to 1.0
Single wire
(26 to 14)
0.5 to 2
*2
(20 to 14)
*3
0.14 to 2.5
Stranded wire:
0.14 to 1.5
:
0.75
(18)
1.25
(12)
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
Wire or equivalent)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external speed reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Close-loop Connector Sizes for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
2-
23
2
-24
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
0.25 (24)
0.5 (20)
0.75 (18)
1.25 (16)
2 (14)
Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Model
AI 0.25 - 8YE
AI 0.5 - 8WH
AI 0.75 - 8GY
AI 1.5 - 8BK
AI 2.5 - 8BU d1
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.8
2.3
d2
2
2.5
2.8
3.4
4.2
14
14
14
L
12.5
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact d1 d2
Fig 2.18 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Thin-slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit terminal block
Strip the end for
7 mm if no solderless terminal is used.
Wires
Solderless terminal or wire without soldering
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.19 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.11
. Use the appropriate terminals for the correct purposes.
Type
Sequence input signals
Analog input signals
Photocoupler outputs
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals
No.
Signal Name Function
S1 Forward Run/Stop Command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2 Reverse Run/Stop Command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3 Multi-function input 1
*1
S4 Multi-function input 2
*1
Factory setting: External fault when ON.
Factory setting: Fault reset when ON.
S5
S6
S7
Multi-function input 3
Multi-function input 4
Multi-function input 5
*1
*1
*1
Signal Level
Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 1 effective when ON.
Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 2 effective when ON.
Factory setting: Jog frequency selected when
ON.
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photocoupler isolation
S8 Multi-function input 6
SC Sequence input common
Factory setting: Not used (H1-06 = F).
-
+V
-V
+15 V power output
-15 V power output
+15 V power supply for analog references
-15 V power supply for analog references
+15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
-15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
A1
A2
Master speed frequency reference
Multi-function analog input
-10 to +10 V/-100 to 100%
0 to +10 V/100%
4 to 20 mA/100%,
+100%
-10 to +10 V/-100 to
, 0 to +10 V/100%
Factory setting: Added to terminal A1
(H3-09 = 0)
A3 Multi-function analog input
AC Analog reference common
E(G)
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point
-10 to +10 V/-100 to +100%, 0 to +10 V/
100%
Factory setting: Not used (H3-05 = 1F)
0 V
-
P1
P2
Multi-function PHC output 1
Multi-function PHC output 2
-10 to +10 V , 0 to +10
V (Input impedance:
20 k Ω )
4 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 250 Ω )
-10 to +10 V , 0 to +10
V (Input impedance:
20 k Ω )
-10 to +10 V, 0 to +10 V
(Input impedance:
20 k Ω )
-
-
Factory setting: Zero-speed
Zero-speed level (b2-01) or below when ON.
Factory setting: speed agreement detection
Frequency within 2% of set speed when ON.
50 mA max. at 48 VDC
*2
PC
Photocoupler output common for P1 and P2
-
2-
25
2
-26
Type
Relay outputs
No.
MA
MB
MC
M1
Fault output signal (NC contact)
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Signal Name
Fault output signal (NO contact)
Function
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
Relay contact output common
-
Multi-function contact output
(NO contact)
Factory setting: Operating
Operating when CLOSED across M1 and
M2.
Signal Level
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
10 mA min., 1 A max. at
250 VAC
10 mA min., 1 A max. at
30 VDC
Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA
*4
M2
Analog monitor outputs
Pulse
I/O
FM
AM
Multi-function analog monitor 1
Multi-function analog monitor 2
AC Analog common
RP
MP
Multi-function pulse input
*3
Multi-function pulse monitor
Factory setting: Motor speed
0 to 10 V/Maximum speed
Factory setting: Current monitor
5 V/Inverter's rated current
-
Factory setting: Speed reference input
(H6-01 = 0)
Factory setting: Output frequency
(H6-06 = 2)
-10 to +10 VDC ±5%
2 mA max.
0 to 32 kHz (3 k Ω
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 k
)
Ω )
RS-
485/
422
R+
R-
S+
S-
MEMOBUS communications input
MEMOBUS communications output
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well as R- and S-.
Differential input, photocoupler isolation
Differential output, photocoupler isolation
IG Communications shield wire -
* 1. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6, and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.20
.
* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.
* 4. Use the photocoupler outputs when the minimum permissible load is 5 VDC or less and 10 mA or less.
Low level voltage
High level voltage
H duty
Pulse frequency
0.0 to 0.8 V
3.5 to 13.2 V
30% to 70%
0 to 32 kHz
Flywheel diode
External power:
48 V max.
Coil
50 mA max.
The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.
Fig 2.20 Flywheel Diode Connection
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The shunt connector CN 5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
CN5
F
F
S1
1
2
OFF
V
ON
I
Terminating resistance
Analog input switch
: Factory settings
Note: Refer to Table 2.12
for S1 functions and to Table
2.13
for CN5 functions.
Fig 2.21 Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.
Name
S1-1
S1-2
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
Function
Table 2.12 DIP Switch S1
Setting
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
Input method for analog input A2
OFF: 0 to 10 V, − 10 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 k Ω )
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω )
2-
27
2
-28
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24-V common) if shunt connector CN5 is used. An external 24-V power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.13 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply External Power Supply
CN5 CN5
CN5 (NPN set) Factory setting CN5 (EXT set)
Shunt position
SC
IP24V (24 V) External +24 V
SC
IP24V (24 V)
Sinking
Mode S1 S1
S2 S2
Sourcing
Mode
CN5
SC
CN5 (PNP set)
IP24V (24 V)
S1
S2
CN5
External + 24 V
SC
CN5 (EXT set)
IP24V (24 V)
S1
S2
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.22
.
Inverter
CIMR-F7S2022
External speed references
Multi-function contact input
Defaults
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Thermal switch contact for Braking Unit
External fault
3 4
Fault reset
Multi-step command 1
(Main speed switching)
Multi-step speed setting 2
Jog speed selection
Not used
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
+24V 8mA
MP
AC
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 k Ω )
Default: Output frequency
CN5 (NPN setting)
SC
Pulse train input
2 k
Ω
Speed setting adjustment
Speed setter
3
2 k
Ω
1
2
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA P
0 to 10 V P
MEMOBUS communications
RS-485/422
P
R+
R-
S+
S-
E(G)
+24V
Shield wire connection terminal
RP
+V
A1
A2
A3
AC
Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 k
Ω
)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
Speed setting power
+15 V 20 mA
0V
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 k
Ω
)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250
Ω
)
[0 to 10 V (20 k
Ω
) input]
Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 k
Ω
)
Factory setting:
Not used
-V (
−
15V 20mA)
Terminating resistance
IG
AM
FM
AC
−
Ammeter adjustment
20 k
Ω
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
AM
+ Default: Output current
0 to +10 V
−
FM
Ammeter adjustment
20 k
Ω
+
Multi-function analog output 1
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Motor speed
0 to +10 V
E(G)
MA
MB
MC
M1
M2
P1
P2
PC
MA Error contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Min. load
5 VDC, 10 mA
MC
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Default: Running signal
Min. load
5 VDC, 10 mA
Open collector 1
Default: Zero- speed
Open collector 2
Default:
Speed agree signal
Multi-function open-collector outputs
48 VDC, 50 mA
Fig 2.22 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2-
29
2
-30
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
•
•
•
•
•
Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, and M2 (contact outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
Use shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process cable ends as shown in Fig 2.23
.
Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals.
Shield sheath Armor
Do not connect here.
Connect to shield sheath terminal at Inverter (terminal E
(G))
Insulate with tape
Fig 2.23 Processing the Ends of Shielded Twisted-pair Cables
Wiring Check
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.
•
•
Is all wiring correct?
Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
•
•
Are all screws tight?
Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2-
31
2
-32
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models and Specifications
Up to three option cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one board into each of the three places on the control board (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.24
.
Table 2.14
lists the type of option cards and their specifications.
Table 2.14 Option Card Specifications
Card
PG Speed Control Card
Speed Reference Cards
DeviceNet Communication
Card
CC-Link Interface Card
L ON W ORKS Communication Card
SI-N1
SI-C
SI-J
Analog Monitor Card
Digital Output Card
AO-08
AO-12
DO-08
DO-02C
Model Specifications
PG-X2
AI-14U
Phase A/B/Z line-driver inputs
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 k Ω ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω ), 1 channel
Input resolution: 14-bit
AI-14B
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 k Ω )
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω ), 3 channels
Input resolution: 13-bit with sign bit
DI-08 8-bit digital speed reference setting
DI-16H2 16-bit digital speed reference setting
DeviceNet communications support
CC-Link communications support
L ON W ORKS communications support
8-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs
2 relay outputs
Mounting Location
A
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
C
C
C
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Installation
Before mounting an option card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front cover and then mount the option card.
The side of the front cover of the Inverter for 200/400 V Class 0.4 to 5.5 kW can be cut out as described in Fig
2.25
to make wiring of the option card easy. If the side of the front cover is cut out, the protective structure will be open chassis (IEC IP00).
Refer to documentation provided with the option card for actual mounting instructions for option slots A, C, and D.
Preventing C and D option card Connectors from Rising
After installing an option card into slot C or D, insert an option clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising. The option clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the clip and pulling it out.
Remove the option clip before installing an option card into slot C or D. The option card cannot be installed completely and may not function property if it is installed with the option clip attached.
A option card mounting spacer hole
4CN
A option card connector
2CN
C option card connector
A option card mounting spacer
(Provided with A option card.)
Option clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D option cards)
3CN
D option card connector
C option card mounting spacer
C option card
D option card
D option card mounting spacer
A option card
Fig 2.24 Mounting option cards
A option card mounting spacer
Front Cover
Slit
Fig 2.25 Cutting the Front Cover
Cut out the slits on the front cover with nippers. Be careful to avoid injury.
2-
33
2
-34
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications
The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Cards are given in the following tables.
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
Terminal
TA1
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
7
8
Table 2.15 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
A-phase + input terminal
A-phase - input terminal
B-phase + input terminal
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
B-phase - input terminal
Z-phase + input terminal
Z-phase - input terminal
Common terminal 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
A-phase + output terminal
A-phase - output terminal
B-phase + output terminal
B-phase - output terminal
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
TA2
5
6
Z-phase + output terminal
Z-phase - output terminal
TA3
7
(E)
Control circuit common
Shield connection terminal
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
Control circuit GND
-
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Wiring
Wiring the PG-X2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-X2.
Three-phase
200 VAC
(400 VAC)
Inverter
M
1
2
㔚Ḯ +12 V
㔚Ḯ 0 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (-)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (-)
Z ⋧ࡄ࡞ࠬജ +
Z ⋧ࡄ࡞ࠬജ (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
Z-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if for motor forward rotation, B-phase advancement.
Fig 2.26 PG-X2 Wiring
2-
35
2
-36
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Use no more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.16
.
Terminal
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Terminal
Screws
-
M3.5
Table 2.16 Wire Sizes
Wire Thickness (mm
0.5 to 2
2
Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
) Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or equivalent)
Straight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals
We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Refer to Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes for specifications.
Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2.17
.
Wire Thickness [mm
2
]
Table 2.17 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques
Terminal
Screws
Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N • m)
0.5
1.25 - 3.5
0.75
1.25
2
M3.5
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
2 - 3.5
0.8
Wiring Method and Precautions
The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to page 2-24. Observe the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Board from main circuit lines and power lines.
•
•
•
•
Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long. Refer to Fig 2.23
for details on connecting the shield.
Connect the shield to the shield terminal (E).
Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm.
Digital Operator and Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator............................................................3-2
Modes ..........................................................................3-5
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Mode Indicators (LED)
FWD: Lit when there is a Forward Run Command input.
REV: Lit when there is a Reverse Run Command input.
SEQ: Lit when the Run Command from the control circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when error activated.
Blinks when alarm activated.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and settings.
Mode Display
DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE:Lit in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
3
-2
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1
.
Key Name
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
Digital Operator
Key
JOG Key
Name
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)
Function
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
Digital Operator.
FWD/REV Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Shift/RESET Key
Increment Key
Decrement Key
DATA/ENTER Key
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.
Also used to switch from one screen to another.
Constants cannot be changed when Undervoltage (UV) is detected.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is shown in the Fig 3.2
.
Inverter output frequency
RUN
STOP
Frequency setting
RUN
STOP
Lit
STOP
Blinking Not lit
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-
3
3
-4
The following table shows the relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the
Inverter conditions.
The indicators are lit, unlit or blinking reflecting the order of priority.
Priority
1
Table 3.2 Relation of Inverter to RUN and STOP Indicators
RUN
Indicator
STOP
Indicator
Inverter
Status
Stopped
Conditions
2
3
Stopped*
Stopped
Power supply is shut down.
Emergency stop
• Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when the control circuit terminals were used to operate the Inverter.
• Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal.
Switched from LOCAL (operation using the Digital Operator) to
REMOTE (operation using the control circuit terminals) when the Run
Command is sent from the external terminal.
Switched from the Quick or Advanced Quick programming mode to the
Drive mode when the Run Command is sent from the external terminal.
The Inverter is run at a speed below the minimum speed.
The Run Command is carried out when the External Baseblock Command using the multi-function contact input terminal is issued.
4 Stopped Stopped
5 Running
6
7
Running
Running
During deceleration to a stop
During emergency deceleration
• Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when operating the
Inverter using the control circuit terminals.
• Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal.
Run Command is issued.
Note : Lit : Blinking : Not lit
* If planning to run the Inverter again, first turn OFF the Run Command and Emergency Stop Command from the control circuit terminal and send the Run
Command.
Modes
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.3
.
Drive mode
Quick programming mode
Advanced programming mode
Verify mode
Mode
Autotuning mode
Table 3.3 Modes
Primary function(s)
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as speed references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user constants to operate the
Inverter (e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).
Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factoryset values.
Use this mode to measure the motor line-to-line resistance while the motor is stopped.
3-
5
3
-6
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the setting display.
MENU Power ON
Drive Mode DATA
ENTER
(Operation possible)
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Quick
Programming Mode
MENU
DATA
ENTER
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Advanced
Programming Mode
MENU
DATA
ENTER
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
ESC ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
MENU
Verify Mode DATA
ENTER
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Autotuning
Mode
MENU
ESC
DATA
ENTER
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
If a user constant is changed the number will be dislayed.
DATA
ENTER
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
When returning from a setting display, the rightmost digit of the monitor display will flash.
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
DATA
ENTER
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Mode Selection Displays Monitor Displays
㧦 Lit ޓޓޓ㧦 Flashing ޓޓޓ㧦 Not lit
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
Setting Displays
IMPORTANT
When running the Inverter after using Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to enter the drive mode (DRIVE indicator will flash) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive mode display to bring up the monitor display (DRIVE indicator will light). Run Commands can't be received from any other display. (Monitor display in the drive mode will appear when the power is turned ON.)
Modes
Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in drive mode: The speed reference, motor speed, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the speed can be changed from the speed setting display. Use the
Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the speed. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Se l ect i on D i sp l ay
M EN U
Mon i tor Constant D i sp l ay
Power O N
Deta il ed Mon i tor Constant
D i sp l ay
Mon i tor D i sp l ay
Dr i ve Mode
*
DA T A
ENTE R speed reference
*
E SC
DA T A
ENTE R
Speed reference sett i ng / d i sp l ay un i t o1 03 *
E SC
DR I V E QU I C K ADV V E R IFY A .T
U NE
E SC
E SC
Motor speed
Output current
Mon i tor sett i ng for o1 01
* T he a l phabet i ca l character shown on the far l eft of the mon i tor d i sp l ay i nd i cates the sett i ng of o1 03 ( F requency un i ts of reference sett i ng and mon i tor) .
: H z (o1 03 = 0)
: % (o1 03 = 1)
: m i n
1
(o1 03 = 2 to 39) ޓ
: User des i red d i sp l ay (o1 03 = 4 0 to
3999)
E SC
E SC
Status Mon i tor
㧪
R E S ET
E SC
Speed reference
DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
F an operat i ng t i me
DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
E SC
E rror T race
DA T A
ENTE R
㧪
R E S ET
Current error
E SC
Operat i ng t i me at error DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
E SC
E SC
F au l t Hi story
㧪
R E S ET
1st prev i ous error
E SC
Operat i ng t i me at 4 th prev i ous error
E SC
DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
DR I V E QU I C K ADV V E R IFY A .T
U NE DR I V E QU I C K ADV V E R IFY A .T
U NE
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
IMPORTANT
The display for the first monitor constant (speed reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON. The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
3-
7
3
-8
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Monitor Display Setting Display Mode Selection Display
MENU
Quick Programming Mode
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYA.TUNE
DATA
ENTER
Control method selection DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Reference selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Operation method selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Stopping method selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
C1-01: Acceleration time 1
C1-02: Deceleration time 1
C6-01: CT/VT selection d1-01: Speed reference 1 d1-02: Speed reference 2 d1-03: Speed reference 3 d1-04: Speed reference 4 d1-17: Jog speed reference
ESC
AO CH2 output gain
ESC
AO CH1 output gain
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
E1-01: Input voltage setting
E1-04: Max. speed
E1-05: Max. voltage
E1-09: Min. speed
E1-13: Base voltage
E5-01: Motor capacity selection
E5-02: Motor rated capacity
E5-03: Motor rated current
E5-04: Number of motor poles
E5-05: Motor armature resistance
E5-06: Motor d-axis inductance
E5-07: Motor q-axis inductance
E5-09: Motor generated voltage
constant
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
Modes
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode, all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display Mode Selection Display
MENU
DATA
ENTER
Advanced Programming Mode
Setup settings: ޓ A1-xx
㧪
RESET
Access level DATA
ENTER
DRIVE QUICK ADV
VERIFY A.TUNE
ESC
ESC
ESC
Control mode selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Initialize
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
ESC
PID control: ޓ b5-xx
㧪
RESET
PID control mode selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Proportional gain DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
PID feedback command loss detection time
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
ESC
Torque limits: L7-xx
㧪
RESET
Forward torque limit
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Reverse torque limit
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Reverse regenerative torque limit DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
ESC
Copy functions: ޓ o3-xx
㧪
RESET
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Copy function selection DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Read permitted selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
3-
9
3
-10
Setting User Constants
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.
Step
No.
Table 3.4 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode
Digital Operator Display Description
1 Power supply turned ON.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
2 MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
3
MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
4
MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
5
DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
6
7
8
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting display. The setting of C1-01 (10.0) is displayed.
Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
9
10
11
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Increment Key pressed to change set value to
20.0 s.
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data. “END” is displayed for 10 s and then the entered value is displayed for 0.5 s.
The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
Modes
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Of the environment mode settings, only A1-02 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other environment modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as are used in the programming modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), and E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting).
Mode Selection Display
MENU
Monitor Display Setting Display
Verify Mode
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
DATA
ENTER
Speed reference selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Speed reference selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Acceleration time 1
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Acceleration time 1
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
Input voltage setting DATA
ENTER
ESC
Input voltage setting
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A.TUNE
Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode
DATA
ENTER
3-
11
3
-12
Autotuning Mode
For examples of autotuning operation, refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation .
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example of trial operation.
Overview of Trial Operation Procedure........................4-2
Trial Operation Procedures..........................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................4-27
4
-2
Overview of Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart. When setting the basic user constants, always set C6-01 (CT/VT Selection) according to the application.
Be sure to set E1-01 (Input voltage setting) to the Inverter input voltage in accordance with the supply voltage being used.
S T AR T
I
nsta
ll
at
i
on
W
i
r
i
ng
Set power supp
l
y vo
l
tage
.
∗
T
urn O
N
power
.
Conf
i
rm status
.
Bas
i
c sett
i
ngs
Motor constant sett
i
ngs
App
li
cat
i
o
i
n sett
i
ngs
(Advanced programm
i
ng mode)
N
o
-l
oad operat
i
on
L
oaded operat
i
on
Opt
i
mum adjustments and constant sett
i
ngs
Check
/
record constants
.
EN D
∗ Set for 4 00 V C l ass I nverter for 75 kW or more .
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
Trial Operation Procedures
Trial Operation Procedures
The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section.
Application Confirmation
First, confirm the application before using the Inverter.
• Fan, blower, pump
• Other equipment
For any Inverter application other than a fan, blower, or pump, set C6-01 (CT/VT Selection) to 0 (CT: low carrier, constant torque). The default setting is 1 (VT: high carrier, variable torque).
However, only 1(VT) can be set for 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters with any SPEC.
Note: Inverters with SPEC: B or earlier are used only for applications requiring variable torque.
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the power tap nearest to the actual power supply voltage. If the wrong connector is selected, the Inverter may be damaged.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2
).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Power tap
200 V Class power supply
400V Class power supply
Power supply input terminals
Jumper (factory-set position)
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Jumper
4-
3
4
-4
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
1. Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200V Class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
400V Class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC 50/60 Hz
For an Inverter of 200 V, 37 kW or more, use one of the following power supplies for the cooling fan.
3-phase 200/208/220 VAC 50 Hz or 3-phase 200/208/220/230 VAC 60 Hz
2. Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
3. Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
4. Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to turn OFF.
5. When using a PG speed control board, make sure that it is wired correctly.
6. Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system. (No-load condition)
Checking the Display Status
If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Display for normal operation
The speed reference ( % ) monitor is displayed in the data display section.
&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting . The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
Display for fault operation
The display will differ depending on the type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
Trial Operation Procedures
1
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operation should be lit) and then set the following user constants. Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to Chapter 5 User Constants and Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function for details on the user constants.
Constants that must be set are listed in Table 4.1
and those that are set according to the application are listed in
Table 4.2.
Table 4.1 Basic Settings of Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description Setting Range
Factory
Setting
Page
A1-02
Control method selection
Used to select the control method for the
Inverter
0: Sequence test
(This method implements a sequence test with an induction motor connected or any other motor not connected.)
6: Flux vector control for PM
7: Open-loop vector control for PM
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
0 or 7
0, 6, or 7
7 5-4 b1-01 Reference selection
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input b1-02
Operation method selection
Set the Run Command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
C1-01 Acceleration time 1
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from
0 to the maximum speed, in 1-second units.
C1-02 Deceleration time 1
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum speed to 0, in 1-second units.
C6-01 CT/VT selection
Set to CT (not low noise, maximum current overload: 150%) or VT (low noise, maximum current overload:120%).
0: CT
1: VT
0 to 3
0 to 4
0 to 3
0.0 to 6000.0 s
*2
0.0 to 6000.0 s
*2
0 or 1
1
1
10.0 s
10.0 s
1
*1
0
*1
5-10
6-5
6-63
6-83
5-10
6-14
6-63
6-83
5-16
6-20
5-16
6-20
5-19
6-2
E1-01
Input voltage setting
Set the Inverter's nominal input voltage in volts.
This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.
155 to 255 V
(200 V Class)
310 to 510 V
(400 V Class)
200 V
(200 V
Class)
400 V
(400 V
Class)
5-25
6-25
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/ deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
* 2. Only 1(VT) can be set for 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters.
4-
5
4
-6
Table 4.2 Constants That Are Set As Required
Constant
Number b1-03
Name
Stopping method selection
Description
Used to set the stopping method used when a
Stop Command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run Commands are disregarded during deceleration.)
Setting Range
0, 1, or 3 d1-01 to d1-04 and d1-17
Frequency references 1 to 4 and jog frequency reference
Set the required speed references for multistep speed operation or jogging.
0.00 to
100.00%
H4-02 and
H4-05
FM and AM terminal output gain
Set the voltage level gain for the multi-function analog output 1 (H4-02) and 2 (H4-05).
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100% output for the monitor item.
0.00 to 2.50
Factory
Setting
0 d1-01 to d1-04:
0.00 % d1-17:
10.00 %
H4-02:
1.00
H4-05:
0.50
Page
5-10
6-16
5-20
6-9
5-42
IMPORTANT
When C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), non-low noise will apply and the Inverter overload withstand ratio will be
150% of the Inverter rating per minute. When C6-01 is set to 1 (VT), low noise will apply and the Inverter overload withstand ratio will be 120% of the Inverter rating per minute. If C6-01 is set to 1 (VT) when overload withstand capability is required by the application, the life of the Inverter may be reduced.
Trial Operation Procedures
Motor Constant Settings
The procedures for setting motor constants differ in accordance with the following three conditions and the type of motor being used. Follow each step to correctly set the motor constants.
•
•
•
When using the Varispeed F7S for the first time.
When replacing the motor or the Inverter.
When replacing the PG.
Use the following flow chart to set the motor constants.
Start
N o
I n i t i a l operat i on ?
Y es
N o
N ew motor or I nverter ?
Y es
Standard I PM motor for f l ux vector contro l
Standard I PM motor for open -l oop vector contro l
Motor type ?
Contro l method se l ect i on (A1 02)*
Set A1 02 to 7
(Open -l oop vector contro l for PM) .
Set A1 02 to 6 ( Fl ux vector contro l for PM) .
N ew PG ?
Y es
N o
Set motor constants. Refer to page 4-8.
Set motor constants. Refer to page 4-8.
Select the rotational direction of motor.
Refer to page 4-11.
Confirm the rotational direction of motor.
Refer to page 4-11.
Adjust zero-point pulse of PG.
Refer to page 4-12.
E nd
* F actory sett i ng : A1 02 = 7 (Open -l oop vector contro l for PM) .
Fig 4.3 Flow Chart for Motor Constant Settings
4-
7
4
-8
The following sections describe how to select a control method and how to set the motor constants.
Control Method Selection
Select the control method in accordance with the type of motor being used.
Table 4.3 Control Method Selection
Control Method
Constant
Setting
Applicable Motor
*2
Flux vector control for PM A1-02 = 6
Standard IPM motor for the flux vector control
(Constant torque series: SST4 motors)
Open-loop vector control for
PM
*1
A1-02=7
(Default)
Standard IPM motor for the open-loop vector control
(Variable torque series: SSR1 motors)
* 1. Only for applications of requiring variable torque. Do not use this control method for elevating machines or applications requiring constant torque.
* 2. Cannot be used for the following applications:
•Operations switching commercial power supply and Inverter
•Running more than one motor per Inverter (Multi-motor drive)
Motor Constant Settings
Flux vector control for PM (A1-02 = 6)
1. Motor Constant Settings
Check the nameplate (NP) on the motor being used to obtain the required motor constant settings.
Record those values in the NP Value (Setting) columns of Table 4.4.
8#4+52''&
2*#5'2'4/#0'06/#)0'6/1614
6;2'55621.'5'
2416'%6+10
M9
'
8
'
*\
%11.+0)
4#6+0) # TOKP T
' ' .F
2#4#/'6'4
'
'
+05 %11.#066'/2 ͠ #.6+67&' O
.S
-G
'
'
Ǎǰ '
56&
$4)01
DRIVE
END
OPP
END
/#55 MI Ǎǰ ’
5'401 ;'#4
;#5-#9#'.'%64+%%14214#6+10
,#2#0
-K
-V
Fig 4.4 Example of the Nameplate on a Standard Yaskawa IPM Motor for the Flux Vector Control
Set the Inverter to the values that were recorded in Table 4.4 starting from the top. After making the settings, confirm that the settings for the motor constants are correct.
Note: If the setting of E5-01 (Motor capacity selection) is changed, the other motor constants being set will return to the factory settings. If so, reset the
Inverter to the required settings recorded in Table 4.3 starting from the top.
Trial Operation Procedures
Constant
No.
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
E1-13
E5-02
E5-03
Constant Name
Motor Capacity
Selection
*1
Max. Speed
Motor base voltage
Motor rated capacity
Motor rated capacity
Motor rated current
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E5-07
E5-09
E5-11
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance
Motor d-axis inductance
Motor q-axis inductance
Motor generated voltage constant
PG home position offset
(POLES)
(
(r1)
(Ld)
(Lq)
(Ke)
Δθ )
* 1. Table 4.5 shows the settings of E5-01 (motor capacity selection).
* 2. Table 4.6 shows the allowable range of the fixed output.
Table 4.4 Motor Constant Settings
Mark on
Motor NP
Remakes
−
If using a 1750 min
-1
motor, setting is not required.
If using a 1450 min
-1
or an
1150 min
-1
motor, setting is required.
(r/min) or
(min
-1
)
Set to a value within the allowable range of the fixed output
*2
.
The setting of E1-04 will be the standard value for the 100% speed reference.
(r/min) or
(min
-1
)
−
(V)
(KW)
(A)
If two constants are shown for the voltage (V), use the one in the lower row.
−
If two constants are shown for the amperes (A), use the one in the lower row.
Setting is usually not required.
(6: Fixed value)
−
−
−
−
−
NP Value
(Setting)
Confirmed
4-
9
4
-10
11.00
15.00
18.50
22.00
30.00
37.00
45.00
55.00
Motor capacity
(kW)
0.4
0.75
1.50
2.20
3.70
5.50
7.50
75.00
90.00
110.00
132.00
160.00
200.00
250.00
300.00
1750 min
-1
• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 75 kW)
• 1:1.3 (90 kW to 160 kW)
• 1:1.2 (200 kW to 300 kW)
Table 4.5 Settings for E5-01 (Motor Capacity Selection)
400 V
1750 min
-1
02C
02D
02E
02F
028
029
02A
02B
020
021
022
023
024
026
027
034
035
036
037
030
031
032
033
200 V
1750 min
-1
00B
00C
00D
00E
007
008
009
00A
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
-
-
-
-
00F
-
-
-
200 V
1450 min
10B
10C
10D
10E
107
108
109
10A
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
-
-
-
-
10F
-
-
-
-1
400 V
1450 min
-1
200 V
1150 min
-1
20B
20C
20D
20E
207
208
209
20A
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
-
-
-
-
-
-
20F
-
12C
12D
12E
12F
128
129
12A
12B
120
121
122
123
124
126
127
134
135
136
-
130
131
132
133
Table 4.6 Allowable Range of Fixed Output
Base Speed (E1-06)
1450 min
-1
• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 55 kW)
• 1:1.3 (75 kW to 160 kW)
• 1:1.2 (200 kW, 250 kW)
1150 min
-1
• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 45 kW)
• 1:1.3 (55 kW to 160 kW)
• 1:1.2 (200 kW)
400 V
1150 min
-1
22C
22D
22E
22F
228
229
22A
22B
220
221
222
223
224
226
227
-
-
234
235
230
231
232
233
E.g.: When using a motor with a base speed (E1-06) of 1750 min -1 and a capacity of 0.4 kW within a fixed
output range of 1: 1.5, use the following equation to calculate the setting of E1-04 (Max. motor speed):
E1-04=E1-06 × 1.5.
Trial Operation Procedures
2. Selection of the Rotational Direction of Motor
Select the direction of the motor rotation in F1-05 (PG rotation).
The factory setting of F1-05 is 1 (phase B leads with forward run command).
A forward run is when the motor rotates counterclockwise (CCW) as viewed from the load side. If using a forward run in which the motor rotates clockwise (CW) as viewed from the load side, use the following procedures.
Step1. Rewire the cables between the motor and the Inverter.
Switch the cables to any two of the U, V, or W output terminals.
For example, if the terminals are connected in the order of U, V, and W, then switch the cables of terminal V and W and reconnect them in the order of U, W, and V.
Step2. Change the settings of Inverter constants.
• PG rotation (F1-05)
Change the setting from 1 [phase B leads with forward run command
•
(CCW)]to 0 [phase A leads with forward run command (CW)].
PG home position offset (E5-11)
Multiple the preset value by negative one and set E5-11 to the resulting value.
For example, if the PG home position offset has already been done, then multiply the value set automatically as PG home position by negative one and set E5-11 to the resulting value.
3. Confirmation of the Rotational Direction of Motor
Follow the procedure outlined in Table 4.7 to view the detected motor speed, and check the following two points.
•
•
When manually rotating the motor shaft, check if the actual rotational direction is in accordance with the displayed polarity .
Check if the displayed motor speed is correct.
IMPORTANT
• After confirming that the STOP LED of the Digital Operator is lit, check the rotational direction of the motor.
• Be careful not to get anything caught in the shaft or coupling.
• When manually rotating the coupling, be careful not to hurt yourself with the key slot.
Forward run
Load side
Fig 4.5 Rotational Direction of the Motor
4-
11
4
-12
No.
1
2
3
Table 4.7 Confirmation of the Rotational Direction of Motor
Procedure
Example of
Digital Operator Display
Turn on the power and change the display to the motor speed (U1-05).
U1-05 = 0.00% −
If the direction of the forward run is counterclockwise (CCW), rotate the motor shaft counterclockwise as viewed from the load side.
If the direction of the forward run is clockwise (CW), rotate the motor shaft clockwise as viewed from the load side.
U1-05 will change from 0.00 % to
3.00%.
Check if the displayed motor speed is a positive value for a forward run and if it is as appropriate as the rotating speed.
Confirmation
If the direction of the forward run is counterclockwise (CCW), rotate the motor shaft clockwise as viewed from the load side.
U1-05 will change from 0.00% to -
3.00%.
W If the direction of the forward run is clockwise (CW), rotate the motor shaft counterclockwise as viewed from the load side.
Check if the displayed motor speed is a negative value for a reverse run and if it is as appropriate as the rotating speed.
If an error was found when checking the motor rotation, correct the problem by carrying out the recommended course of action listed.
Error
Shows motor speed for opposite polarity.
Action
Change the setting for PG rotation (F1-05).
Shows incorrect motor speed or zero.
Check the PG wiring.
Refer to Wiring the PG-X2 in Chapter 2.
4. Compensation of the Zero-point Pulse of PG
Use autotuning to compensate for the zero-point pulse of a PG.
[Precautions before Autotuning]
Check the following precautions before starting autotuning.
• Autotuning of the Inverter is fundamentally different from that of the servo system. Inverter autotuning automatically adjusts the constants according to the values of the detected motor constants, whereas servosystem autotuning adjusts the constants according to the detected size of the load.
•
•
•
If autotuning is done with the motor connected to the load, the motor constants that are obtained will be incorrect and the motor may operate in an unusual manner. Be sure to separate the motor from the load before starting autotuning.
During autotuning, the required data will be measured while the motor is running, so, make sure that the motor is ready to run before starting autotuning. If a switch is installed between the motor and the Inverter, be sure to shut off the switch before autotuning.
Multi-function analog input terminals do not work during autotuning. Also, multi-function analog output terminals maintain their status that existed before autotuning was started.
Trial Operation Procedures
[Operation Procedure for Autotuning]
1. In autotuning mode, set the constant for autotuning mode selection (T1-01) to 4 (PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning).
2. Refer to the nameplate of the motor for setting the following constants in the order in which they are displayed on the digital operator: motor rated capacity, base speed, base voltage, motor rated current, number of motor poles, motor d-axis inductance, motor q-axis inductance, and motor induced voltage.
3. Set T2-11 (Input voltage setting) to the Inverter input current in accordance with the power supply voltage being used.
4. After setting all of the constants, press the RUN key. Automatic measurements used to calculate the compensation value of the zero-point pulse using a PG and the value of the motor armature resistance will start.
F orward run at l ow speed (30 r / m i n) F orward run at l ow speed (30 r / m i n)
Power : O N Start of autotun i ng
Preparat i on before autotun i ng
E nd of autotun i ng
Process i ng after autotun i ng
Fig 4.6 Pattern of Operation for Zero-point Pulse Compensation using a PG
4-
13
4
-14
[Constant Settings for Autotuning]
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Set the autotuning mode.
2: Stationary autotuning for lineto-line resistance only
4: PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning
(This selection is only for vector controls with a PG for PM)
2
2, 4
2
*1
No No Yes Yes 701H
T2-01
Motor rated capacity
(E5-02 correspondence)
Sets the motor rated capacity according to the information on the motor name plate.
Only the same or one level less of
Inverter capacity can be set.
*2
0.40 to
160.00
0.40 to
300.00
0.40
kW
*3
No
T2-02
Base speed
(E1-06 correspondence)
T2-03
T2-04
Base voltage
(E1-13 correspondence)
Motor rated current
(E5-03 correspondence)
Sets the motor base speed according to the information on the motor name plate.
Only the value of 1750,1450,1150 min
-1
can be set.
*2
Sets the motor base voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.
Sets the motor rated current according to the information on the motor name plate.
*2
*2
1150 to
1750
0.0 to
255.0
*4
0.00 to
2000.0
1750 min
*3
-1
190.0
V
*3, *4
1.65
A
*3
T2-05
Number of motor poles
(E5-04 correspondence)
Sets the number of motor poles according to the information on the motor name plate.
Usually setting is not required.
(6: Fixed value)
6
6 pole
*3
T2-06
T2-07
T2-08
T2-11
Motor d axis inductance
(E5-06 correspondence)
Motor q axis inductance
(E5-07 correspondence)
Motor generation voltage constant
(E5-09 correspondence)
Input voltage setting
(E1-01 correspondence)
Sets the motor d axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.
*2
Sets the motor q axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.
*2
Sets the motor generation voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.
*2
Sets the Inverter input voltage in units of 1 V.
*5
0.00 to
300.00
0.00 to
600.00
50.0 to
2000.0
223.0
mV x sec/rad
*3
155 to
255
*4
54.84
mH
*3
64.10
mH
*3
200 V
*4
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No Yes Yes 730H
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
731H
732H
733H
734H
735H
736H
737H
73AH
Trial Operation Procedures
* 1. Usually, setting is not required. For the flux vector control for PM, 4 will automatically become the value of the factory setting.
* 2. Usually, setting is not required. The value used to set the motor constants, as described in 1.Motor Constant Settings in page 4-8, will automatically become the value of the factory setting. Check that the settings are the same as the values shown on the motor nameplate. If not, set the corresponding
T2 constants to the values shown on the motor nameplate.
* 3. The factory settings vary in accordance with the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).
(The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors with 1750 min
-1
, open-loop vector control are given.)
* 4. The factory setting and the setting range for 200 V Class Inverters are given. Those for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.
* 5. Usually, setting is not required. The values set before autotuning is started will automatically become the value of the factory settings. Check if the settings were correctly made in accordance with the power supply voltage being used. If not, be sure to set T2-11 (Input voltage setting) to the Inverter input voltage in accordance with the power supply voltage being used.
[Operation Example for Autotuning]
M EN U
[ Autotun i ng ]
[ Autotun i ng mode
Se l ect i on ]
DA T A
ENTE R
[ Autotun i ng mode ]
(Compensat i on tun i ng of zero po i nt pu l se us i ng a PG and li ne to li ne res i stance autotun i ng)
DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
[ Motor ratad capac i ty ] DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
[ Motor ratad capac i ty ]
DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
E SC
[ Base speed ] DA T A
ENTE R
[ Base speed ]
DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
Set T 2 03 to T 2 08 as we ll.
E SC
[I nput vo l tage sett i ng ] DA T A
ENTE R
[I nput vo l tage sett i ng va l ue ]
DA T A
ENTE R
E SC
E SC
[ Autotun i ng started ]
RU N
[ Autotun i ng ] [ Stop command i nput ]
[ Autotun i ng comp l eted ]
EN D
Fig 4.7 Example for Autotuning Mode
4-
15
4
-16
[Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning]
The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.
Table 4.8 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
Digital Operator Display
Autotuning mode selection: T1-01
Description
Using the same procedures as for the programming modes check and set the T1 constants according to information on the previous page.
Be sure that T1-01 (Autotuning Mode Selection) is set correctly and check safety around the motor and machine.
Input voltage setting: T1-11
&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'
The autotuning start display will appear when all settings through T1-11 have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.
Autotuning started: TUn14
&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'
Autotuning
&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'
Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the autotuning start display.
The right digit in TUn is the setting of the autotuning mode selection (T1-01).
Stop Command input
If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error occurs during autotuning, and error message will be display and autotuning will be stopped.
Refer to Errors during Autotuning on page 7-18.
Autotuning completed
END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 minutes, indicating that autotuning has been completed.
Trial Operation Procedures
[Precautions after Autotuning]
• When autotuning is completed
The measured compensation value of zero-point pulse using a PG will be copied to E5-11 (PG home position offset).
The measured armature resistance will be copied to E5-05 (Motor armature resistance).
The setting of T2-01 to T2-11 after autotuning will be reflected to the corresponding constants in Constant
Settings for Autotuning in page 4-14.
•
If the maximum speed and the base speed differ, set E1-04 (Max. motor speed) after completion of autotuning. For the upper setting limit of E1-04, refer to Table 4.6 The Allowable Range of Fixed Output in page 4-10.
When autotuning is halted
If an error occurs during autotuning, autotuning will be halted. Neither the measured value nor the set value will be copied to the constants. The settings will return to be their pre- autotuning values.
Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and take corrective action. After doing so, once again implement PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning.
Open-loop vector control for PM (A1-02 = 7)
Motor constant setting has two patterns. Set the motor constants by either manual setting or autotuning mode setting.
Check the nameplate (NP) of the motor being used for the motor constant values.
Fill those values in the NP Value (Setting) columns of Table 4.9.
8#4+52''&
2*#5'2'4/#0'06/#)0'6/1614
6;2'56421.'5'
2416'%6+10 %11.+0)
M9 8
' '
*\ 4#6+0) # TOKP T
' ' .F
+05 %11.#066'/2 ͠ #.6+67&' O
.S
-G
Ǎǰ
2#4#/'6'4
'
'
'
'
56&
$4)01
DRIVE
END
OPP
END
/#55 MI Ǎǰ ’
5'401 ;'#4
;#5-#9#'.'%64+%%14214#6+10
,#2#0
-K
-V
Fig 4.8 Example of the Nameplate on a Standard Yaskawa IPM Motor for the Flux Vector Control
1. Manual Setting Procedure
Set the Inverter to the values that were recorded in Table 4.9 starting from the top. After making the settings, confirm that the settings for the motor constants are correct.
Note If the setting of E5-01 (Motor capacity selection) is changed, the other motor constants being set will return to the factory settings. If so, reset the
Inverter to the required settings recorded in Table 4.3 starting from the top.
4-
17
4
-18
Constant
No.
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Constant Name
Motor Capacity
Selection
*1
Max. Speed
Motor base voltage
Table 4.9 Motor Constant Settings
Mark on
Motor NP
Remakes
−
If using a 1750 min
-1
motor, setting is not required.
If using a 1450 min
-1
or an
1150 min
-1
motor, setting is required.
(r/min) or
(min
-1
)
Set to a value within the allowable range of the fixed output
*2
.
The setting of E1-04 will be the standard value for the 100% speed reference.
(r/min) or
(min
-1
)
−
E1-13
E5-02
E5-03
Motor rated capacity
Motor rated capacity
Motor rated current
(V)
(KW)
(A)
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E5-07
E5-09
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance
Motor d-axis inductance
Motor q-axis inductance
Motor generated voltage constant
(POLES)
(r1)
(Ld)
(Lq)
(Ke)
* 1. Table 4.10 shows the settings of E5-01 (motor capacity selection).
* 2. Table 4.12 shows the allowable range of the fixed output.
If two constants are shown for the voltage (V), use the one in the lower row.
−
If two constants are shown for the amperes (A), use the one in the lower row.
Setting is usually not required.
(6: Fixed value)
−
−
−
−
NP Value
(Setting)
Confirmed
Trial Operation Procedures
11.00
15.00
18.50
22.00
30.00
37.00
45.00
55.00
Motor capacity
(kW)
0.4
0.75
1.50
2.20
3.70
5.50
7.50
75.00
90.00
110.00
132.00
160.00
1750 min
-1
• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 75 kW)
• 1:1.3 (90 kW to 160 kW)
Table 4.10 Settings for E5-01 (Motor Capacity Selection)
200 V
1750 min
-1
00B
00C
00D
00E
00F
−
−
−
−
007
008
009
00A
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
400 V
1750 min
-1
200 V
1450 min
-1
400 V
1450 min
-1
200 V
1150 min
-1
400 V
1150 min
-1
020
021
022
023
024
026
027
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
120
121
122
123
124
126
127
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
028
029
02A
02B
107
108
109
10A
128
129
12A
12B
207
208
209
20A
02C
02D
10B
10C
02E
02F
10D
10E
12E
12F
030
031
032
−
−
−
130
131
132
033
034
−
−
133
134
Table 4.11 Allowable Range of Fixed Output
Base Speed (1-06)
1450 min
-1
• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 55 kW)
• 1:1.3 (75 kW to 160 kW)
12C
12D
20B
20C
20D
−
−
−
−
−
−
1150 min
-1
• 1:1.5 (0.4 kW to 45 kW)
• 1:1.3 (55 kW to 160 kW)
22C
22D
22E
22F
230
231
232
−
−
228
229
22A
22B
220
221
222
223
224
226
227
E.g.: When using a motor with a base speed (E1-06) of 1750 min-1 and a capacity of 0.4 kW within a fixed
output range of 1: 1.5, use the following equation to calculate the setting of E1-04 (Max. motor
speed): E1-04=E1-06 × 1.5.
4-
19
4
-20
2. Autotuning Mode Setting Procedure
Set the motor constants by autotuning.
[Precautions before Autotuning]
Check the following precautions before starting autotuning.
• Autotuning of the Inverter is fundamentally different from that of the servo system. Inverter autotuning automatically adjusts the constants according to the values of the detected motor constants, whereas servosystem autotuning adjusts the constants according to the detected size of the load.
•
•
•
If autotuning is done with the motor connected to the load, the motor constants that are obtained will be incorrect and the motor may operate in an unusual manner. Be sure to separate the motor from the load before starting autotuning.
If a switch is installed between the motor and the Inverter, be sure to shut off the switch before autotuning.
Multi-function analog input terminals do not work during autotuning. Also, multi-function analog output terminals maintain their status that existed before autotuning was started.
[Operation Procedure for Autotuning]
1. Set the motor capacity selection (E5-01). If using a 1750 min -1 motor, setting is not required. (Refer to
Table 4.9.)
2. In autotuning mode, set the constant for autotuning mode selection (T1-01) to 2 (Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only).
3. Refer to the nameplate of the motor for setting the following constants in the order in which they are displayed on the digital operator: motor rated capacity, base speed, base voltage, motor rated current, number of motor poles, motor d-axis inductance, motor q-axis inductance, and motor induced voltage.
4. Set T2-11 (Input voltage setting) to the Inverter input current in accordance with the power supply voltage being used.
5. After setting all of the constants, press the RUN key. Automatic measurements will start to calculate the value of the motor armature resistance.
Trial Operation Procedures
[Constant Settings for Autotuning]
Constant
Number
Name Description
Set the autotuning mode.
2:Stationary autotuning for line-
to-line resistance only
4: PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning
(This selection is only for vector controls with a PG for PM)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
2
2, 4
2
*
1
No No Yes Yes 701H
T2-01
Motor rated capacity
(E5-02 correspondence)
Sets the motor rated capacity according to the information on the motor name plate.
Only the same or one level less of inverter capacity can be set.
*2
0.40 to
160.00
0.40 to
300.00
0.40
kW
*3
No
T2-02
Base speed
(E1-06 correspondence)
T2-03
Base voltage
(E1-13 correspondence)
T2-04
Motor rated current
(E5-03 correspondence)
Sets the motor base speed according to the information on the motor name plate.
Only the value of 1750,1450,1150 min
-1
can be set.
*2
Sets the motor base voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.
*2
Sets the motor rated current according to the information on the motor name plate.
*2
T2-05
Number of motor poles
(E5-04 correspondence)
Sets the number of motor poles according to the information on the motor name plate.
Usually setting is not required. (6:
Fixed value)
T2-06
T2-07
T2-08
T2-11
Motor d axis inductance
(E5-06 correspondence)
Motor q axis inductance
(E5-07 correspondence)
Motor generation voltage constant
(E5-09 correspondence)
Input voltage setting
(E1-01 correspondence)
Sets the motor d axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.
*2
Sets the motor q axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.
*2
Sets the motor generation voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.
*2
Sets the Inverter input voltage in units of 1 V.
*5
1150 to
1750
0.0 to
255.0
*4
0.00 to
2000.0
6
0.00 to
300.00
0.00 to
600.00
155 to
255
*4
1750 min
*3
1.65
A
*3
6 pole
*3
54.84
mH
*3
64.10
mH
*3
200 V
*4
-1
190.0
V
*3, *4
50.0 to
2000.0
223.0
mV • sec/rad
*3
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No Yes Yes 730H
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
731H
732H
733H
734H
735H
736H
737H
73AH
4-
21
4
-22
* 1. Usually, setting is not required. For the flux vector control for PM, 4 will automatically become the value of the factory setting.
* 2. Usually, setting is not required. The value used to set the motor constants, as described in 1.Motor Constant Settings in page 4-8, will automatically become the value of the factory setting. Check that the settings are the same as the values shown on the motor nameplate. If not, set the corresponding
T2 constants to the values shown on the motor nameplate.
* 3. The factory settings vary in accordance with the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).
(The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors with 1750 min
-1
, open-loop vector control are given.)
* 4. The factory setting and the setting range for 200 V Class Inverters are given. Those for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.
* 5. Usually, setting is not required. The values set before autotuning is started will automatically become the value of the factory settings. Check if the settings were correctly made in accordance with the power supply voltage being used. If not, be sure to set T2-11 (Input voltage setting) to the Inverter input voltage in accordance with the power supply voltage being used.
[Operation Example for Autotuning]
MENU
[Autotuning]
[Autotuning mode
Selection] DATA
ENTER
[Autotuning mode]
(Line-to-line resistance autotuning)
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
[Motor ratad capacity]
DATA
ENTER
[Motor ratad capacity]
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
[Base speed]
DATA
ENTER
[Base speed]
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Set T2-03 to T2-08 as well.
ESC
[Input voltage setting] DATA
ENTER
[Input voltage setting value]
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
[Autotuning started]
RUN
[Autotuning] [Stop command input]
[Autotuning completed]
END
Fig 4.9 Example for Autotuning Mode
Trial Operation Procedures
[Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning]
The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.
Table 4.12 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
Digital Operator Display
Autotuning mode selection: T1-01
Description
Using the same procedures as for the programming modes check and set the T1 constants according to information on the previous page.
Be sure that T1-01 (Autotuning Mode Selection) is set correctly and check safety around the motor and machine.
Input voltage setting: T1-11
&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'
The autotuning start display will appear when all settings through T1-11 have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.
Autotuning started: TUn12
&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'
Autotuning
&4+8' 37+%#&8 8'4+(; #670'
Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the autotuning start display.
The right digit in TUn is the setting of the autotuning mode selection (T1-01).
Stop Command input
If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error occurs during autotuning, and error message will be display and autotuning will be stopped.
Refer to Errors during Autotuning on page 7-18.
Autotuning completed
END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 minutes, indicating that autotuning has been completed.
4-
23
4
-24
[Precautions after Autotuning]
• When autotuning is completed
The measured armature resistance will be copied to E5-05 (Motor armature resistance).
The setting of T2-01 to T2-11 after autotuning will be reflected to the corresponding constants in Constant
Settings for Autotuning in page 4-21.
If the maximum speed and the base speed differ, set E1-04 (Max. motor speed) after completion of autotuning. For the upper setting limit of E1-04, refer to Table 4.11 The Allowable Range of Fixed Output in page 4-19.
• When autotuning is halted
If an error occurs during autotuning, autotuning will be halted. Neither the measured value nor the set value will be copied to the constants. The settings will return to be their pre- autotuning values.
Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and take corrective action. After doing so, once again implement lineto-line resistance autotuning.
Application Settings
User constants are set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e., with the ADV indicator lit on the Digital Operator). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
•
•
•
•
When using an Inverter-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor overheating protection.
To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
To increase the speed of a 1750 min -1 motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 1925 min -1 .
To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 1750 min -1 motor for variable-speed operation between 0 to 1575 min -1 (0% to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
•
•
•
To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
Change the setting of L3-11 to 0 (Overvoltage inhibit selection disabled) to decrease the speed using a braking unit or braking resister.
To enable use with an increased safety, explosion-proof model in the variable torque series of IPM motors, change the setting of L1-01 to 6 [Increased safety, explosion-proof PM motor (variable torque)].
Trial Operation Procedures
No-load Operation
To being no-load operation (without connecting the machine and the motor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 10.00%) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the
JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in
REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.
INFO
Both a Run Command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed reference) must be provided to start Inverter operation. Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of
REMOTE).
If a fault caused by braking characteristics, such as hunting or oscillation, occurs during no-load operation, refer to page
4-27 Adjustment Suggestions and make adjustments.
Loaded Operation
Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the
Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).
Connecting the Load
•
•
After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
Operation using the Digital Operator
•
•
•
Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
At first, set the speed reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
•
•
•
Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the speed reference.
After changing the speed reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too high.
Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-27 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur.
4-
25
4
-26
Check and Recording User Constants
Use verify mode (i.e., when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator is lit) to check user constants that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.
Any user constants that have been change by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.
• Recording user constants
•
•
Setting access levels for user constants
Setting a password
Recording User Constants (o2-03)
If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate memory area in the Inverter. Later, after Inverter settings have been changed, the user constants can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area when o2-03 was set to 1 by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to
1110.
User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)
A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. A1-01 can also be set to 1 (User-specified Constants) and used along with A2 constants to display only constants required by the machine or application in a programming mode.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will be displayed only when the correct password is input.
Adjustment Suggestions
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation, adjust the constants listed in the following table. This table lists only the most commonly used user constants.
Name (Constant
Number)
ASR proportional (P) gain 1 (C5-01)
ASR proportional (P) gain2 (C5-03)
ASR integral (I) time1
(C5-02)(High speeds)
ASR integral (I) time2
(C5-04)(Low speeds)
ASR switching speed
(C5-07)
ASR primary delay time (C5-06)
Motor constants (E1 or
E5)
Table 4.13 User Constants for Adjustment
Function
Factory
Setting
Recommended
Setting
• Increases torque and speed response
• Controls hunting and vibration
• Increases torque and speed response
• Controls hunting and vibration
Adjusts the ASR proportional gain and integral time in accordance with the motor speed.
Controls hunting and vibration
Controls hunting and vibration
20.00
(A1-02=6)
10.00
(A1-02=7)
0.500 s
0.0 %
0.016 s
(A1-02=6)
0.004 s
(A1-02=7)
−
10.00 to
50.00
5.00 to
30.00
0.300 to
1.000 s
0.0 to max. speed
0.016 to
0.035 s
0.004 to
0.020 s
−
Adjustment Method
• Increase the setting if torque and speed responses are slow. (Increase the setting by increments of 5.)
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Note:
Optimal value may differ between no-load operation and loaded operation.
• Reduce the setting if torque and speed responses are slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Note:
Optimal value may differ between no-load operation and loaded operation.
If an ASR proportional gain and an integral time cannot be secured at low or high speeds, change the proportional gain and the integral time in accordance with the motor speed.
• Increase the setting if the machine vibrates easily due to low rigidity.
(Increase the setting by increments of 0.01.)
Note:
Optimal value may differ between no-load operation and loaded operation..
Confirm that the settings of the motor constants are correct. Refer to the preceding description of Motor Constant Settings (Table 4.4 or
4.9).
4-
27
4
-28
The following user constants will also indirectly affect the control system.
Table 4.14 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications
Name (Constant Number)
CT/VT selection (C6-01)
Application
Sets the maximum torque and overload capability to 120% or 150%.
DWELL function (b6-01 to b6-04)
Droop function (b7-01 to b7-02)
Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
Used to soften the torque or to balance the load between two motors. Can be used when the control method (A1-02) is set to 6.
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04)
Jump speeds (d3-01 to d3-04)
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Used to avoid resonance points during operation.
Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Overvoltage inhibit selection (L3-11)
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04)
Used to prevent Inverter DC bus overvoltage. Overvoltage inhibit selection is enabled by default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using a braking unit or a braking resistor to decrease the speed, however, disable overvoltage inhibit selection by setting L3-11 to
0.
Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased, use a motor with higher capacity than the Inverter. If a setting is reduced, stalling can occur under heavy loads.
User Constants
This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.
User Constant Descriptions .........................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........5-3
User Constant Tables ..................................................5-8
5
-2
User Constant Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.
Description of User Constant Tables
User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Reference Selection) is used as an example.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page b1-01
Reference selection
Set the speed reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q 180H 6-63
• Constant Number:
• Name:
• Description:
• Setting Range:
• Factory Setting:
• Change during Operation:
• Control Methods:
• MEMOBUS Register:
• Page:
The number of the user constant.
The name of the user constant.
Details on the function or settings of the user constant.
The setting range for the user constant.
The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed.)
Refer to page 5-69 for factory settings by control method.
Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No: Changes not possible during operation.
Indicates the control methods in which the user constant can be monitored or set.
Q: Items which can be monitored and set in either quick programming mode or advanced programming mode.
A: Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced programming mode.
No: Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method.
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
Reference page for more detailed information on the constant.
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum constants required for operation can be monitored or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All constants can be monitored or set.
Verify Mode
Constants changed from the default settings can be monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
• Open-loop vector control for
PM:
Stationary autotuning only for line-to-line resistance
• Flux vector control for PM:
PG home position offset and line-to line resistance autotuning.
Function
Status Monitor Constants
Fault Trace
Fault History
Initialize Mode
User-specified Setting Mode
Operation Mode Selections
Zero-speed level
Speed Search
Timer Function
PID Control
Dwell Functions
Droop Control
Acceleration/Deceleration
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
Speed Control (ASR)
Carrier Frequency
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Speeds
Reference Speed Hold
Torque Control
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
PM Motor Constants
PG Option Setup
Analog Reference Board
Digital Reference Board
Analog Monitor Boards
Digital Output Boards
Communications Option Cards
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Multi-function Contact Outputs
Analog Inputs
Multi-function Analog Outputs
MEMOBUS Communications
Pulse Train
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ridethrough
Overvoltage Inhibit Selection
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Torque Limits
Hardware Protection
Magnetic Pole Detection
Monitor Select
Multi-function Selections
Copy Function
Motor Autotuning
No.
U1
U2
U3 o1 o2 o3
L6
L7
L8
N8
H6
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
H3
H4
H5
F5
F6
H1
H2
E2
E5
F1
F2
F3
F4 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5
E1
C2
C5
C6 b5 b6 b7
C1
A1
A2 b1 b2 b3 b4
T
Page
5-61
5-66
5-68
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-54
5-55
5-56
5-58
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-48
5-48
5-49
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-38
5-40
5-42
5-43
5-27
5-28
5-30
5-32
5-32
5-33
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-25
5-13
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-59
5-
3
5
-4
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode. The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-5 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Constant
Number
Name
A1-02
Control method selection b1-01
Reference selection b1-02
Operation method selection b1-03
Stopping method selection
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
C1-02
Deceleration time 1
C6-01
CT/VT selection
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Used to select the control method for the Inverter
0: Sequence test
(This method implements a sequence test with an induction motor connected or any other motor not connected.)
6: Flux vector control for
PM
7: Open-loop vector control for PM
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
0 or 7
0, 6, or
7
Set the speed reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
Set the Run Command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
0 to 3
Used to set the stopping method used when a Stop Command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
Commands are disregarded during deceleration.)
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum speed, in
1-second units.
0, 1, or
3
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum speed to 0, in
1-second units.
0: Low carrier, constant torque (CT)
1: High carrier, variable torque (VT)
0.0 to
6000.0
*1
0 or 1
*2
7
1
1
0
10.0 s
1
*3
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
102H
180H
181H
182H
200H
201H
223H
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register d1-01
E1-03
Speed reference 1
Sets the speed reference in the units used in o1-03.
*4
V/f pattern selection
1750 min
-1
*6 *8
*9
Yes d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-17
E1-01
Speed reference 2
Speed reference 3
Speed reference 4
Jog speed reference
Input voltage setting
The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 1 is ON for a multifunction input.
*4
The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 2 is ON for a multifunction input.
*4
The speed reference when multi-step speed references 1 and 2 are ON for multi-function inputs.
*4
The speed reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is
ON.
*4
Set the Inverter input voltage in the unit of 1 V.
This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.
0.00 to
100.00
*5
155 to
255
*7
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
200 V
*6 *7
Yes
Yes
Yes
10.00% Yes
No
E1-04 Max. speed
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for settings E1-
04 to E1-10.)
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
Set the maximum motor speed in units of 1 min
-1
.
*11
The upper limit of maximum motor speed is 1.5 times greater than the values of the base speed of motor (E1-06).
0 to F
1000 to
2700
*12
0.00%
F No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
280H
281H
282H
283H
292H
300H
302H
303H
E1-05
Max. voltage
E1-06 Base speed
*11
Set the base speed of motor in units of 1 min
-1
.
*11
0.0 to
255.0
*7
1000 to
1800
*13
200.0
V
*7
1750 min
-1
*6 *8
*9
No
No
Q
Q
No
Q
No
Q
304H
305H
E1-09 Min. speed
Set the minimal speed of the motor in units of 1 min
-1
.
*11
If A1-02 is set to 7, the lower limit of the motor’s minimal speed is 10% of the base rotation (E1-06).
100 to
1800
*13
0 to
1800
* 13
175 min
-1
*6 *8
*9 *10
No Q Q Q 308H
E1-13
Base voltage
Set the base voltage of the motor in units of 0.1 V.
0.0 to
255.0
* 7
190.0
V
*6 *7
*8
No No Q Q 30CH
5-
5
5
-6
Constant
Number
E2-01
Name
Motor rated current
Description
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units.
E2-11
Motor rated output
Set the rated output of the motor in units of 0.01 kW. This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0.32 to
6.40
*15
1.90 A
*14
No Q No No 30EH
0.00 to
650.00
0.40 kW
*16
No Q No No 318H
E5-01
Motor capacity selection
Select the motor capacity.
By setting E5-01, the constants that vary in accordance with the motor capacity will be automatically set.
After making a selection, do not change this setting unless necessary.
If changed, the motor constants will be initialized.
0000 to
0230
0000 to
0235
0000
*17 *18
No No Q Q 329H
E5-02
Motor rated capacity
Set the motor rated capacity in units of 0.01 kW.
The setting is initialized and set to the standard capacity if the selection of the Inverter capacity (o2-04) or that of the motor capacity (E5-01) is changed.
0.40 to
160.00
0.40 to
300.00
0.40
kW
*17 *19
E5-03
Motor rated current
Set the motor rated current in units of 0.01 A for a motor with a capacity of 7.5 kW or less, or in units of 0.1 A for one with a capacity of 11 kW or more.
0.00 to
2000.0
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E5-07
E5-09
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance
Motor daxis inductance
Motor qaxis inductance
Motor induced voltage constant
1.65
A
*17 *19
Set the number of motor poles.
6
6 pole
*17 *19
Set the resistance per motor phase in units of 0.001 Ω .
After setting the resistance, do not change this setting unless necessary.
Set the motor d-axis inductance in units of 0.01 mH.
After setting the resistance, do not change this setting unless necessary.
Set the motor q-axis inductance with the motor rated load in units of 0.01 mH.
Set the peak value of the induced voltage per motor phase in units of
0.1 mV/(rad/s) [electric angle].
Do not change this setting unless necessary.
0.000 to
65.000
0.00 to
300.00
0.00 to
600.00
50.0 to
2000.0
8.233
Ω
*17 *19
54.84
mH
*17 *19
64.10
mH
*17 *19
223.0 mV ⋅ sec/rad
*19
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
32AH
32BH
32CH
32DH
32EH
32FH
331H
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
H4-02
H4-05
Gain (terminal FM)
Gain (terminal AM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*20
Set the voltage level gain for multifunction analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100% output for the monitor items. The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*20
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
0.50
Yes
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
41EH
421H
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depend on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/ deceleration times become 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
* 2. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. With 400 V Class Inverters of 220 kW or 300 kW, C6-01 cannot be set to 0 (CT).
* 3. The factory settings vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 4. A value less than the setting of El-09 (Min. speed) cannot be set for speed references. If you are having trouble setting the speed reference, check the setting of El-09.
* 5. For sequence test (display unit: Hz), the setting ranges change. For open-loop/flux vector control for PM, the upper limits of the setting would be calculated by the following formula: E1-09 × E5-04 ÷ 120.
For sequence test, the upper limits of the setting would be E1-09.
* 6. In open-loop vector control for PM and the vector control with a PG for PM, this constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
* 7. For 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.
* 8. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).
The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min -1 ) are given.
* 9. The display units vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop vector control for PM and the vector control with a PG for PM are given. For sequence test, the display unit is Hz.
* 10.The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. The setting for open-loop vector control for PM are given. For vector control with a
PG for PM, the setting is 30 min -1 . For sequence test, the setting is 0.0 Hz.
* 11.The settings for the sequence test mode (A1-02=0) are calculated by the following formula.
To set the V/f characteristics in a straight line, assign the same values for E1-07 and E1-09.
If so, the setting of E1-08 is ignored.
Use the following formula to set the four rotations:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06(FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
VC
(E1-08)
VMIN
(E1-10) Frequency (Hz)
FMIN
(E1-09)
FB
(E1-07)
FA
(E1-06)
FMAX
(E1-04)
* 12.The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop vector control for PM and for vector control with a PG for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 40.0 to 400.0.
* 13.The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop vector control for PM and for vector control with a PG for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 0.0 to 400.0.
* 14.The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
* 15.The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
For the motor no-load current, set E2-03 to a value less than that of E2-01.
* 16.Initialize E2-11 to set the motor capacity to the same value as that for the Inverter capacity.
* 17.The E5 constants are not initialized by the initialize operation.
* 18.The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the inverter capacity selection (o2-04) or control method selection (A1-02).
0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min -1 ).
* 19.The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).
The values for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min -1 ) are given.
* 20.To adjust the meter, multiply a value that is equivalent to 100% of the output by the gain setting and add the set bias.
Adjustment target is the FM terminal when the H4-02 or H4-03 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
Adjustment target is the AM terminal when the H4-05 or H4-06 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
5-
7
5
-8
User Constant Tables
A: Setup Settings
The following settings are made with the environment constants (A constants): Language displayed on the
Digital Operator, access level, control method, initialization of constants.
Initialize Mode: A1
User constants for the environment modes are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
A1-00
A1-01
Language selection for
Digital
Operator display
Used to select the language displayed on the Digital
Operator (LED).
0: English
1: Japanese
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
Constant access level
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring and setting the constants for drive mode, A1-01, and A1-
04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in
A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming
(A) mode.)
A1-02
Control method selection
0 or 1
0 to 2
Used to select the control method for the Inverter
0: Sequence test
(This method implements a sequence test with an induction motor connected or any other motor not connected.)
6: Flux vector control for
PM
7: Open-loop vector control for PM
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
0 or 7
0, 6, or
7
1
2
7
Yes
Yes
No
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
100H
101H
102H
-
4-26
6-126
6-127
4-5
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name
A1-03 Initialize
A1-04 Password
A1-05
Password setting
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
Used to initialize the constants using the specified method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
User constants
2220: Initializes using a two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a three-wire sequence.
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed,
A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 constants can no longer be changed. (Programming mode constants can be changed.)
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant is not usually displayed. When the Password (A1-04) is displayed, hold down the RESET Key and press the Menu Key and the password will be displayed.
0 to
3330
0 to
9999
0 to
9999
0
0
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
103H
104H
105H
6-121
4-26
6-127
4-26
6-127
User-set Constants: A2
The constants set by the user are listed in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting constants
Used to set the constant numbers that can be set/read.
Maximum 32.
Effective when the Constant
Access Level (A1-01) is set to User Program (1). Constants set in constants A2-01 to A2-32 can be set/read in programming mode.
b1-01 to o3-02
No A A A
106H to
125H
Page
6-128
5-
9
5
-10
Application Constants: b
The following settings are made with the application constants (B constants): Operation method selection, zero-speed level, speed searching, timer functions, PID control, dwell functions, and droop control.
Operation Mode Selections: b1
User constants for operation mode selection are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page b1-01
Reference selection
Set the speed reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q 180H
4-5
6-5
6-63
6-83 b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-05
Operation method selection
Stopping method selection
Set the Run Command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
Used to set the stopping method used when a Stop
Command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run Commands are disregarded during deceleration.)
0 to 3
0, 1, or
3
Prohibition of reverse operation
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
Operation selection for setting E1-
09 or less
Used to set the method of operation when the speed reference input is less than the minimum speed (E1-09).
0: Run at speed reference
(E1-09 not effective).
1: STOP (Speeds below E1-
09 in the coast to stop state.)
2: Run at min. speed.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero-speed
(Speeds below E1-09 are zero)
0 or 1
0 to 3
1
0
0
0
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
No
Q
Q
A
A
Q 181H
Q 182H
4-5
6-14
6-63
6-83
4-6
6-16
A 183H 6-49
No 184H 6-16
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page b1-06 b1-07 b1-08
Read sequence input twice
Used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs
(forward/reverse and multifunction inputs.)
0: Two scans every 2 ms
(Use for fast responses.)
1: Two scans every 5 ms
(Use for possible malfunction due to noise.)
Operation selection after switching to remote mode
Used to set the operation mode by switching to the
Remote mode using the
Local/Remote Key.
0: Run signals that are input during mode switching are disregarded. (Input
Run signals after switching the mode.)
1: Run signals become effective immediately after switching to the
Remote mode.
Run Command selection in programming modes
Used to set an operation interlock in programming modes.
0: Cannot operate.
1: Can operate (Disabled when Digital Operator is set to select Run Command (when b1-02 = 0)).
2: Cannot operate. (Cannot be in programming mode during operation.)
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 2
1
0
1
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
185H
186H
187H -
-
-
5-
11
5
-12
Zero-speed level: b2
User constants for zero-speed level are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page b2-01
Zero-speed level (Baseblock starting speed)
Sets the speed in units of
0.1% at which a baseblock will be applied if decelerating to stop.
0.0 to
10.0
1.0%
*
No No A A 189H 6-16
* The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed. (The factory settings for open-loop vector control for PM are given.)
Speed Search: b3
User constants for the speed search are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page b3-01 b3-05
Speed search selection
Enables/disables the speed search function for the Run
Command and sets the speed search method.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If b3-01 set to 1, the motor speed is calculated at the start of a search, and the motor accelerates or decelerates from this calculated speed to a set speed.
(A motor rotational direction search is also possible.)
Search wait time
Sets the magnetic contactor operating delay time when there is a magnetic contactor on the output side of the
Inverter. When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed by the time set here.
0, 1
0.0 to
20.0
1
*
1.0 s
No
No
No
No
No
No
A 191H 6-53
A 195H 6-53
* The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed.
User Constant Tables
Timer Function: b4
User constants for timer functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b4-01 b4-02
Timer function ONdelay time
Timer function OFFdelay time
Sets the timer function output ON-delay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 or H2-
.
Sets the timer function output OFF-delay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 or H2-
.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
0.0 s
No
No
No
No
A
A
Page
A 1A3H 6-93
A 1A4H 6-94
PID Control: b5
User constants for PID control are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-05
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
PID control method selection
Proportional gain
(P)
Integral (I) time
Integral (I) limit
Derivative
(D) time
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled
(speed reference + PID output, D control of deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(speed reference + PID output, D control of feedback value).
Sets P-control proportional gain as a percentage.
P-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
Sets I-control integral time in 1-second units.
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Sets D-control derivative time in 1-second units.
D-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
0 to 4
0.00
to
25.00
0.0 to
360.0
0.0 to
100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0
1.00
1.0 s
100.0% Yes
0.00 s
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1A5H
1A6H
1A7H
1A8H
1A9H
Page
6-95
6-96
6-96
6-96
6-96
5-
13
5
-14
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b5-06 PID limit b5-07 b5-08 b5-09
PID output characteristics selection
Sets the limit after PID-control as a percentage of the maximum speed.
PID offset adjustment
Sets the offset after PID-control as a percentage of the maximum speed.
PID primary delay time constant
Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PID-control outputs in 1-second units.
Not usually necessary to set.
Select forward/reverse for
PID output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
(highlights the output code)
0.0 to
100.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0 or 1
100.0% Yes
0.0%
0.00 s
0
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1AAH
1ABH
1ACH
1ADH
Page
6-96
6-96
6-96
6-96 b5-10
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No No A A 1AEH 6-96 b5-11 b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b5-15
PID output gain
Selection of
PID feedback command loss detection
Sets output gain.
PID reverse output selection
0: 0 limit when PID output is negative.
1: Reverses when PID output is negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit is selected using b1-04.
0: No detection of loss of
PID feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID feedback.
Operation continues during detection, with the malfunctioning contact not operating.
2: Detection of loss of PID feedback.
Coasts to stop during detection, and fault contact operates.
PID feedback command loss detection level
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percent units, with the maximum speed at 100%.
PID feedback command loss detection time
PID sleep function operation level
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level in s units.
Set the PID sleep function start level as a speed.
(Enabled if PID control is not selected.)
0 or 1
0 to 2
0 to
100
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
100.0
0
0
0%
1.0 s
0.0%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1AFH
1B0H
1B1H
1B2H
1B3H
6-96
6-96
6-97
6-97
6-97
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description b5-16 b5-17
PID sleep operation delay time
Set the delay time until the
PID sleep function starts in seconds.
Accel/decel time for PID reference
Set the accel/decel time for
PID reference in seconds.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s No No A A 1B4H 6-97
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s No No A A 1B5H 6-97
Dwell Functions: b6
User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page b6-01
Dwell speed at start
0.0 to
100.0
0.0% No b6-02
Dwell time at start
Run Command
Speed
ON
OFF
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s No b6-03
Dwell speed at stop b6-04
Dwell time at stop b6-01 b6-03 Time b6-02 b6-04
The dwell function is used to keep the speed temporarily when driving a motor with a heavy load.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0% No
0.0 to
100.0
0.0 s No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A 1B6H
4-28
6-24
A 1B7H
4-28
6-24
A 1B8H
4-28
6-24
A 1B9H
4-28
6-24
Droop Control: b7
User constants for droop functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b7-01 b7-02
Droop control gain
Droop control delay time
Sets the speed drop as a percentage of maximum speed when the maximum speed is specified and the rated torque occurs.
Droop-control is not performed when the setting is
0.0.
Droop control responsiveness constant
When hunting or oscillation occurs, increase the value.
0.0 to
100.0
0.03 to
2.00
0.0
Yes
0.05 s Yes
No
No
A
A
No 1CAH
No 1CBH
Page
4-28
6-117
4-28
6-117
5-
15
5
-16
Autotuning Constants: C
The following settings are made with the autotuning constants (C constants): Acceleration/deceleration times, s-curve characteristics, speed control, and carrier frequency functions.
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
User constants for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
C1-02
Deceleration time 1
C1-03
Acceleration time 2
C1-04
Deceleration time 2
C1-05
Acceleration time 3
C1-06
Deceleration time 3
C1-07
Acceleration time 4
C1-08
Deceleration time 4
C1-09
Emergency stop time
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum speed, in 1-second units.
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum speed to 0, in 1-second units.
The acceleration time when the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” is set to
ON.
The deceleration time when the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” is set to
ON.
The acceleration time when the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 2” is set to
ON.
The deceleration time when the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 2” is set to
ON.
The acceleration time when the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” and
“accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.
The deceleration time when the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” and
“accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.
The deceleration time when the multi-function input
“Emergency (fast) stop” is set to ON.
This function can be used as a stopping method when a fault has been detected.
0.0 to
6000.0
*1
10.0 s
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q 200H
Q 201H
A 202H
A 203H
A 204H
A 205H
A 206H
A 207H
A 208H
4-5
4-28
6-20
4-5
4-28
6-20
4-28
6-20
4-28
6-20
4-28
6-20
4-28
6-20
4-28
6-20
4-28
6-20
4-28
6-19
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
C1-10
Accel/decel time setting unit
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
0 or 1 1 No A A A 209H
4-28
6-20
6-21
C1-11
Accel/decel time switching speed
Sets the speed for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
Below set speed: Accel/ decel time 4
Above set speed: Accel/ decel time 1
The multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” or
“accel/decel time 2” take priority.
0.0 to
100.0
*3
0.0%
*2
No A A A 20AH
4-28
6-20
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depend on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/ deceleration times become 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
* 2. The display unit varies in accordance with the control method. (The unit for open-loop/flux vector control for PM is given. For sequence test, Hz would be displayed.)
* 3. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. (The unit for open-loop/flux vector control for PM is given. For sequence test, the setting range would be 0.0 to 400.0.)
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
User constants for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
All sections of the S-curve characteristic time are set in seconds units.
When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
Run Command
Speed
C2-01
ON
C2-02
OFF
C2-03
C2-04
Time
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s No
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s No
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s No
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 20BH
A 20CH
A 20DH
A 20EH
4-28
6-21
4-28
6-21
4-28
6-21
4-28
6-21
5-
17
5
-18
Speed Control (ASR): C5
User constants for speed control are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
C5-01
ASR proportional
(P) gain 1
C5-02
ASR integral (I) time 1
Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop (ASR.)
Sets the integral time of the speed loop (ASR) in 1-second units.
0.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000
C5-03
C5-04
ASR proportional
(P) gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
C5-06
ASR primary delay time
Usually setting is not necessary.
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
0.00 to
300.00
P I
0
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
E1-04 Motor speed (Hz)
0.000 to
10.000
Sets the filter time constant for outputting torque references from the speed control loop (ASR). It is set in 1-second units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0.000 to
0.500
10.00
*
0.500
s
*
10.00
*
0.500
s
*
0.016 s
*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
21BH
21CH
21DH
21EH
220H
4-27
6-112
4-27
6-112
4-27
6-112
4-27
6-112
4-27
6-112
C5-07
C5-08
ASR switching frequency
ASR integral (I) limit
Sets the speed for switching between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and
Integral Time 1, 2 in % units.
The multi-function input “ASR switching proportional gain” has the priority.
Sets the upper limit for the integral
(I) amount for the speed control loop (ASR) to a percentage of the rated load.
0.0 to
100.0
0 to
400
C5-15
ASR proportional
(P) gain at start
Sets the proportional (P) gain at start of operation when magnetic poles are pulled in, in units of 0.01.
0.00 to
300.00
0.0%
5.00
*
No
400% No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
221H
4-27
6-113
222H 6-113
238H -
* The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed. (The factory settings for open-loop vector control for PM are given.)
User Constant Tables
Carrier Frequency: C6
User constants for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
C6-01
CT/VT selection
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
0: Low carrier, constant torque
(CT)
1: High carrier, variable torque
(VT)
Select carrier frequency.
*2
1: 2 kHz
2: 4 kHz
3: 6 kHz
4: 8 kHz
6: 12 kHz
0 or 1
*3
1 or 2
1 to 6
*4 *6
*7
1
*5
2
*1 *5
*8
No
No
No
No
Q
A
Q 223H
4-5
4-28
6-2
A 224H 6-2
* 1. The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed. (The factory settings for open-loop vector control for PM are given.)
* 2. Inverter rated current will be reduced if increasing the carrier frequency.
Be careful because the possibility of an inverter OL error increases as the carrier frequency is increased.
* 3. With 400 V Class Inverters of 220 kW or 300 kW, C6-01 cannot be set to 0 (CT).
* 4. The setting range vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 5. The factory settings vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 6. For open-loop vector control for PM, the setting range is 1 to 4.
* 7. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the setting of C6-01 (CT/VT selection). If C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), C6-02 can only be set to 1 (2 kHz).
* 8. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of C6-01 (CT/VT selection). If C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), the factory setting is 1 (2 kHz).
5-
19
5
-20
Reference Constants: d
The following settings are made with the reference constants (d constants): Speed references.
Preset Reference: d1
User constants for speed references are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
0.00% Yes Q Q Q 280H
4-6
6-9 d1-01
Speed reference 1
Sets the speed reference in the units used in o1-03.
d1-02 d1-03 d1-04
Speed reference 2
The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 1 is ON for a multi-function input.
Speed reference 3
The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 2 is ON for a multi-function input.
Speed reference 4
The speed reference when multi-step speed references 1 and 2 are ON for multi-function inputs.
0.00% Yes
0.00% Yes
0.00% Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q 281H
Q 282H
Q 283H
4-6
6-9
4-6
6-9
4-6
6-9 d1-05
Speed reference 5
The speed when multi-step speed reference 3 is ON for a multi-function input.
0.00% Yes A A A 284H 6-9 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09 d1-10 d1-11
Speed reference 6
The speed reference when multi-step speed references 1 and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.
0.00 to
100.00
*
Speed reference 7
The speed reference when multi-step speed references 2 and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Speed reference 8
The speed reference when multi-step speed references
1, 2, and 3 are ON for multifunction inputs.
Speed reference 9
The speed reference when multi-step speed reference 4 is ON for a multi-function input.
Speed reference 10
The speed reference when multi-step speed references 1 and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Speed reference 11
The speed reference when multi-step speed references 2 and 4 are ON for a multifunction inputs.
0.00% Yes
0.00% Yes
0.00% Yes
0.00% Yes
0.00% Yes
0.00% Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 285H 6-9
A 286H 6-9
A 287H 6-9
A 288H
A 28BH
A 28CH -
-
-
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page d1-12 d1-13 d1-14 d1-15 d1-16 d1-17
Speed reference 12
Speed reference 13
Speed reference 14
Speed reference 15
Speed reference 16
Jog speed reference
The speed reference when multi-step speed references
1, 2, and 4 are ON for multifunction inputs.
The speed reference when multi-step speed references 3 and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
The speed reference when multi-step speed references
1, 3, and 4 are ON for multifunction inputs.
The speed reference when multi-step speed references
2, 3, and 4 are ON for multifunction inputs.
The speed reference when multi-step speed references
1, 2, 3, and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
The speed reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is ON.
0.00 to
100.00
*
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
10.00%
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Q
28DH
28EH
28FH
290H
291H
292H
-
-
-
-
-
4-6
6-9
6-71
Note 1. The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor), default: 0.01 Hz.
2. A value less than the setting of El-09 (Min. speed) cannot be set for speed references. If you are having trouble setting the speed reference, check the setting of El-09.
* If the display unit is Hz, the setting ranges change. For open-loop/flux vector control or vector control with a PG for PM, the upper limits of the setting would be calculated by the following formula: E1-09 × E5-04 ÷ 120.
For sequence test, the upper limits of the setting would be E1-09.
Reference Limits: d2
User constants for speed reference limits are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page d2-01 d2-02 d2-03
Speed reference upper limit
Set the motor speed upper limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Speed reference lower limit
Master speed reference lower limit
Sets the motor speed lower limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0% No
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0.0%
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 289H
A 28AH
A 293H
6-33
6-66
6-33
6-66
6-33
6-66
5-
21
5
-22
Jump Speeds: d3
User constants for jump speeds are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page d3-01 d3-02 d3-03
Jump speed
1
Jump speed
2
Jump speed
3
Set the center values of the jump speeds in %.
This function is disabled by setting the jump speed to 0
%. Always ensure that the following applies: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump speed range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration, speed changes smoothly without jump.
0.0 to
100.0
*2
0.0%
*1
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 294H
A 295H
A 296H
4-28
6-30
4-28
6-30
4-28
6-30 d3-04
Jump speed width
Sets the jump speed bandwidth in %.
The jump speed will be the jump speed ± d3-04.
0.0 to
100.0
*3
1.0%
*1
No A A A 297H
4-28
6-30
* 1. The display units vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the display unit is Hz.
* 2. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 0.0 to 400.0.
* 3. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given.
For sequence test, the setting range is 0.0 to 20.0.
Speed Reference Hold: d4
User constants for the speed reference hold function are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page d4-01
Speed reference hold function selection
Sets whether or not speeds on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at
0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at the previous hold speed.)
This function is available when the multi-function inputs “accel/decel Ramp
Hold” or “up/down” commands are set.
0 or 1 0 No No A A 298H 6-65
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name d4-02
+ - Speed limits
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
Set the speed to be add to or subtracted from the analog speed reference as a percent, taking the maximum speed to be 100%.
Enabled when the increase
(+) speed command or decrease (-) speed command is set for a multi-function input.
0 to
100
10% No No A A 299H 6-69
Torque Control: d5
User constants for the torque control are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page d5-01
Torque control selection
0: Speed control (C5-01 to
C5-07)
1: Torque control
To use the function for switching between speed and torque control, set to 0 and set the multi-function input to “speed/torque control change.”
0 or 1 d5-02 d5-03
Torque reference delay time
Set the torque reference delay time in ms units.
This function can be used to adjust the noise of the torque control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation occurs during torque control, increase the set value.
Speed limit selection d5-04 Speed limit
Set the speed limit command method for the torque control method.
1: The analog input limit from a speed reference
(see b1-01)
2: Limited by d5-04 constant setting values.
Set the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum speed.
This function is enabled when d5-03 is set to 2.
Directions are as follows.
+: Run Command direction
-: Run Command opposite
direction
0 to
1000
1 or 2
-120 to
+120
0
0 ms
*
1
0%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No 29AH 6-104
No 29BH 6-104
No 29CH 6-104
No 29DH 6-104
5-
23
5
-24
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page d5-05
Speed limit bias
Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Bias is given to the specified speed limit. It can be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit.
0 to
120
5% No d5-06
Speed/ torque control switching timer
Set the delay time from inputting the multi-function input “speed/torque control change” (from On to OFF or
OFF to ON) until the control is actually changed, in ms units.
This function is enabled when the multi-function input “speed/torque control change” is set. In the speed/ torque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold the values of when the
“speed/torque control change” changes. Always be sure to allow time for this process to finish completely.
0 to
1000
50 ms
* The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
29EH
29FH
6-104
6-105
User Constant Tables
Motor Constants: E
The following settings are made with the motor constants (E constants): V/f characteristics and motor constants.
V/f Pattern: E1
User constants for V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
Input voltage setting
V/f pattern selection
Set the Inverter input voltage in the unit of 1 V.
This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for settings
E1-04 to E1-10.)
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
Max. speed
Set the maximum motor speed in units of 1 min
-1
.
*6
The upper limit of maximum motor speed is 1.5 times greater than the values of the base speed of motor (E1-06).
155 to
255
*2
0 to F
1000 to
2700
*7
200 V
*1 *2
F
1750 min
-1
*1 *3
*4
No
No
No
Q
Q
No
Q
No
Q
Q
No
Q
300H
302H
303H
Page
4-5
6-25
-
-
E1-05
Max. voltage
E1-06
Base speed
E1-07
E1-08
Mid. output speed
Mid. speed voltage
*6
Set the base speed of motor in units of 1 min
-1
.
*6
*6
0.0 to
255.0
*2
1000 to
1800
*8
200.0
V
*2
1750 min
-1
*1 *3
*4
No
No
0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz No
No
Q
Q
A
A
No No 304H
Q Q 305H
No No 306H
No No 307H -
-
-
-
E1-09
Min. speed
E1-10
Min. speed voltage
*6
Set the minimum speed of the motor in units of 1 min
-1
.
*5
If A1-02 is set to 7, the lower limit of the motor’s minimum speed is 10% of the base speed of motor (E1-06).
*6
0.0 to
255.0
*2
15.0 V
*2
100 to
1800
*8
175 min
-1
*1 *3
*4 *5
0 to
1800
*8
0.0 to
255.0
*2
9.0 V
*2
No
No
Q
A
Q Q 308H
No No 309H -
-
5-
25
5
-26
Constant
Number
E1-13
Name
Base voltage
Description
Set the base voltage of the motor in units of 0.1 V.
Setting
Range
0.0 to
255.0
*2
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
190.0
V
*1 *2
*3
No No Q Q
MEMO
BUS
Register
30CH
Page
-
* 1. In open-loop/flux vector control for PM, this constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
* 2. For 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.
* 3. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).
The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min
-1
) are given.
* 4. The display units vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the display unit is Hz.
* 5. The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. The setting for open-loop vector control for PM are given. For flux vector control for
PM, the setting is 30 min -1 . For sequence test, the setting is 0.0 Hz.
* 6. The settings for the sequence test method (A1-02=0) are calculated by the following formula.
To set the V/f characteristics in a straight line, assign the same values for E1-07 and E1-09.
If so, the setting of E1-08 is ignored.
Use the following formula to set the four frequencies:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06(FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
VC
(E1-08)
VMIN
(E1-10) Frequency (Hz)
FMIN
(E1-09)
FB
(E1-07)
FA
(E1-06)
FMAX
(E1-04)
* 7. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 40.0 to 400.0.
* 8. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence test, the setting range is 0.0 to 400.0.
User Constant Tables
Motor Setup: E2
User constants for motor 1 are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
E2-01
Motor rated current
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No Q No No 30EH
E2-02
Motor rated slip
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
These set values will become the reference values for slip compensation.
0.00 to
20.00
2.90
Hz
*1
No A No No 30FH
E2-03
E2-05
E2-10
E2-11
Motor noload current
Sets the motor no-load current in 1 A units.
Motor lineto-line resistance
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Sets the motor phase-tophase resistance in Ω units.
Sets motor iron loss in W units.
Motor rated output
Set the rated output of the motor in units of 0.01 kW.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.00 to
1.89
*3
0.000
to
65.000
0 to
65535
0.00 to
650.00
1.20 A
*1
9.842
Ω
*1
14 W
*1
0.40 kW
*4
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
Q
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
* 1. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
For the motor no-load current, set E2-03 to a value less than that of E2-01.
* 3. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 4. Initialize E2-11 to set the same value as that for the Inverter capacity.
310H
312H
317H
318H
Page
-
-
-
-
-
-
5-
27
5
-28
PM Motor Constants: E5
User constants for PM motor are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
E5-01
Motor capacity selection
Select the motor capacity.
By setting E5-01, the constants that vary in accordance with motor capacity will be automatically set.
After making a selection, do not change this setting unless necessary. If changed, the motor constants will be initialized.
0000 to
0230
0000 to
0235
0000
*1
No No Q Q 329H -
E5-02
Motor rated capacity
Set the motor rated capacity in units of 0.01 kW.
The setting is initialized and set to the standard capacity if the selection of the Inverter capacity
(o2-04) or that of the motor capacity (E5-01) is changed.
0.40 to
160.00
0.40 to
300.00
E5-03
E5-04
Motor rated current
Set the motor rated current in units of 0.01 A for a motor with a capacity of 7.5 kW or less, or in units of 0.1 A for one with a capacity of 11 kW or more.
0.00 to
2000.0
Number of motor poles
Set the number of motor poles.
6
E5-05
E5-06
Motor armature resistance
Motor daxis inductance
Set the resistance per motor phase in units of 0.001 Ω .
After setting the resistance, do not change this setting unless necessary.
Set the motor d-axis inductance in units of 0.01 mH.
After setting the resistance, do not change this setting unless necessary.
0.000 to
65.000
0.00 to
300.00
E5-07
E5-09
Motor qaxis inductance
Set the motor q-axis inductance with the motor rated load in units of 0.01 mH.
Motor induced voltage constant
0.00 to
600.00
Set the peak value of the induced voltage per motor phase in units of 0.1 mV/(rad/s) [electric angle].
Do not change this setting unless necessary.
50.0 to
2000.0
0.40
kW
*2
1.65
A
*2
6 pole
*2
8.233
Ω
*2
54.84
mH
*2
64.10
mH
*2
223.0 mV ⋅ sec/ rad
*2
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q 32AH 4-9
Q 32BH 4-9
Q 32CH 4-9
Q 32DH 4-9
Q 32EH 4-9
Q 32FH 4-9
Q 331H 4-9
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
E5-10
Phase lead compensation
Compensate for the positioning error between the calculated position of the magnetic pole
(control axis) and the actual position.
Set in units of 0.1 deg (electric angle).
Do not change this setting unless necessary.
-180.0 to
180.0
10.0
deg
No No No A 332H
Page
-
E5-11
PG home position offset
Set the amount of pulses to align the home position in units of 0.1 degrees.
-180.0 to
180.0
0.0
deg
No No A No 333H
Note: The E5 constants are not initialized by the initialize operation.
* 1. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the Inverter capacity selection (o2-04) or control method selection (A1-02).
The values for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min -1 ) are given.
* 2. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).
The values for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min
-1
) are given.
4-9
5-
29
5
-30
Option Constants: F
The following settings are made with the option constants (F constants): Settings for option cards
PG Option Setup: F1
User constants for the PG Speed Control Board are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
F1-02
Operation selection at
PG open circuit
(PGO)
F1-03
Operation selection at overspeed
(OS)
F1-04
Operation selection at deviation
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-
09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, do not normally make this setting.)
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-
09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, do not normally make this setting.)
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-
09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and operation continued.)
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3
1
1
*
3
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
No 381H 6-129
No 382H 6-49
A 383H 6-50
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
F1-05 PG rotation
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
Overspeed detection level
Overspeed detection delay time
0: Phase A leads with Forward Run Command.
(Phase B leads with
Reverse Run Command.)
1: Phase B leads with Forward Run Command.
(Phase A leads with
Reverse Run Command.)
Sets the overspeed detection method.
Speeds above that set for F1-
08 (set as a percentage of the maximum speed) that continue to exceed this speed for the time set in F1-09 (unit: s) are detected as overspeed faults.
0 or 1
0 to
120
0.0 to
2.0
1
*
115%
0.0 s
*
Excessive speed deviation detection level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
Sets the speed deviation detection method.
Any speed deviation above the F1-10 set level (set as a percentage of the maximum speed) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is detected as a speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the reference command speed.
0 to 50 10%
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 s
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
384H
387H
388H
389H
38AH
Page
6-129
6-49
6-49
6-50
6-50
F1-14
F1-18
PG opencircuit detection time
DV3 Detection selection
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time. PGO will be detected if the detection time continues beyond the set time.
Sets the conditions of DV3 detection (inversion detection).
0: DV3 detection disabled n: DV3 detection enabled if
DV3 detection conditions are detected for 5 ms × n times in succession.
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 5
2.0 s
5
F1-19
DV4 Detection selection
Sets the conditions of DV4 detection (inversion prevention detection).
0: DV4 detection disabled n: DV4 detection enabled if n pulses of A/B phase pulse inverted to the speed reference are detected.
0 to
5000
128
* The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
No
Νο
Νο
No
Νο
Νο
A
A
A
Νο
Νο
Νο
38DH 6-129
3ADH 6-129
3AEH 6-129
5-
31
5
-32
Analog Reference Board: F2
User constants for the Analog Reference Board are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
F2-01
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
Sets the functions for channel 1 to 3 which are effective when the AI-14B Analog
Reference Board is used.
0: 3-channel individual
(Channel 1: terminal A1,
Channel 2: terminal A2,
Channel 3: terminal A3)
1: 3-channel addition (Addition values are the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-01. In this case the multifunction input “Option/
Inverter selection” cannot be used.
0 or 1 0 No A A A 38FH 6-135
Digital Reference Board: F3
User constants for the Digital Reference Board are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
F3-01
Digital input option
Sets the Digital Reference
Board input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5digit input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the
DI-16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher, the input will be
BCD, and the units will change to the o1-03 setting.
0 to 7 0 No A A A 390H 6-135
User Constant Tables
Analog Monitor Boards: F4
User constants for the Analog Monitor Board are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
Name
Channel 1 monitor selection
Channel 1 gain
Channel 2 monitor selection
Channel 2 gain
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Effective when the Analog
Monitor Board is used.
Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor item to be output. (U1-
)
The monitor items that can be set depends on the control method.
Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for outputting monitor items.
4, 10 to 14, 28 to 30, 34, 39 to 41, 49, 58, 61, 63, 70 to
77, and 79 to 82 cannot be set. 23, 25, 35, 42, 43, 45 to
48, 50 to 57, 59, 60, 62, 64 to
67, and 83 to 99 are not used.
When the AO-12 Analog
Monitor Board is used, outputs of ± 10 V are possible.
To output ± 10 V, set F4-07 or F4-08 to 1. When the AO-
08 Analog Monitor Board is used, only outputs of 0 to
+10 V are possible.
A meter calibration function is available.
*1
1 to 99
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
5
*2
1.00
1 to 99 3
*2
0.50
No
Yes
No
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
391H
392H
393H
394H
Page
6-77
6-77
6-77
6-77
Sets the channel 1 item bias to 100%/10 V when the Analog Monitor Board is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0% Yes A A A 395H 6-77 F4-05
F4-06
F4-07
F4-08
Channel 1 output monitor bias
Channel 2 output monitor bias
Analog output signal level for channel 1
Analog output signal level for channel 2
Sets the channel 2 item bias to 100%/10 V when the Analog Monitor Board is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0 or 1
0.0%
0
0
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
396H
397H
398H
6-78
6-78
6-78
* 1. Adjustment target is the CH1 output when the F4-02 or F4-05 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
Adjustment target is the CH2 output when the F4-04 or F4-06 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
To adjust the meter, multiply a value equivalent to 100% of the output by the gain setting, and then add the set bias.
* 2. The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
5-
33
5
-34
Digital Output Boards (DO-02C and DO-08): F5
User constants for the Digital Output Board are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
F5-01
Channel 1 output selection
Effective when a Digital
Output Board (DO-02C or
DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D 0 No No A A 399H 6-132
F5-02
Channel 2 output selection
Effective when a Digital
Output Board (DO-02C or
DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
0F
1
No No A A 39AH 6-132
F5-03
F5-04
Channel 3 output selection
Channel 4 output selection
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
0F
2
0F
4
F5-05
Channel 5 output selection
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
0F
6
F5-06
F5-07
F5-08
Channel 6 output selection
Channel 7 output selection
Channel 8 output selection
F5-09
DO-08 output mode selection
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
0F
37
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08
Digital Output Board is used.
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 3D 0F
0 to 3D 0F
0 to 2 0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 39BH 6-132
A 39CH 6-132
A 39DH 6-133
A 39EH 6-133
A 39FH 6-133
A 3A0H 6-133
A 3A1H 6-133
User Constant Tables
Communications Option Cards: F6
User constants for a Communications Option Card are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
F6-01
Operation selection after communications error
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration stop using deceleration time in C1-
02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-
09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3 1 No A A A 3A2H
F6-02
Input level of external fault from
Communications
Option Card
0: Always detect
1: Detect during operation
0 or 1 0 No A A A 3A3H
F6-03
F6-06
Stopping method for external fault from
Communications
Option Card
Torque reference/ torque limit selection from optical option
0: Deceleration stop using deceleration time in C1-
02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-
09
3: Continue operation
0: Torque reference/torque limit from transmission disabled.
1: Torque reference/torque limit from transmission enabled.
0 to 3
0 or 1
1
0
No
No
A
No
A
A
A 3A4H
A 3A7H
Page
-
-
-
-
5-
35
5
-36
Terminal Function Constants: H
The following settings are made with the terminal function constants (H constants): Settings for external terminal functions.
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1
User constants for multi-function contact inputs are shown in the following tables.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06
Terminal S3 function selection
Multi-function contact input
1
Terminal S4 function selection
Multi-function contact input
2
Terminal S5 function selection
Multi-function contact input
3
Terminal S6 function selection
Multi-function contact input
4
Terminal S7 function selection
Multi-function contact input
5
Terminal S8 function selection
Multi-function contact input
6
0 to 78
0 to
768
0 to 78
0 to 78
0 to 78
0 to 78
24
14
3 (0)
4 (3)
6 (4)
F
* The values in parentheses indicate factory settings when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
*
*
*
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
400H
401H
402H
403H
404H
4-5H
Page
-
-
-
-
-
-
Multi-function Contact Input Functions
6
7
4
5
8
Setting
Value
0
1
2
3
Function
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run Command)
Local/Remote selection (ON: Local, OFF: Remote)
Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option card)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
Page
Yes Yes Yes 6-15
Yes Yes Yes 6-63
Yes Yes Yes
6-70
6-135
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-09 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog speed command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Accel/decel time 1
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
Yes Yes Yes 6-9
Yes Yes Yes 6-9
Yes Yes Yes 6-9
Yes Yes Yes 6-9
Yes Yes Yes 6-21
Yes Yes Yes 6-64
User Constant Tables
Setting
Value
Function
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
A
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency on hold)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
Page
Yes Yes Yes 6-64
No Yes Yes 6-65
B OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)
C Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable)
E Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled)
F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
6-113
-
10
11
12
13
Up command (Always set with the down command)
Down command (Always set with the up command)
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
15
Emergency stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when ON.)
17
Emergency stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when OFF)
No Yes Yes 6-66
No Yes Yes 6-66
No Yes Yes 6-71
No Yes Yes 6-71
Yes Yes Yes 7-2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-19
6-19
18
1B
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function outputs are set in H1 and H2 .)
19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
1A Accel/Decel time 2
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants other than speed monitor are write protected.)
1C Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 speed is added to analog speed reference.)
1D
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 speed is subtracted from analog speed reference.)
1E Analog speed reference sample/hold
20 to
2F
External fault (Desired settings possible)
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
No
No
No
Yes
Yes Yes
6-93
7-20
Yes Yes Yes 6-98
Yes Yes Yes 6-21
Yes
No
Yes Yes
6-126
7-20
No Yes 6-69
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-69
6-70
6-72
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control)
31 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
Yes Yes Yes 6-98
32 Multi-step speed reference 4
34 PID soft starter ON/OFF
Yes Yes Yes 6-98
35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes 6-98
61 External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) No No Yes 6-53
62 External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
67
Communications test mode (“Pass” is displayed when the communication test is passed.)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No Yes 6-53
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
6-98
6-93
71
77
Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03)
78 Polarity reversing command for external torque reference
No Yes No
6-106
6-111
No Yes No 6-113
No Yes No 6-106
5-
37
5
-38
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
User constants for multi-function outputs are shown in the following tables.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
H2-06
Terminal
M1-M2 function selection
(contact)
Multi-function contact output
Terminal P1 function selection
(open collector)
Multi-function contact output 1
Terminal P2 function selection
(open collector)
Multi-function contact output 2
Integral power output level selection
Select the output level for the multi-function contact when selecting 39 to one of
H2-01 to H2-03.
0: 0.1 kWh
1: 1 kWh
2: 10 kWh
3: 100 kWh
4: 1000 kWh
0 to 3D
0 to 3D
0 to 3D
0 to 4
0
1
2
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 40BH
A 40CH
A 40DH -
-
-
A 437H 6-75
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
Setting
Value
0
1
During run (ON: Run Command is ON or voltage is being output)
Zero-speed
Function
2 Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.)
3
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and during frequency agree)
4
5
6
7
Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, L4-02 used)
Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, L4-02 used)
Inverter operation ready
READY: After initialization, no faults
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
Page
Yes Yes Yes 6-73
Yes Yes Yes 6-73
Yes Yes Yes 6-39
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-39
6-39
6-39
-
8
9
During baseblock (ON: during baseblock)
Speed reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
A Run Command selection status (ON: Run Command from Operator)
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON)
C Loss of speed reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
6-42
6-58
User Constant Tables
Setting
Value
Function
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
E
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and
CPF01 has occurred.)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
Page
Yes Yes Yes 6-61
Yes Yes Yes -
F Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.)
10 Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
11 Fault reset command active
12 Timer function output
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
6-93
13 Frequency agree 2 (L4-04 used)
14
Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and during frequency agree)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-39
6-39
15 Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ L4-03, L4-04 used)
16 Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ L4-03, L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-39
6-39
17 Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes 6-42
18 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON) Yes Yes Yes 6-42
19 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes 6-42
1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run) Yes Yes Yes -
1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
1D During regeneration (ON: During regeneration)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
1E
1F
Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
2F Maintenance timer display (ON: Maintenance timer for capacitors or fans.)
30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
No
Yes
Yes Yes 6-59
Yes Yes
6-45
6-74
Yes Yes Yes 6-74
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
No Yes 6-74 31 During speed limit (ON: During speed limit)
32
37
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
Output if the external torque reference is limited (the internal torque reference is less than the external torque reference) when the torque control is selected.
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)
39
The integral power has exceeded the output level set to H2-06. (Contact output for 200 ms.)
3A Fan fault alarm (NO contact output)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
6-106
6-73
6-74
3B
3C
3D
Fan fault alarm (NC contact output)
Magnetic pole detection completed (ON: Magnetic pole detection completed.)
Inverter's Circulation Fan Fault (ON: Fault)
Yes Yes Yes 6-75
Yes Yes Yes 6-75
No Yes Yes -
Yes Yes Yes 6-60
5-
39
5
-40
Analog Inputs: H3
User constants for analog inputs are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
H3-01
Signal level selection
(terminal
A1)
0: 0 to 10 V
1: − 10 to 10 V
Sets the speed when 10 V is input, as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Sets the speed when 0 V is input, as a percentage of the maximum speed.
H3-04
Signal level selection
(terminal
A3)
H3-05
Multi-function analog input (terminal A3) function selection
0: 0 to 10 V
1: − 10 to 10 V
Select from the functions listed in the following table.
Refer to the next page.
0 or 1
-100.0
to
+100.0
0 or 1
0 to 1F
0
0.0 to
1000.0 100.0%
0.0%
0
1F
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 410H 6-27
A 411H 6-27
A 412H 6-27
A 413H
A 414H
6-27
6-105
6-27
6-105
H3-09
Multi-function analog input
(terminal
A2) function selection
Sets the input gain (level) when 10V is input.
Set according to the 100% value selected from H3-05.
Sets the input gain (level) when 0V is input.
Set according to the 100% value selected from H3-05.
H3-08
Signal level selection
(terminal
A2)
0: 0 to +10V, with lower limit
1: − 10 to +10 V, lower limit
2: 4 to 20 mA.
without
Switch current and voltage input using the switch on the control panel.
Select multi-function analog input function for terminal
A2. Refer to the next table.
-
0.0 to
1000.0 100.0%
100.0 to
+100.0
0 to 2
0 to 1F
0.0%
2
0
H3-10
Gain
(terminal
A2)
H3-11
Bias
(terminal
A2)
Sets the input gain (level) when 10 V (20 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value for the function set for
H3-09.
Sets the input gain (level) when 0 V (4 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value for the function set for
H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0 100.0%
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 415H
A 416H
A 417H
A 418H
A 419H
A 41AH
6-27
6-105
6-27
6-105
6-27
6-105
6-27
6-105
6-28
6-105
6-28
6-105
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
H3-12
Analog input filter time constant
H3-13
Name
Terminal
A1/A2 switching
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
Sets primary delay filter time constant in seconds for the analog input terminal.
Effective for noise control etc.
0.00 to
2.00
0: Use terminal A1 analog input as main speed reference.
1: Use terminal A2 analog input as main speed reference.
Effective when H3-09 is set to 2 and H3-05 is not set to 0 or 2.
0 or 1
0.03 s
0
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
41BH
41CH
4-28
6-28
-
H3-05 and H3-09 Settings
Setting
Value
0
Function
Add to terminal A1
Contents (100%)
Maximum speed
1 Speed gain
Speed reference (voltage) command value
2
5
7
9
A
B
C
D
E
2nd step analog
(Auxiliary speed reference)
Accel/decel change
(reduction coefficient)
Overtorque/undertorque detection level
Speed reference lower limit level
Jump speed
PID feedback
PID target value
Speed bias 2
Motor temperature input
10 Positive torque limit
11 Negative torque limit
12 Regenerative torque limit
13
Torque reference/torque limit at speed control
14 Torque compensation
15 Positive/negative torque limit
1F Analog input not used.
16 to 1E Not used
Maximum speed
Set acceleration and deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-08)
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for sequence test mode
Maximum speed
Maximum speed
Maximum speed
Maximum speed
Maximum speed
10 V = 100%
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
-
-
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
Page
Yes Yes Yes
6-29
6-106
Yes Yes Yes 6-29
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
-
6-10
6-22
6-44
6-34
Yes Yes Yes 6-31
Yes Yes Yes 6-98
Yes Yes Yes 6-98
Yes Yes Yes 6-29
Yes No No
No Yes Yes
-
6-35
6-35
6-35
6-106
6-106
6-35
6-10
-
5-
41
5
-42
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
User constants for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
H4-01
H4-02
H4-03
H4-04
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Monitor selection
(terminal
FM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) from terminal FM. The monitor items that can be set depends on the control method.
4, 10 to 14, 28 to 30, 34, 39 to 41, 49, 58, 61, 63, 70 to
77, 79 to 82 cannot be set.
23, 25, 35, 42, 43, 45 to 48,
50 to 57, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 83 to 99 are not used.
Gain (terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*1
Bias (terminal FM)
Monitor selection
(terminal
AM)
1 to 99
0.00 to
2.50
5
*2
1.00
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/ down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*1
-10.0 to
+10.0
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) from terminal AM.
The monitor items that can be set depends on the control method.
4, 10 to 14, 28 to 30, 34, 39 to 41, 49, 58, 61, 63, 70 to
77, 79 to 82 cannot be set.
23, 25, 35, 42, 43, 45 to 48,
50 to 57, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 83 to 99 are not used.
1 to 99
0.0%
3
*2
No
Yes
Yes
No
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
41DH
41EH
41FH
420H
Page
6-76
4-6
6-76
6-76
6-76
H4-05
Gain (terminal AM)
Set the voltage level gain for multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the
100% output for the monitor items. The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*1
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes Q Q Q 421H
4-6
6-77
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
H4-06
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal level selection
H4-08
Bias (terminal AM)
Analog output 2 signal level selection
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/ down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*1
-10.0 to
+10.0
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 1
(terminal FM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
1: − 10 to 10 V output
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 2
(terminal AM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
1: − 10 to 10 V output
0 or 1
0 or 1
0.0%
0
0
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
422H
423H
424H
6-77
6-77
-
* 1. Adjustment target is the FM terminal when the H4-02 or H4-03 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
Adjustment target is the AM terminal when the H4-05 or H4-06 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
To adjust the meter, multiply a value that is equivalent to 100% of the output by the gain setting and add the set bias.
* 2. The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed.
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
User constants for MEMOBUS communications are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
H5-01
H5-02
Slave address
Set the Inverter's slave address.
Communication speed selection
Set the baud rate for
MEMOBUS communications of communications connection terminals.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
H5-03
Communication parity selection
Set the parity for MEMO-
BUS communications of communications connection terminals.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 20
*
0 to 4
0 to 2
1FH
3
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
Page
A 425H 6-83
A 426H 6-83
A 427H 6-83
5-
43
5
-44
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
Stopping method after communication error
RTS control ON/
OFF
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in
C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-
09
3: Continue operation
Communication error detection selection
Send wait time
Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
Set the time from the
Inverter receiving data to when the Inverter starts to send.
Select to enable or disable
RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always
ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)
0 to 3
0 or 1
5 to 65 5 ms
0 or 1
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
3
1
1
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
428H
429H
42AH
42BH
6-83
6-83
6-83
6-84
Pulse Train I/O: H6
User constants for pulse I/O are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
H6-01
H6-02
Pulse train input function selection
Pulse train input scaling
0: Speed reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
0 to 2 0 No No
No
A
A
A 42CH
A 42DH
6-5
6-32
6-97
6-5
6-32
H6-03
Pulse train input gain
H6-04
Pulse train input bias
H6-05
Pulse train input filter time
Set the number of pulses in hertz, taking the reference to be 100%.
1000 to
32000
Set the input gain level as a percent when the pulse train set in H6-02 is input.
0.0 to
1000.0
1440
Hz
Yes
100.0% Yes
Set the input bias when the pulse train is 0.
-100.0 to
100.0
0.0% Yes
Set the pulse train input primary delay filter time constant in seconds.
0.00 to
2.00
0.10 s Yes
No
No
No
A
A
A
A 42EH 6-32
A 42FH 6-32
A 430H 6-32
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name
H6-06
Pulse train monitor selection
H6-07
Pulse train monitor scaling
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
Select the pulse train monitor output items (value of the
part of U1 ).
There are two types of monitor items: Speed-related items and PID-related items.
Set the number of pulses output when speed is 100% in
Hz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to
0, to make the pulse train monitor output synchronously to the motor speed.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
0 to
32000
2
1440
Hz
Yes
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
431H
432H
6-79
6-79
Protection Function Constants: L
The following settings are made with the protection function constants (L constants): Motor protection selection, power loss ride through function, overvoltage inhibit selection function, speed detection, fault restart, torque detection, torque limits, and hardware protection.
Motor Overload: L1
User constants for motor overloads are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
L1-01
Motor protection selection
Sets whether the motor overload protection function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
4: Variable torque PM motor
5: Constant torque PM motor
6: Increased safety, explosion-proof PM motor (variable torque)
In some applications when the Inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this constant is set to 4, 5, or 6
(Motor protection function enabled), protection may not be effective.
0 or 4
0, 4, 5,
6
4
*1 *2
No No A
Page
A 480H 6-45
5-
45
5
-46
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
L1-02
Motor protection time constant
Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload resistance is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min
* 1. This constant is not unitized by the initialize operation.
* 2. The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
No A A A 481H
Page
6-45
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
User constants for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
Momentary power loss detection
0: Disabled (UV fault detection at momentary power loss)
1: Enabled (Restart if power returns within the time set in L2- 02. UV fault detection if the time exceeds that set in L2-02.)
2: Enabled during CPU operation (Restart if power returns during
CPU operation. No UV fault detection.)
3: KEB operation (Restart if power returns within the time set in L2-02. UV fault detection if the time exceeds that set in L2-
02.)
4: KEB operation during
CPU operation (Restart if power returns during
CPU operation. No UV fault detection.)
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Sets the Ridethrough time in units of seconds, when
Momentary Power Loss
Selection (L2-01) is set to 1 or 3.
Min. baseblock time
Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time in units of one second, when the
Inverter is restarted after power loss ride through.
0 to 4
0 to
60.0
0.1 to
5.0
0
*3
0.1 s
*1
0.1 s
*1
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
A 485H 6-52
A 486H 6-52
A 487H 6-52
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
L2-05
L2-06
Undervoltage detection level
KEB deceleration time
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level
(main circuit DC voltage) in
V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower the main circuit undervoltage detection level.
Enabled when L2-01 is set to
3 or 4.
Sets the deceleration time in seconds from the maximum speed to zero-speed at momentary power loss command (KEB).
Controller power supply will be extended if deceleration time is shortened.
150 to
210
*2
0.0 to
200.0
190 V
*2
30.0 s
*3
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
* 1. The factory settings vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. (The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class Inverters are given.)
* 2. These are values for 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverter are twice as large.
* 3. The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
489H
48AH
6-52
-
5-
47
5
-48
Overvoltage Inhibit Selection: L3
User constants for the overvoltage inhibit selection function are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
L3-11
Overvoltage inhibit selection
Sets the function to inhibit overvoltage in the Inverter
DC bus.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Reduces the regenerative torque limit automatically, depending on the
DC bus voltage, to prevent the overvoltage
(OV).
Deceleration time might be longer than the setting due to auto-adjustment of the decelerating rate.
If decelerating with a braking unit or braking resister, set L3-11 to 0 (Disabled). If this is not done, deceleration cannot be achieved in the desired deceleration time.
0 or 1 1 No No A A 4C7H
4-28
6-25
7-3
Speed Detection: L4
User constants for the reference detection function are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
L4-01
Speed agreement detection level
L4-02
Speed agreement detection width
Effective when “Desired speed agree 1”, “Speed detection 1>”, or “Speed detection 1<” is set for a multi-function output.
Speeds to be detected are set as a percentage of maximum speed.
Effective when “Speed agree
1,” “Desired speed agree 1,” or “Speed detection 1<” is set for a multi-function output.
Sets the speed detection width as a percentage of maximum speed.
0.0 to
100.0
0.0 to
40.0
0.0%
4.0%
No
No
No
No
A
A
A 499H 6-38
A 49AH 6-38
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
L4-03
L4-04
Speed agreement detection level (+/-)
Speed agreement detection width (+/-)
Effective when “Desired speed agree 2”, “Desired speed agree1”, “Speed detection3>” or “Speed detection 4<” is set for a multi-function output.
Speed that should be detected is set as a percentage of maximum speed.
Effective when “Speed agree
2”, “Desired speed agree 1”, or “Speed detection 4<” is set for a multi-function output.
Speed detection width is set as a percentage of maximum speed.
-100.0 to
+100.0
0.0 to
40.0
L4-05
Operation when speed reference is missing
0: Stop (Operation follows the speed reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed continues. (At 80% of speed before the speed reference was lost)
Speed reference is lost:
Speed reference dropped over 90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1
0.0%
4.0%
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
49BH
49CH
49DH
6-38
6-38
6-58
Fault Restart: L5
User constants for restarting faults are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
L5-01
Number of auto restart attempts
Sets the number of auto restart attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run speed.
0 to 10
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
A 49EH 6-59
A 49FH 6-59
5-
49
5
-50
Torque Detection: L6
User constants for the torque detection function are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
L6-01
Torque detection selection 1
0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque
(warning).
2: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
4: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque
(warning).
6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
0 to 8 0 No No A A 4A1H 6-41
L6-02
L6-03
Torque detection level 1
Torque detection time 1
Motor rated torque is set as
100%.
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time in 1second units.
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
150%
0.1 s
No
No
No
No
A
A
A 4A2H 6-42
A 4A3H 6-42
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name
L6-04
Torque detection selection 2
L6-05
L6-06
Torque detection level 2
Torque detection time 2
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
Torque detection 1 is output from the multi-function output by setting the overtorque/undertorque detection
1NO (B) or 1NC (17) to the multi-function output (H2-
).
Torque detection 2 is output from the multi-function output by setting the overtorque/undertorque detection
2NO (18) or 2NC (19) to the multi-function output (H2-
).
0 to 8
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
0
150%
0.1 s
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
4A4H
4A5H
4A6H
6-42
6-42
6-42
Torque Limits: L7
User constants for torque limits are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
L7-01
L7-02
Name
Forward drive torque limit
Reverse drive torque limit
L7-03
Forward regenerative torque limit
L7-04
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Description
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
Regenerative state
Regenerative state
No. of motor rotations
Forward
Negative torque
0 to
160
0 to
300
0 to
160
0 to
300
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
0 to
160
0 to
300
160% No No A A 4A7H
4-28
6-35
0 to
160
0 to
300
160%
160%
160%
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
4A8H
4A9H
4AAH
4-28
6-35
4-28
6-35
4-28
6-35
Note: To protect the Inverter, the upper torque limit will be reduced automatically.
The upper torque limit depends on the setting of the carrier frequency (C6-02).
5-
51
5
-52
Hardware Protection: L8
User constants for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
L8-01
L8-02
L8-03
L8-05
L8-07
L8-08
Protect selection for internal DB resistor
(Type ERF)
0: Disabled (no overheating protection)
1: Enabled (overheating protection)
Overheat pre-alarm level
Operation selection after overheat prealarm
Input openphase protection selection
Output open-phase protection selection
Output open-phase detection level
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm in ° C.
The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat prealarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
3: Continue operation
(Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects if input current open-phase, power supply voltage imbalance or main circuit electrostatic capacitor deterioration occurs.)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects one output open-phase.)
2: Enabled (Detects more than one output openphases)
When applied motor capacity is small for Inverter capacity, output open-phase may be detected inadvertently or open-phase may not be detected. In this case, set to 0.
Output open-phase will be detected if any U, V, W phase output current has been under the setting level of the L8-08 for 500 ms or more when output current >
30% and soft-starter output ≥
1.0 Hz.
UP/DOWN counter counts this 500 ms.
0 or 1
50 to
130
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 2
0.0 to
20.0
0
95 ° C
*1
3
0
0
*2
5.0%
*2
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 4ADH 6-61
A 4AEH 6-62
A 4AFH 6-62
A 4B1H
No
A
4B3H
A 4B4H -
-
-
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
L8-09
L8-10
L8-11
L8-12
L8-15
L8-29
L8-32
Ground protection selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Cooling fan control selection
Cooling fan control delay time
Ambient temperature
OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
Current imbalance protection selection
OH1 detection of
Inverter’ s cooling fan
Set the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan.
0: ON only when Inverter is
ON
1: ON whenever power is
ON
Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the cooling fan
OFF command is received.
Set the ambient temperature.
If set to 60 ° C, the Inverter overload protection function
(OL2) will start 20% earlier.
0: OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.
Usually, setting is not required.
Stops the Inverter if threephase output current imbalance occurs due to a photocoupler fault or open-phase.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Disabled (FAN minor fault detection)
1: Enabled (OH1 major fault detection)
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to
300
45 to
60
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
1
0
60 s
45
1
1
1
° C
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting value will return to the factory setting it the control method is changed.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4B5H
4B6H
4B7H
4B8H
4BBH
4DFH
4E2H
Page
-
-
-
-
-
-
6-60
5-
53
5
-54
N: Special Adjustments
The following settings are unique to each control methods.
Magnetic Pole Detection: N8
User constants for magnetic pole detection are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
N8-01
N8-02
Current of magnetic pole calculation at start
Magnetic pole pull-in current
Set the current of magnetic pole calculation at start as a percentage of the motor rated current (E5-03).
Normally, setting adjustments are not required.
If the “Si” value is written on the motor name plate, set the
Si value to the N8-01.
Set the current pulling in the magnetic pole at start as a percentage of the motor rated current (E5-03).
To increase the starting torque, change the setting to a larger value.
0 to
100
0 to
150
50%
80%
* The setting value will return to be the factory setting if control method is changed.
*
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
540H
541H
Page
-
-
User Constant Tables
Digital Operator Constants: o
The following settings are made with the Digital Operator constants (o constants): Multi-function selections and the copy function.
Monitor Select: o1
User constants for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register o1-01 o1-02 o1-03
Monitor selection
Monitor selection after power up
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Set the number of the monitor item to be displayed in the earliest 4 monitor items.
(U1 )
The output monitor voltage
(factory setting) can be changed.
Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.
1: Speed reference
2: Motor speed
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the speed reference and speed monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units
(Maximum output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39: min
-1
units (Sets the motor poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.
4 to 99
1 to 4
0 to
39999
6
1
1
Yes
Yes
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 500H
A 501H 6-119
A 502H
Page
-
6-119
6-136 o1-05
Set 4-digit number excluding the decimal point.
Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is
200.0, set 12000
LCD brightness adjustment
LCD Contrast
Set a smaller value to lighten the LCD and a larger value to darken the LCD (standard:
3).
0 to 5 3 Yes A A A 504H -
5-
55
5
-56
Multi-function Selections: o2
User constants for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
LOCAL/
REMOTE key enable/ disable
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
User constant initial value
Sets the Digital Operator
Local/Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital
Operator and the constant settings.)
Sets the Stop Key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the Run
Command is issued from and external terminal, the
Stop Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set constants as user initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)
When the set constants are recorded as user initial values, 1110 will be set in A1-
03.
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 2
1
1
0 kVA selection
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
This constant is set at factory. Usually, setting is not required.
Speed reference setting method selection
When the speed reference is set on the Digital Operator speed reference monitor, sets whether the Enter Key is necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the speed reference without Enter Key operation.
Sets the operation when the
Digital Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation continues even if the
Digital Operator is disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected at Digital Operator disconnection. Inverter output is cut off, and fault contact is operated.)
0 to FF 0 *
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
505H
506H
507H
508H
509H
50AH
6-119
6-120
4-26
6-120
-
-
6-120
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register o2-07 o2-08
Cumulative operation time setting
Cumulative operation time selection
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from the set values.
0: Cumulative time when the Inverter power is on.
(All time while the
Inverter power is on is accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run time. (Only Inverter output time is accumulated.)
0 to
65535
0 or 1
0 hr
0
No
No
A
A o2-10 o2-12 o2-14 o2-18
Fan operation time setting
Fault trace/ fault history clear function
Output power monitor clear selection
Capacitor maintenance setting
Set the initial value of the fan operation time using time units.
The operation time accumulates from the set value.
0: Disabled (U2 and U3 constants are on hold.)
1: Enabled (Initializes U2 and U3 constants.)
0: Holds output power monitor.
1: Initializes output power monitor. (Returns to 0.)
Clears the electrolytic capacitor maintenance (U1-61)
[setting:0] and sets the setting value in % unit.
0 to
65535
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to
150
0 hr
0
0
0%
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
A
* The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Page
50BH 6-120
50CH
50EH
510H
512H
51DH
6-120
-
-
-
5-64
5-
57
5
-58
Copy Function: o3
User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page o3-01
Copy function selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to
Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to
Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3 0 No A A A 515H 6-122 o3-02
Read permitted selection
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
0 or 1 0 No A A A 516H 6-122
User Constant Tables
T: Motor Autotuning
Autotunig Mode: T1
The following setting is for autotuning.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
T1-01
Autotuning mode selection
Set the autotuning mode.
2: Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
4: PG home position offset and line-to-line resistance autotuning
(This selection is only for flux vector control for PM)
2
2, 4
2 * No No Yes Yes 701H
4-14
4-21
* The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. (The factory settings of open-loop vector control for PM are given. For flux vector control for PM, the setting is 4.)
Motor Constants For Autotuning: T2
Motor constants for autotuning are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
T2-01
Motor rated capacity
(E5-02 correspondence)
Sets the motor rated capacity according to the information on the motor name plate.
Only that or one frame smaller than the Inverter capacity can be set.
0.40 to
160.00
0.40 to
300.00
0.40
kW
*2
No No Yes Yes 730H
4-14
4-21
T2-02
T2-03
T2-04
Base speed
(E1-06 correspondence)
Sets the motor base speed according to the information on the motor name plate.
Only the value of 1750,1450, or 1150 min
-1
can be set.
1150 to
1750
Base voltage
(E1-13 correspondence)
Motor rated current
(E5-03 correspondence)
Sets the motor base voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.
Sets the motor rated current according to the information on the motor name plate.
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.00 to
2000.0
1750 min
-1
*2
190.0
V
*2
1.65
A
*2
No
No
No
No Yes Yes 731H
4-14
4-21
No Yes Yes 732H
4-14
4-21
No Yes Yes 733H
4-14
4-21
5-
59
5
-60
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
T2-05
T2-06
Number of motor poles
(E5-04 correspondence)
Motor d axis inductance
(E5-06 correspondence)
Sets the number of motor poles according to the information on the motor name plate.
Sets the motor d-axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.
6
0.00 to
300.00
6 pole
*2
54.84
mH
*2
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
734H
735H
T2-07
T2-08
T2-11
Motor q axis inductance
(E5-07 correspondence)
Sets the motor q-axis inductance according to the information on the motor name plate.
Motor induced voltage constant
(E5-09 correspondence)
Sets the motor induced voltage according to the information on the motor name plate.
Input voltage setting
(E1-01 correspondence)
Sets the Inverter input voltage in units of 1 V.
0.00 to
600.00
50.0 to
2000.0
155 to
255
*1
64.10
mH
*2
223.0
mV x sec/rad
*2
200 V
*1
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
* 1. These are values for 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.
* 2. The factory settings vary in accordance with the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).
The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min
-1
) are given.
Yes
Yes
Yes
736H
737H
73AH
4-14
4-21
4-14
4-21
4-14
4-21
4-14
4-21
4-14
4-21
User Constant Tables
U: Monitor Constants
The following settings are made with the monitor constants (U constants): Setting constants for monitoring in drive mode.
Status Monitor Constants: U1
The constants used for monitoring status are listed in the following table.
Constant
Number
U1-03
Name
U1-01
Speed reference
U1-02
Output frequency
Output current
Description
Monitors/sets the speed reference value.*
Monitors the output frequency.*
Monitors the output current.
(
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
10 V: Max. speed
− 10 to 10 V possible)
10 V: Max.speed
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
10 V: Inverter rated output current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value output)
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0.01
%
A A A 40H
0.01
%
A A A 41H
0.1 A A A A 42H
U1-04
Control method
Checks the current control method.
(Cannot be output.) A
U1-05 Motor speed
U1-06
Output voltage
Monitors the detected motor speed.*
10 V: Max. speed
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
Monitors the output voltage reference value in the
Inverter.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to +10 V output)
U1-07
DC bus voltage
Monitors the main DC voltage in the Inverter.
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
U1-08
Output power
Monitors the output power
(internally detected value).
10 V: Motor capacity (During closed loop vector control and open loop vector control for PM)
10 V: Inverter capacity
(Sequence test)
(max. applicable motor capacity)
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
U1-09
Torque reference
Monitor in internal torque reference value for vector control.
(
10 V: Motor rated torque
− 10 to 10 V possible)
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
0.01
%
0.1
VAC
1
VDC
0.1 kW
0.1%
No
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 43H
A 44H
A 45H
A 46H
A 47H
A 48H
5-
61
5
-62
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
U1-10
Input terminal status
Shows input ON/OFF status
U1-10=
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON.
1: REV command
(S2) is ON.
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON.
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON.
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON.
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON.
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON.
1: Multi input 6
(S8) is ON.
(Cannot be output.) A A A 49H
U1-11
Output terminal status
Shows output ON/OFF status.
U1-11=
1: Multi-function contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion contact output 2
(P1) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion contact output 3
(P2) is ON.
Not used (always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/MB-MC) is ON.
(Cannot be output.)
U1-12
Operation status
Inverter operating status.
U1-12=
1: Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter
ready
1: Minor fault
(Cannot be output.) -
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AH
4BH
U1-13
1: Major fault
Cumulative operation time
Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the operating time/power ON time selection can be set in o2-07 and o2-08.
U1-14
Software
No. (flash memory)
(Manufacturer’s ID number)
U1-15
U1-16
Terminal
A1 input voltage
Terminal
A2 input current
(voltage)
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
Monitors the input voltage of the voltage speed reference. An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.
(
10 V: 100% (10 V input)
− 10 to 10 V possible)
Monitors the input current of the multi-function analog input.
An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V input)
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
1 hr
-
0.1%
0.1%
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4CH
4DH
4EH
4FH
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
U1-17
U1-18
U1-19
Terminal
A3 input voltage
Monitors the input voltage of the multi-function analog input.
An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
Motor qaxis current
(Iq)
Monitors the calculated value of the motor q-axis current.
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
10 V:Motor rated current
( − 10 to 10 V output)
Motor daxis current
(Id)
Monitors the calculated value of the motor d-axis current.
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
10 V:Motor rated current
( − 10 to 10 V output)
U1-20
Speed reference after soft-start
U1-21 ASR input
Monitors the speed reference after soft-start.
The speed reference given does not include compensations, such as slip compensation.
*
Monitors the input to the speed control loop.
The maximum speed corresponds to 100%.
*
10 V: Max. speed
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. speed
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
U1-22 ASR output
U1-24
PID feedback value
U1-26
Output voltage reference (Vq)
U1-27
Output voltage reference (Vd)
Monitors the output from the speed control loop.
(Primary delay filter output value.)
The motor rated torque corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Motor rated torque
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
Monitors the feedback value when PID control is used.
The input for the maximum speed corresponds to
100%.
*
10 V: Max. speed
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor q-axis current control.
Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor d-axis current control.
(
(
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
− 10 to 10 V possible)
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
− 10 to 10 V possible)
U1-28
Software
No. (CPU)
(Manufacturer’s CPU software No.)
(Cannot be output.)
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.01H
z
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.1
VAC
0.1
VAC
-
A
A
No
A
No
No
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
050H
51H
52H
53H
54H
55H
57H
59H
5AH
5BH
5-
63
5
-64
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
U1-29
U1-30
Output power lower
4 digits
Output power upper
5 digits
Monitors the Inverter’s output power. The display is split into upper digits and lower digits in the following way.
U1-30
.
kWH
U1-29
Example: If the output power is 12345678.9 kWh, the display will be as follows:
U1-29: 678.9 kWH
U1-30: 12345 MWH
(Cannot be output.)
U1-31 LED check
Lights all LEDs on the Digital Operator (JVOP-161).
(Cannot be output.)
U1-32
U1-33
ACR output of q axis
Monitors the current control output value for the motor q-axis current.
10 V: 100%
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
ACR output of d axis
Monitors the current control output value for the motor d-axis current.
10 V: 100%
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
U1-34
U1-36
U1-37
U1-38
OPE fault constant
PID input volume
PID output volume
PID target value
Shows the first constant number where an OPE fault was detected.
(Cannot be output.)
PID feedback volume
Given as maximum speed/
100%
(
10 V: Max. speed
− 10 to 10 V possible)
PID control output
Given as maximum speed/
100%
PID target value
Given as maximum speed/
100%
(
10 V: Max. speed
− 10 to 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. speed
U1-39
U1-40
MEMO-
BUS communications error code
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
U1-39=
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used (always 0).
1: Parity
error
1: Overrun
error
1: Framing
error
1: Timeout
Not used (always 0).
Cooling fan operating time
Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan.
The time can be set in 02-
10.
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
0.1 kWH
1
MW
H
0.1
%
0.1
%
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.01
%
-
-
-
1 hr
No
No
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
5CH
5DH
3CH
5FH
60H
61H
63H
64H
65H
66H
67H
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
U1-44
U1-61
U1-63
U1-68
U1-69
U1-78
ASR output
2
Monitors output from the speed control loop.
(Primary delay filter input value)
Displays 100% at the motor rated current.
Electrolytic capacitor maintenance
Displays the estimated time for the electrolytic capacitor maintenance in % units.
(Can be set in o2-18.)
(100% is the estimated time for replacement.)
Cooling fan maintenance timer
Cooling fan maintenance timer
(100% is the estimated time for replacement.)
Lead-in phase compensation
( Δθ cmp)
Control shaft displacement volume
( Δθ )
Magnetic pole position detected value (with
PG)
Displays the compensation volume estimated by the shaft displacement calculation.
Displays the displacement volume between γ, δ shaft for motor control and actual d, q shaft.
Monitors the magnetic pole position detected value
(Sensor)
10 V: Motor rated current
( − 10 to 10 V)
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
− 5 to 5 V: − 180 to 180 deg
(Output absolute value, if 0 to 10 V is output.)
− 5 to 5 V: − 180 to 180 deg
(Output absolute value, if 0 to 10 V is output.)
10 V/360 deg
0.01
%
1%
1%
0.1 deg
0.1 deg
0.1
deg
No
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
6BH
7CH
7EH
7C0H
7C1H
7CAH
5-
65
5
-66
Fault Trace: U2
User constants for error tracing are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
U2-01
U2-02
Current fault
Previous fault
The contents of the current fault.
The contents of the error that occurred just prior to the current fault.
U2-03
Speed reference at fault
The speed reference when the previous fault occurred.
U2-04
Output frequency at fault
U2-05
Output current at fault
The output frequency when the previous fault occurred.
The output current when the previous fault occurred.
U2-06
Motor speed at fault
The motor speed when the previous fault occurred.
U2-07
U2-08
Output voltage reference at fault
The output reference voltage when the previous fault occurred.
DC bus voltage at fault
The main current DC voltage when the previous fault occurred.
U2-09
U2-10
U2-11
U2-12
Output power at fault
The output power when the previous fault occurred.
Torque reference at fault
The reference torque when the previous fault occurred. The motor rated torque corresponds to 100%.
Input terminal status at fault
The input terminal status when the previous fault occurred.
The format is the same as for
U1-10.
Output terminal status at fault
The output terminal status when the previous fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-11.
U2-13
U2-14
Operation status at fault
Cumulative operation time at fault
The operating status when the previous fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.
The operating time when the previous fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
-
-
0.01
Hz
0.01
Hz
0.1 A
0.01
Hz
0.1 V
1 V
0.1 kW
0.1%
-
-
-
1 hr
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
80H
81H
82H
83H
84H
85H
86H
87H
88H
89H
8AH
8BH
8CH
8DH
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
U2-15
Speed reference after soft-start at fault
The Speed reference after softstart when the previous fault occurs.
Displays the same state as U1-
20.
0.01
Hz
No A
U2-16
U2-17
Motor qaxis inductance at fault
Motor daxis inductance at fault
The Motor q-axis inductance when the previous fault occurs.
Displays the same state as U1-
18.
The Motor d-axis inductance when the previous fault occurs.
Displays the same state as U1-
19.
U2-18
ASR output
2 at fault
The ASR output 2 when the previous fault occurs.
Displays the same state as U1-
44.
(Cannot be output.)
0.1%
0.1%
0.01
%
U2-20
Heatsink temperature at fault
The Heatsink temperature when the previous fault occurs.
1 ° C
U2-30
Control shaft displacement volume
( Δθ ) at fault
The Control shaft displacement volume ( Δθ ) when the previous fault occurs.
Displays the same state as U1-
69.
Note: The following faults are not included in the fault trace: CPF00, CPF01, CPF02, CPF03, UV1, and UV2.
0.1
deg
No
No
No
A
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
7E0H
7E1H
7E2H
7E3H
8EH
7EFH
5-
67
5
-68
Fault History: U3
User constants for the error log are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
U3-01
Most recent fault
The error contents of 1st previous fault.
U3-02
U3-03
U3-04
U3-05
Second most recent fault
Third most recent fault
The error contents of 2nd previous fault.
The error contents of 3rd previous fault.
Fourth most recent fault
The error contents of 4th previous fault.
Cumulative operation time at fault
The total operating time when the 1st previous fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
-
-
-
-
1 hr
U3-06
U3-07
Accumulated time of second fault
The total operating time when the 2nd previous fault occurred.
Accumulated time of third fault
The total operating time when the 3rd previous fault occurred.
1 hr
1 hr
U3-08
Accumulated time of fourth fault
The total operating time when the 4th previous fault occurred.
Note: The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, CPF01, CPF02, CPF03, UV1, and UV2.
1 hr
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequences test
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
MEMO
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
90H
91H
92H
93H
94H
95H
96H
97H
User Constant Tables
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the control method (A1-02) is changed.
Constant
No.
Name Unit
Sequence test
A1-02=0
Factory setting
Open-loop vector control for
PM
A1-02=6
Flux vector control for PM
A1-02=7 b2-01
Zero-speed level (Baseblock starting speed)
C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1
C5-03 ASR proportional (P) gain 2
C5-06 ASR primary delay time
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection
E1-09 Min. speed
F4-01 Channel 1 monitor selection
H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM)
L1-01 Motor protection selection
T1-01 Autotuning mode selection
%
-
-
-
s
-
-
-
-
-
1.5 Hz
2
3
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.5
20.00
20.00
0.004
1 (2 kHz)
30 min
-1
5
5
5
4
1.0
10.00
10.00
0.016
2 (4 kHz)
10% of the base speed of motor
(E1-06)
5
5
4
2
5-
69
5
-70
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the Inverter capacity (o2-04) is changed.
200 V Class
Constant
No.
-
Name
Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection
E5-01 Motor capacity selection
C6-01 CT/VT selection
C6-02
-
Carrier frequency selection
(when VT is selected)
*1 *2 *3
Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)
*3
E2-01 Motor rated current
E2-02 Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Constant
No.
-
Name
Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection
E5-01 Motor capacity selection
C6-01 CT/VT selection
C6-02
-
Carrier frequency selection
(when VT is selected)
*1 *2 *3
Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)
*3
E2-01 Motor rated current
E2-02 Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Unit kW
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
Hz
A
Ω
-
A
Hz
A
Ω
-
Unit kW
-
-
-
s s
° C
Factory setting
0.40
00
0.75
01
1.50
02
2.20
03
3.70
04
5.50
05
7.50
06
0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4
*4
4
*4
4
*4
4
*4
4
*4
4
*4
4
*4
1.90
2.90
1.20
3.30
2.50
1.80
6.20
2.60
2.80
8.50
2.90
3.00
14.00
2.73
4.50
19.60
1.50
5.10
26.60
1.30
8.00
9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
14 26 53 77 112 172 262
0.1
0.1
95
0.1
0.2
95
0.2
0.3
95
0.3
0.4
100
0.5
0.5
95
1.0
0.6
95
1.0
0.7
95
Factory setting
11.00
15.00
18.50
22.00
30.00
37.00
45.00
07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D
0007 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
*6
2
*6
2
*6
4
*4
4
*4
4
*4
4
*4
4
*4
3
*5
3
*5
39.7
1.70
11.2
53.0
1.60
15.2
65.8
1.67
15.7
77.2
1.70
18.5
105.0
1.80
21.9
131.0
1.33
38.2
160.0
1.60
44.0
0.230
0.138
0.101
0.079
0.064
0.039
0.030
245 272 505 538 699 823 852
User Constant Tables
Constant
No.
-
Name
Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Unit kW
s
Factory setting
11.00
15.00
18.50
22.00
30.00
37.00
45.00
07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D
1.0
2.0
2.0
0.7
2.0
0.7
2.0
s
° C
0.8
95
0.9
90
1.0
100
1.0
90
1.1
90
1.1
95
1.2
100
Constant
No.
-
Name
Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection
E5-01 Motor capacity selection
C6-01 CT/VT selection
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
(when VT is selected)
*1 *2 *3
Unit kW
-
-
-
-
Factory setting
55.00
0E
2
*6
75.00
0F
000E 000F
1
1
1
*6
-
E2-10
L2-02
Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)
*3
E2-01 Motor rated current
E2-02 Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Momentary power loss ridethru time
-
A
Hz
A
Ω
s
3
*5
190.0
1.43
45.6
260.0
1.39
72.0
0.022
0.023
960
0.7
3
*5
1200
0.7
L2-03 Min. baseblock time s 1.2
1.3
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level ° C 105 110
* 1. The setting of C6-02 determines the carrier frequencies as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz, 6: 12.0 kHz
* 2. The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. The factory settings of open-loop vector control for PM are given.
For flux vector control for PM, the setting would be 1 (2 kHZ).
* 3. The factory settings and upper limits vary in accordance with the CT/VT selection (C6-01). If C6-01=0 (CT), both factory settings and upper limits are
1 (2 kHz).
* 4. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 6 (12.0 kHz).]
* 5. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 4 (8.0 kHz).]
* 6. For a 200 V Class Inverter of 30 kW or more, reduce the Inverter rated current if carrier frequency must be set to a larger value than the factory setting.
5-
71
5
-72
400 V Class
Constant
No.
-
Name
Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection
E5-01 Motor capacity selection
C6-01 CT/VT selection
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
(when VT is selected) *1 *2 *3
-
Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)
*3
E2-01 Motor rated current
E2-02 Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Constant
No.
-
Name
Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection
E5-01 Motor capacity selection
C6-01 CT/VT selection
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
(when VT is selected)
*1 *2 *3
-
Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)
*3
E2-01 Motor rated current
E2-02 Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Unit kW
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
Hz
A
Ω
-
A
Hz
A
Ω
s s
° C
Unit kW
-
-
-
s s
° C
Factory setting
0.40
0.75
1.50
2.20
3.70
5.50
7.50
20 21 22 23 24 26 27
0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0026 0027
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
1.00
2.90
0.60
1.60
2.60
0.80
3.10
2.50
1.40
4.20
3.00
1.50
7.00
2.70
2.30
9.80
1.50
2.60
13.30
1.30
4.00
38.198 22.459 10.100
6.495
3.333
1.595
1.152
14 26 53 77 130 193 263
0.1
0.1
95
0.1
0.2
95
0.2
0.3
95
0.3
0.4
90
0.5
0.5
95
0.8
0.6
95
0.8
0.7
90
Factory setting
11.00
15.00
18.50
22.00
30.00
37.00
45.00
28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E
0028 0029 002A 002B 002C 002D 002E
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
*9
2
*9
2
*9
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
4
*6
19.9
1.70
5.6
26.5
1.60
7.6
32.9
1.67
7.8
38.6
1.70
9.2
52.3
1.80
10.9
65.6
1.33
19.1
79.7
1.60
22.0
0.922
0.550
0.403
0.316
0.269
0.155
0.122
385 440 508 586 750 925 1125
1.0
0.8
95
2.0
0.9
95
2.0
1.0
98
0.7
1.0
78
2.0
1.1
85
0.7
1.1
85
2.0
1.2
90
User Constant Tables
Constant
No.
-
Name
Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection
E5-01 Motor capacity selection
C6-01 CT/VT selection
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
(when VT is selected) *1 *2 *3
-
Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)
*3
E2-01 Motor rated current
E2-02 Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Unit kW
-
-
-
-
-
A
Hz
A
Ω
s s
° C
Factory setting
55.00
75.00
90.00 110.00 132.00 160.00
2F 30 31 32 33 34
002F 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034
1 1 1 1 1 1
2
*9
2
*9
2
*9
2
*9
1
*9
1
*9
4
*6
0.7
1.2
90
3
*7
0.7
1.3
98
3
*7
2.0
1.5
108
3
*7
2.0
1.7
100
3
*7
2.0
1.7
110
3
*7
95.0
130.0
156.0
190.0
223.0
270.0
1.46
24.0
1.39
36.0
1.40
40.0
1.40
49.0
1.38
58.0
1.35
70.0
0.088
0.092
0.056
0.046
0.035
0.029
1260 1600 1760 2150 2350 2850
2.0
1.8
108
5-
73
5
-74
Constant
No.
Name Unit Factory setting
Inverter capacity o2-04 kVA selection
E5-01 Motor capacity selection kW
-
-
185.00 220.00 300.00
35
*5
36
*5
37
*5
0034 0035 0037
C6-01 CT/VT selection 1 1
*4
1
*4
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
(when VT is selected)
*1 *2 *3
-
Carrier frequency selection upper limit (when VT is selected)
*3
E2-01 Motor rated current
-
-
A
1
1
*8
1
1 2
1
*10
310.0
370.0
500.0
E2-02 Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
Hz
A
Ω
1.30
81.0
1.30
96.0
1.25
130.0
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
-
0.025
3200
0.020
3700
0.014
4700
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time s 2.0
2.0
2.0
s 1.9
2.0
2.1
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level ° C 95 100 108
* 1. The setting of C6-02 determines the carrier frequencies as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz, 6: 12.0 kHz.
* 2. The factory settings vary in accordance with the control method. The factory settings of open-loop vector control for PM are given.
For flux vector control for PM, the setting would be 1 (2 kHZ).
* 3. The factory settings and upper limits vary in accordance with the CT/VT selection (C6-01). If C6-01=0 (CT), both factory settings and upper limits are
1 (2 kHz).
* 4. For 220 and 300 kW Inverters, C6-01 is fixed value 1 (VT).
* 5. In open-loop vector control for PM, capacity selection cannot be performed.
* 6. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 6 (12.0 kHz).]
* 7. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 4 (8.0 kHz).]
* 8. The upper limit for open-loop vector control for PM is given.[For flux vector control for PM, the upper limit would be 2 (4.0 kHz).]
* 9. For a 400 V Class Inverter of 30 kW or more, reduce the Inverter rated current if carrier frequency must be set to a larger value than the factory setting
* 10. In software PRG 1040, the setting is fixed to 1 (2 kHz). In software PRG 1041 or later, settings 1 (2 kHz) and 2 (4 kHz) are selectable.
User Constant Tables
Factory Settings that Change with Inverter Capacity Selection (o2-04) and
Motor Capacity Selection (E5-01)
200 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1750 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 000 001 002 003 004
E1-04
E1-06
Max. speed
Base speed min
-1 min
-1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1750
1750
175
190.0
1.65
6
8.233
54.84
64.10
233.0
1750
1750
175
190.0
2.97
6
2.284
23.02
29.89
229.5
1750
1750
175
190.0
5.50
6
1.501
17.08
21.39
250.9
1750
1750
175
190.0
8.10
6
0.827
8.61
13.50
247.9
1750
1750
175
190.0
13.40
6
0.455
7.20
10.02
248.6
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01 Motor capacity selection
Unit kW
-
E1-04
E1-06
Max. speed
Base speed min
-1 min
-1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
11.00
007
1750
1750
175
190.0
39.7
6
0.094
3.40
3.91
249.3
15.00
008
1750
1750
175
190.0
53.2
6
0.066
2.65
3.11
266.6
175
190.0
65.5
6
0.052
2.17
2.55
265.1
18.50
009
1750
Factory setting
22.00
00A
1750
30.00
00B
1750
1750 1750 1750
175
190.0
77.4
6
0.037
1.71
2.06
262.9
175
190.0
100.2
6
0.030
1.34
1.78
291.2
45.00
00D
1750
1750
175
190.0
155.9
6
0.014
0.83
1.05
271.6
37.00
00C
1750
1750
175
190.0
126.4
6
0.020
0.99
1.28
275.2
5.50
005
1750
1750
175
190.0
19.80
6
0.246
4.86
7.43
249.6
7.50
006
1750
1750
175
190.0
27.00
6
0.198
4.15
5.91
269.0
5-
75
5
-76
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min
-1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min -1
V
A
E5-04 Number of motor poles
E5-05
E5-07
Motor armature resistance
E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
Motor q axis inductance pole
Ω mH mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Factory setting
55.00
00E
1750
75.00
00F
1750
1750
175
190.0
186.2
6
0.012
0.81
1.22
299.6
1750
175
190.0
259.8
6
0.006
0.44
0.56
259.6
User Constant Tables
400 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1750 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 020 021 022 023 024
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1750
1750
175
1750
1750
175
380.0
0.83
6
32.932
380.0
1.49
6
9.136
219.36
92.08
256.40
119.56
466.0
459.0
1750
1750
175
380.0
2.75
6
6.004
68.32
85.56
501.8
1750
1750
175
380.0
4.05
6
3.297
40.39
48.82
485.7
1750
1750
175
380.0
6.80
6
1.798
32.93
37.70
498.7
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
11.00
028
1750
1750
175
380.0
19.9
6
0.368
13.38
16.99
508.7
55.00
02F
1750
1750
175
380.0
89.0
6
0.049
3.16
3.88
649.8
75.00
030
1750
1750
175
380.0
121.5
6
0.029
2.12
2.61
619.3
15.00
029
1750
1750
175
380.0
26.4
6
0.263
10.51
12.77
531.9
175
380.0
32.1
6
0.202
8.56
11.22
536.4
18.50
02A
1750
1750
Factory setting
22.00
02B
1750
1750
30.00
02C
1750
1750
175
380.0
38.7
6
0.148
6.84
8.24
525.8
175
380.0
49.9
6
0.235
5.40
7.26
585.1
175
380.0
152.0
6
0.019
1.52
2.53
543.0
Factory setting
90.00
110.00
132.00
160.00
031 032 033 034
1750 1750 1750 1750
1750 1750 1750 1750
175
380.0
181.0
6
0.016
1.46
2.27
589.9
175
380.0
219.0
6
0.011
1.12
1.74
567.4
175
380.0
255.0
6
0.008
0.95
1.48
627.7
5.50
026
1750
1750
175
380.0
9.90
6
0.982
22.70
26.80
498.0
37.00
02D
1750
1750
175
380.0
63.2
6
0.076
3.96
5.12
555.2
45.00
02E
1750
1750
175
380.0
74.4
6
0.054
3.36
3.94
581.4
7.50
027
1750
1750
175
380.0
13.10
6
0.786
16.49
23.46
541.7
5-
77
5
-78
200 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1450 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 100 101 102 103 104
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1450
1450
145
190.0
1.78
6
4.405
26.62
41.70
262.6
1450
1450
145
190.0
3.12
6
2.425
19.14
29.98
276.3
1450
1450
145
190.0
5.88
6
1.647
14.53
19.98
291.0
1450
1450
145
190.0
8.00
6
0.665
12.27
14.77
299.1
1450
1450
145
190.0
14.10
6
0.462
7.10
10.14
294.3
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name Unit
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01 Motor capacity selection kW
-
E1-04
E1-06
Max. speed
Base speed min
-1 min
-1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Factory setting
55.00
10E
1450
1450
145
190.0
172.7
6
0.016
0.83
1.30
362.8
11.00
107
1450
1450
145
190.0
38.0
6
0.099
4.07
5.25
316.6
15.00
108
1450
1450
145
190.0
53.3
6
0.075
3.29
4.57
332.2
145
190.0
63.0
6
0.057
2.53
3.01
313.4
Factory setting
18.50
109
1450
1450
22.00
10A
1450
1450
30.00
10B
1450
1450
145
190.0
75.0
6
0.041
2.02
2.70
326.1
145
190.0
100.8
6
0.034
1.75
2.17
369.0
45.00
10D
1450
1450
145
190.0
148.6
6
0.021
0.99
1.54
331.7
37.00
10C
1450
1450
145
190.0
124.4
6
0.028
1.18
1.84
323.1
5.50
105
1450
1450
145
190.0
20.00
6
0.341
5.90
8.42
306.6
7.50
106
1450
1450
145
190.0
26.60
6
0.184
6.91
8.37
325.1
User Constant Tables
400 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1450 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 120 121 122 123 124
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1450
1450
145
1450
1450
145
380.0
0.89
6
17.620
380.0
1.50
6
7.421
106.50
85.11
166.80
113.19
525.2
566.9
1450
1450
145
380.0
2.70
6
4.825
58.87
80.59
592.2
1450
1450
145
380.0
4.10
6
2.656
46.42
60.32
579.4
1450
1450
145
380.0
6.70
6
1.353
31.73
40.45
586.4
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
11.00
128
1450
1450
145
380.0
18.7
6
0.396
15.22
19.63
643.5
55.00
12F
1450
1450
145
380.0
89.8
6
0.048
3.39
4.66
716.5
15.00
129
1450
1450
145
380.0
26.3
6
0.295
12.65
15.87
650.6
145
380.0
31.6
6
0.223
9.87
12.40
635.8
18.50
12A
1450
1450
Factory setting
22.00
12B
1450
1450
30.00
12C
1450
1450
145
380.0
36.1
6
0.165
7.92
10.38
728.2
145
380.0
49.8
6
0.136
7.11
9.03
735.6
145
380.0
127.0
6
0.027
2.19
3.64
651.6
75.00
130
1450
1450
Factory setting
90.00
131
1450
1450
110.00
132
1450
1450
132.00
133
1450
1450
145
380.0
148.0
6
0.023
2.11
3.27
707.7
145
380.0
181.0
6
0.018
1.76
2.72
709.1
145
380.0
214.0
6
0.010
1.20
1.88
706.2
37.00
12D
1450
1450
145
380.0
60.7
6
0.093
5.93
6.79
770.0
5.50
126
1450
1450
145
380.0
9.80
6
0.999
26.20
30.94
612.1
45.00
12E
1450
1450
145
380.0
73.3
6
0.059
4.06
5.22
727.5
7.50
127
1450
1450
145
380.0
13.30
6
0.713
27.06
33.45
640.4
5-
79
5
-80
200 V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1150 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 200 201 202 203 204
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1150
1150
115
190.0
1.74
6
6.763
42.88
67.17
333.3
1150
1150
115
190.0
3.17
6
3.660
28.59
44.78
337.7
1150
1150
115
190.0
5.90
6
1.480
17.64
24.23
365.5
1150
1150
115
190.0
8.84
6
0.696
10.40
14.85
356.2
1150
1150
115
190.0
13.70
6
0.412
7.94
11.86
359.2
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
15.00
208
1150
1150
115
190.0
53.4
6
0.084
3.83
4.65
387.6
11.00
207
1150
1150
115
190.0
38.6
6
0.149
4.49
6.82
389.8
115
190.0
63.8
6
0.083
2.78
4.39
392.6
Factory setting
18.50
209
1150
1150
22.00
20A
1150
1150
30.00
20B
1150
1150
115
190.0
74.1
6
0.048
2.38
3.15
453.2
115
190.0
100.6
6
0.046
1.91
2.98
411.2
45.00
20D
1150
1150
115
190.0
148.9
6
0.021
1.09
1.70
414.7
37.00
20C
1150
1150
115
190.0
124.7
6
0.032
1.47
2.30
405.5
5.50
205
1150
1150
115
190.0
18.60
6
0.414
10.60
14.92
428.2
7.50
206
1150
1150
115
190.0
25.80
6
0.262
7.53
10.97
410.0
User Constant Tables
400V Class Standard Motor for Open-loop Vector Control (1150 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 220 221 222 223 224
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1150
1150
115
1150
1150
115
380.0
0.87
380.0
1.59
6 6
27.050
14.640
171.50
114.40
268.70
179.10
666.9
675.5
1150
1150
115
380.0
2.95
6
5.921
70.56
96.90
731.0
1150
1150
115
380.0
4.42
6
2.783
41.61
59.41
712.4
1150
1150
115
380.0
6.80
6
1.480
38.39
47.65
792.7
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
11.00
228
1150
1150
115
380.0
19.1
6
0.443
18.84
24.68
805.4
55.00
22F
1150
1150
115
380.0
90.6
6
0.049
3.89
6.46
868.5
15.00
229
1150
1150
115
380.0
26.7
6
0.334
15.27
18.56
796.4
115
380.0
127.0
6
0.032
2.87
4.45
825.5
Factory setting
75.00
230
1150
1150
90.00
231
1150
1150
110.00
232
1150
1150
115
380.0
151.0
6
0.026
2.53
3.92
850.8
115
380.0
181.0
6
0.015
1.79
2.80
863.3
115
380.0
31.9
6
0.332
11.10
17.56
785.1
18.50
22A
1150
1150
Factory setting
22.00
22B
1150
1150
30.00
22C
1150
1150
115
380.0
37.0
6
0.261
9.41
14.89
811.4
115
380.0
49.4
6
0.134
8.04
9.63
897.6
45.00
22E
1150
1150
115
380.0
74.4
6
0.086
4.36
6.80
829.6
37.00
22D
1150
1150
115
380.0
62.3
6
0.129
5.89
9.18
811.0
5.50
226
1150
1150
115
380.0
9.70
6
1.220
45.97
56.26
859.9
7.50
227
1150
1150
115
380.0
12.60
6
0.655
25.46
33.63
820.2
5-
81
5
-82
200 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1750 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 000 001 002 003 004
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1750
1750
30
190.0
1.60
6
2.236
16.75
27.63
211.0
1750
1750
30
190.0
3.20
6
1.146
10.30
16.68
208.0
1750
1750
30
190.0
6.00
6
0.774
6.13
10.05
226.0
1750
1750
30
190.0
8.20
6
0.475
6.63
10.35
235.5
1750
1750
30
190.0
13.40
6
0.237
4.45
6.90
245.0
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
30
190.0
186.0
6
0.009
0.51
0.79
267.0
Factory setting
55.00
00E
1750
1750
75.00
00F
1750
1750
30
190.0
252.0
6
0.006
0.37
0.57
267.0
7.50
006
1750
1750
30
190.0
25.00
6
0.161
3.30
4.93
241.5
5.50
005
1750
1750
30
190.0
18.80
6
0.268
4.98
7.30
251.0
11.00
007
1750
1750
15.00
008
1750
1750
1750
1750
Factory setting
18.50
009
22.00
00A
1750
1750
30.00
00B
1750
1750
37.00
00C
1750
1750
45.00
00D
1750
1750
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
38.0 52.0 64.0 74.0 99.0 126.0 149.0
6
0.110
6
0.071
6
0.049
6
0.040
6
0.030
6
0.019
6
0.013
3.40
4.78
262.5
2.41
3.45
257.5
1.86
2.70
251.0
1.66
2.41
262.5
1.15
1.64
285.0
0.81
1.17
277.0
0.68
1.03
275.0
User Constant Tables
400V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1750 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 020 021 022 023 024
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1750
1750
30
1750
1750
30
380.0
0.80
6
8.945
380.0
1.60
6
4.584
67.00
41.20
110.50
66.70
422.0
416.0
1750
1750
30
380.0
3.00
6
3.095
24.50
40.20
452.0
1750
1750
30
380.0
4.10
6
1.901
26.50
41.40
471.0
1750
1750
30
380.0
6.70
6
0.949
17.80
27.60
490.0
5.50
026
1750
1750
30
380.0
9.40
6
1.070
19.90
29.20
502.0
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min
-1 min
-1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor current min -1
V000000
A
E5-04 Number of motor poles
E5-05
E5-07
Motor armature resistance
E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
Motor q axis inductance pole
Ω mH mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
11.00
028
1750
1750
15.00
029
1750
1750
18.50
02A
1750
1750
Factory setting
22.00
02B
1750
1750
30.00
02C
1750
1750
37.00
02D
1750
1750
45.00
02E
1750
1750
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
19.0 26.0 32.0 37.0 49.5 63.0 74.5
6
0.438
6
0.283
6
0.194
6
0.161
6
0.118
6
0.077
6
0.052
13.60
19.10
525.0
9.63
13.80
515.0
7.43
10.80
502.0
6.65
9.65
525.0
4.58
6.54
570.0
3.22
4.68
554.0
2.70
4.10
550.0
55.00
02F
1750
1750
75.00
030
1750
1750
90.00
110.00
132.00
160.00
200.00
031
1750
1750
Factory setting
032
1750
1750
033
1750
1750
034
1750
1750
035
1750
1750
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
93.0 126.0 145.0 180.0 220.0 260.0 340.0
6
0.036
6
0.023
6
0.019
6
0.016
6
0.011
6
0.008
6
0.004
2.04
3.14
534.0
1.46
2.27
534.0
1.46
2.38
545.0
1.40
2.05
614.0
1.08
1.59
563.0
0.88
1.42
613.0
0.62
1.00
588.0
7.50
027
1750
1750
30
380.0
12.50
6
0.645
13.20
19.70
483.0
5-
83
5
-84
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min
-1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min -1
V
A
E5-04 Number of motor poles
E5-05
E5-07
Motor armature resistance
E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
Motor q axis inductance pole
Ω mH mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Factory setting
250.00
300.00
036 037
1750 1750
1750
30
380.0
420.0
6
0.004
0.68
0.79
607.0
1750
30
380.0
500.0
6
0.002
0.41
0.57
505.0
User Constant Tables
200 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1450 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 100 101 102 103 104
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1450
1450
30
190.0
1.50
6
3.160
23.68
33.75
258.0
1450
1450
30
190.0
3.00
6
1.834
17.13
26.75
268.0
1450
1450
30
190.0
5.40
6
0.686
9.10
14.48
282.5
1450
1450
30
190.0
8.00
6
0.305
5.65
8.90
271.5
1450
1450
30
190.0
13.80
6
0.378
6.90
10.20
302.0
5.50
105
1450
1450
30
190.0
19.40
6
0.278
5.93
9.05
322.0
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Factory setting
55.00
10E
1450
1450
75.00
10F
1450
1450
30 30
190.0
190.0
184.0 240.0
6
0.012
6
0.007
0.72
1.09
374.5
0.53
0.86
327.0
11.00
107
1450
1450
15.00
108
1450
1450
18.50
109
1450
1450
Factory setting
22.00
10A
1450
1450
30.00
10B
1450
1450
37.00
10C
1450
1450
45.00
10D
1450
1450
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
39.0 53.0 66.0 73.0 101.0 127.0 151.0
6
0.057
6
0.073
6
0.055
6
0.047
6
0.033
6
0.023
6
0.018
3.35
4.90
303.5
2.80
3.95
310.5
2.23
3.15
303.5
1.79
2.55
369.5
1.43
1.96
369.5
1.20
1.70
367.0
0.84
1.25
344.0
7.50
106
1450
1450
30
190.0
26.00
6
0.176
5.53
8.10
334.0
5-
85
5
-86
400 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1450 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 120 121 122 123 124
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1450
1450
30
1450
1450
30
380.0
0.75
6
12.640
380.0
1.50
6
7.336
94.70
68.50
135.00
107.00
516.0
536.0
1450
1450
30
380.0
2.70
6
2.745
36.40
57.90
565.0
1450
1450
30
380.0
4.00
6
1.220
22.60
35.60
543.0
1450
1450
30
380.0
6.90
6
1.511
27.60
40.80
604.0
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
55.00
12F
1450
1450
75.00
130
1450
1450
90.00
110.00
132.00
160.00
200.00
131 132 133 134 135
1450
1450
Factory setting
1450
1450
1450
1450
1450
1450
1450
1450
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
92.0 120.0 145.0 184.0 215.0 255.0 340.00
6
0.047
6
0.028
6
0.024
6
0.015
6
0.011
6
0.007
6
0.006
2.86
4.36
749.0
2.11
3.43
654.0
2.02
2.89
738.0
1.36
2.08
664.0
1.11
1.84
705.0
0.85
1.51
686.0
0.94
1.14
708.0
7.50
127
1450
1450
30
380.0
13.00
6
0.704
22.10
32.40
668.0
5.50
126
1450
1450
30
380.0
9.70
6
1.113
23.70
36.20
644.0
11.00
128
1450
1450
15.00
129
1450
1450
1450
1450
Factory setting
18.50
12A
22.00
12B
1450
1450
30.00
12C
1450
1450
37.00
12D
1450
1450
45.00
12E
1450
1450
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
19.5 26.5 33.0 36.5 50.5 63.5 75.5
6
0.228
6
0.292
6
0.220
6
0.188
6
0.133
6
0.091
6
0.072
13.40
19.60
607.0
11.20
15.80
621.0
8.90
12.60
607.0
7.15
10.20
739.0
5.70
7.83
739.0
4.78
6.78
734.0
3.37
5.00
688.0
Constant
No.
E5-02
E5-01
E1-04 Max. speed
Name
Motor rated capacity
Motor capacity selection
Unit kW
min -1
Factory setting
250.00
136
1450
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
1450
30
380.0
420.0
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH
6
0.003
E5-06 Motor d axis inductance 0.64
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH 0.87
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad 674.0
User Constant Tables
5-
87
5
-88
200 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1150 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 200 201 202 203 204
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1150
1150
30
190.0
1.50
6
2.708
25.25
41.50
327.5
1150
1150
30
190.0
2.80
6
1.511
16.15
26.00
328.5
1150
1150
30
190.0
5.60
6
1.084
14.33
21.68
353.5
1150
1150
30
190.0
8.40
6
0.540
10.00
15.68
362.5
1150
1150
30
190.0
13.40
6
0.358
7.48
11.45
362.5
Constant No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
30
190.0
179.0
6
0.013
0.94
1.51
436.0
Factory setting
55.00
20E
1150
1150
75.00
20F
1150
1150
30
190.0
250.0
6
0.008
0.69
1.02
430.5
7.50
206
1150
1150
30
190.0
26.00
6
0.162
5.45
8.58
386.0
5.50
205
1150
1150
30
190.0
19.20
6
0.299
9.15
13.50
430.0
11.00
207
1150
1150
15.00
208
1150
1150
1150
1150
Factory setting
18.50
209
22.00
20A
1150
1150
30.00
20B
1150
1150
37.00
20C
1150
1150
45.00
20D
1150
1150
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
190.0
40.0 54.0 63.0 75.0 100.0 126.0 150.0
6
0.129
6
0.081
6
0.065
6
0.052
6
0.036
6
0.026
6
0.019
4.20
6.33
379.0
3.35
4.90
372.5
2.58
3.73
443.0
2.23
3.28
461.5
1.87
2.73
458.5
1.50
2.17
458.5
1.18
1.80
481.5
User Constant Tables
400 V Class Standard Motor for Flux vector control (1150 min
-1
)
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
Unit kW 0.40
0.75
1.50
Factory setting
2.20
3.70
E5-01 Motor capacity selection 220 221 222 223 224
E1-04 Max. speed min -1
E1-06
E1-09
Base speed
Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor rated current min
-1 min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
1150
1150
30
1150
1150
30
380.0
0.75
6
10.830
380.0
1.40
6
6.044
101.00
64.60
166.00
104.00
655.0
657.0
1150
1150
30
380.0
2.80
6
4.336
57.32
86.70
707.0
1150
1150
30
380.0
4.20
6
2.161
40.00
62.72
725.0
1150
1150
30
380.0
6.70
6
1.431
29.90
45.80
725.0
5.50
226
1150
1150
30
380.0
9.60
6
1.197
36.60
54.00
860.0
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min -1 min -1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor current min
-1
V
A
E5-04
E5-05
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance pole
Ω mH E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
E5-07 Motor q axis inductance mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
Constant
No.
Name
E5-02 Motor rated capacity
E5-01
E1-04
E1-06
Motor capacity selection
Max. speed
Base speed
Unit kW
min
-1 min
-1
E1-09 Min. speed
E1-13 Base voltage
E5-03 Motor current min -1
V
A
E5-04 Number of motor poles
E5-05
E5-07
Motor armature resistance
E5-06 Motor d axis inductance
Motor q axis inductance pole
Ω mH mH
E5-09 Motor generation voltage constant mV ⋅ sec/rad
11.00
228
1150
1150
15.00
229
1150
1150
18.50
22A
1150
1150
Factory setting
22.00
22B
1150
1150
30.00
22C
1150
1150
37.00
22D
1150
1150
45.00
22E
1150
1150
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
20.0 27.0 31.5 37.5 50.0 63.0 75.0
6
0.517
6
0.325
6
0.261
6
0.207
6
0.142
6
0.104
6
0.074
16.80
25.30
758.0
13.40
19.60
745.0
10.30
14.90
886.0
8.90
13.10
923.0
7.49
10.90
917.0
5.99
8.67
917.0
4.73
7.18
963.0
55.00
22F
1150
1150
75.00
230
1150
1150
90.00
110.00
132.00
160.00
200.00
231
1150
1150
Factory setting
232
1150
1150
233
1150
1150
234
1150
1150
235
1150
1150
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
380.0
89.5 125.0 150.0 180.0 215.0 250.0 320.0
6
0.051
6
0.033
6
0.026
6
0.015
6
0.012
6
0.009
6
0.007
3.74
6.02
872.0
2.75
4.07
861.0
2.42
3.61
885.0
1.66
2.73
862.0
1.39
2.28
882.0
1.55
1.92
911.0
1.25
1.53
944.0
7.50
227
1150
1150
30
380.0
13.00
6
0.648
21.80
34.30
772.0
5-
89
Constant Settings by
Function
Application and Overload Selections ...........................6-2
Speed Reference .........................................................6-5
Run Command...........................................................6-14
Stopping Methods ......................................................6-16
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-20
Adjusting Speed References .....................................6-27
Speed Limit (Speed Reference Limit Function) .........6-33
Machine Protection ....................................................6-35
Continuing Operation.................................................6-51
Inverter Protection .....................................................6-61
Input Terminal Functions............................................6-63
Output Terminal Functions.........................................6-73
Monitor Constants......................................................6-76
Individual Functions ...................................................6-81
Digital Operator Functions ....................................... 6-119
Options ....................................................................6-129
Maintenance Timer Display Function
(SPEC: C or Later Only) ...........................................6-140
6
-2
Application and Overload Selections
Select the Overload to Suit the Application
Set C6-01 (CT: Low carrier constant torque, VT: High carrier variable torque) depending on the application for which the Inverter is used. The setting ranges for the Inverter carrier frequency, and overload tolerance depend on the setting in C6-01.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
C6-01
CT/VT selection
0: Low carrier, constant torque
(CT)
1: High carrier, variable torque
(VT)
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
Select carrier frequency.
*2
1: 2 kHz
2: 4 kHz
3: 6 kHz
4: 8 kHz
6: 12 kHz
0 or 1
*3
1 or 2
1 to 6
*4 *6
*7
1
*5
2
*1 *5
*8
No
No
No
No
Q
A
Q
A
223H
224H
4-5
4-28
6-2
4-27
6-2
* 1. The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed. (The factory settings for open-loop vector control for PM are given.)
* 2. Inverter rated current will be reduced if increasing the carrier frequency.
Be careful because the possibility of an inverter OL error increases as the carrier frequency is increased.
* 3. With 400 V Class Inverters of 220 kW or 300 kW, C6-01 cannot be set to 0 (CT).
* 4. The setting range vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 5. The factory settings vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 6. For open-loop vector control for PM, the setting range is 1 to 4.
* 7. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the setting of C6-01 (CT/VT selection). If C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), C6-02 can only be set to 1 (2 kHz).
* 8. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of C6-01 (CT/VT selection). If C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), the factory setting is 1 (2 kHz).
Difference Between CT and VT
The characteristics of CT (low carrier, constant torque) and VT (high carrier, variable torque) are shown below.
CT: Low Carrier, Constant Torque VT: High Carrier, Variable Torque
Constant Torque Variable Torque
Torque Torque
0 Motor speed
Motor speed
Constant torque means a constant load torque for all motor speed, and it requires overload resistance capability. Applications include pushers, conveyors, cranes, and other friction or heavy loads.
Variable torque means that the load torque will decrease as the speed decreases. Normally, overload resistance capability is not required. Applications include fans and pumps.
Low carrier: Electromagnetic noise is present.
High carrier: Electromagnetic noise is not present.
Application and Overload Selections
Setting Precautions
C6-01 (CT/VT Selection)
When setting C6-01, observe the following precautions.
• Depending on the set value in C6-01, the setting range of the related constants is limited as follows:
C6-01 Set Value
Inverter Overload Protection Level
C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection)
0 (Low Carrier, Constant
Torque)
150% Inverter rated current/1 min.
1: Carrier 2.0 kHz
1 (High Carrier, Variable
Torque)
120% Inverter rated current/1 min.
1: Carrier 2.0 kHz
*
2: Carrier 4.0 kHz
3: Carrier 6.0 kHz
4: Carrier 8.0 kHz
6: Carrier 12.0 kHz
* The factory setting vary in accordance with the control method and the Inverter capacity.
Carrier Frequency
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions items.
• When using a device with C6-01 set to 1 (VT), adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following values as guidelines.
Wiring Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency) setting
0 to 6 (12 kHz) 0 to 4 (8 kHz) 0 to 2 (4 kHz)
Note With open-loop vector control for PM (A1-02 = 7), the maximum length of the cable between the Inverter and the motor is 100 m, and the maximum carrier frequency is 4 kHz. If not, the performance of the motor might be abnormal.
•
•
If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
For applications with repetitive loads (cranes, elevators, presses, washing machines, etc.), if a current exceeding 125% of the Inverter rated current or more flows repeatedly, the IGBT in the Inverter will be subject to heat stress, resulting in a shortened life span. In this case, select CT instead of VT and reduce the load, lengthen the acceleration/deceleration time, or increase the frame size of the Inverter so that the peak current for repetitive operation will drop to less than 125% of the Inverter rated current. If performing a trial operation with repetitive loads, make sure that the peak current for repetitive operation is less than
125% of the Inverter rated current.
If particularly low noise is not required, do not increase the Inverter’s carrier frequency to reduce the influence of heat stress.
Carrier frequency upper limit depends on the Inverter capacity. Refer to Factory Settings that Change with the
Inverter Capacity (o2-04) on page 5-70.
6-
3
6
-4
Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Current Level
When C6-01 is set to 1, the Inverter overload level will be reduced. Even when the overload current falls to below 120% constant 1 min, OL2 (Inverter overload) will be detected. The Inverter overload current reduction level is shown below.
Overload current reduction level
400 V Class 160 kW
400 V Class 300 kW
100%
92%
88%
85%
67%
400 V Class 132 kW
200 V Class 22 kW or less
400 V Class 22 kW or less
200 V Class 30 kW
400 V Class 30 to 55 kW
200 V Class 37 to 75 kW,
400 V Class 75 to 110 kW
200 V Class 110 kW,
400 V Class 220 kW
400 V Class 185 kW
Carrier frequency
5 kHz
2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz
10 kHz
12 kHz
Fig 6.1 Overload Current Reduction Level for Flux Vector Control for PM
Overload current reduction level
100%
95%
400 V Class 75 to 110 kW
200 V Class
75 kW
200 V Class 37 to 55 kW
200 V Class 22 kW or less
400 V Class 22 kW or less
94%
86%
90%
92%
83%
200 V Class 30 kW
70%
400 V Class 30 to 55 kW
400 V Class
132 kW,160 kW
200 V Class 110 kW,
400 V Class 185 to 300 kW
Carrier frequency
2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz
Fig 6.2 Overload Current Reduction Level for Open-loop Vector Control for PM
Speed Reference
Speed Reference
This section explains how to input the speed reference.
Selecting the Speed Reference Source
Set constant b1-01 to select the speed reference source.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b1-01
H6-01
H6-02
Reference selection
Set the speed reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input
Pulse train input function selection
0: Speed reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Pulse train input scaling
Set the number of pulses in hertz, taking the reference to be 100%.
0 to 4
0 to 2
1000 to
32000
1
0
1440
Hz
No
No
Yes
Q
No
No
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
180H
42CH
42DH
Input the Speed Reference from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the speed reference from the Digital Operator.
Input the frequency reference from the Digital Operator's speed reference setting display.
For details on setting the speed reference, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes .
Fig 6.3 Speed Setting Display
6-
5
6
-6
Inputting the Speed Reference Using Control Circuit Terminal (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the speed reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input), control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input) or control circuit terminal A3 (voltage input).
Inputting Master Speed Reference Only (Voltage Input)
When inputting a voltage for the master speed reference, input the voltage to control circuit terminal A1.
2 k Ω
Inverter
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
A1 Master speed reference
(voltage input)
A2
A3
Master speed reference
(current input)
Not used
AC Analog common
Fig 6.4 Voltage Input for Master Speed Reference
Inputting Master Speed Reference Only (Current Input)
When inputting a current for the master speed reference, input the current to control circuit terminal A2, input
0 V to terminal A1, and make either of the following settings.
• Set H3-08 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2 (current input), and set H3-
09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 ( Add to terminal A1).
• Set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 2 (Auxiliary speed reference 1), and set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 switching) to 1 (Use terminal A2 analog input as the main speed reference).
Inverter
4 to 20-mA input
+V
A1
Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
Master speed reference
(voltage input)
A2 Master speed reference
(current input)
A3 Not used
AC Analog common
1
2
V I
DIP switch
S1
Fig 6.5 Current Input for Master Speed Reference
IMPORTANT
Turn ON pin 2 of DIP switch S1 (toward I), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a current to terminal A2.
Turn OFF pin 2 of DIP switch S1 (toward V), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a voltage to terminal
A2. Set H3-08 to the correct setting for the type of input signal being used.
Speed Reference
Switch between 2 Step Speeds: Master/Auxiliary Speeds
When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, input the master speed reference to control circuit terminal A1 and the auxiliary speed reference to control circuit terminal A2 or A3 . The master speed reference input to terminal A1 will be used for the Inverter speed reference when the master speed reference 1 allocated to multi-function input terminal (factory setting: S5) is OFF, and the auxiliary speed reference input to terminal A2 or A3 will be used for the Inverter speed reference when the multi-speed reference 1 allocated to multi-function input terminal is ON.
When using terminal A2 as the input terminal of auxiliary speed reference, set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 2 [Auxiliary speed reference (2nd speed analog)].
When using terminal A3 as the input terminal of auxiliary speed reference, set H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 function selection) to 2 [Auxiliary speed reference (2ndspeed analog)].
Inverter
1 to 20 mA input
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Auxiliary speed refrence)
A2 (A3) (Master speed
refrence)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.6 Switching between Master and Auxiliary Speeds
Precautions on Setting DIP Switches and Constants
• When inputting voltage signals to terminal A2, set the pin 2 of the current/voltage switching DIP switch
S1-2 to OFF side (factory setting: ON).
• When inputting current signals to terminal A2, set the pin 2 of the current/voltage switching DIP switch
S1-2 to ON side (factory setting: ON).
• When setting terminal A2 as the master speed input terminal and terminal A1 as the auxiliary speed input terminal, set the H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 2 and H3-05
(Multi-function analog input terminal A3 function selection) to a number other than 0 and
H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 function selection) to a number other than 0 and 2.
And then, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 switching) to 1.
• H3-09 and H3-05 cannot be set to 2 at the same time.
6-
7
6
-8
Setting Speed Reference Using Pulse Train Signals
When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP is used as the speed reference.
Set H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) to 0 (speed reference), and then set the 100% reference pulse frequency to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).
Inverter
Pulse Input Specifications
Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V
Heavy duty 30 to 70%
Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz
32 kHz max.
3.5 to 13.2 V
Pulse input
RP(Pulse train input terminal)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.7 Speed Reference Using Pulse Train Input
Speed Reference
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-F7 series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps, using 16 speed references, and one jog speed reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step references 1, 2 and jog speed selection functions.
Related Constants
To switch speed references, set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog speed reference selection in the multi-function contact inputs (any of the terminals S3 to S8). Setting examples are shown below. The unused terminals need not be set.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-06)
Terminal
S5
S6
S7
S8
Constant
Number
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06
Set Value
3
4
5
6
Details
Multi-step speed reference 1 [Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when multi-function analog input H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 2 (auxiliary speed reference).]
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog speed selection (given priority over multi-step speed reference)
Combination of Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs. In the Above
Setting Example
You can change the selected speed reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S5 to S8 (multi-function contact input terminals) to set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog speed selection. The following table shows the possible combinations.
Speed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TerminalS5
Multi-step
Speed Reference 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
TerminalS6
Multi-step
Speed Reference 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
TerminalS7
Multi-step
Speed Reference 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
TerminalS8
Jog Speed
Selection
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
9 ON
*
* Terminal S8's jog speed selection is given priority over multi-step speed references.
Selected Frequency
Speed reference 1 d1-01, master speed
Speed reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary speed
Speed reference 3 d1-03
Speed reference 4 d1-04
Speed reference 5 d1-05
Speed reference 6 d1-06
Speed reference 7 d1-07
Speed reference 8 d1-08
Jog speed d1-17
6-
9
6
-10
Setting Precautions
Refer to the following to set step 1 and step 2 to analog inputs.
• Step 1
When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1, set b1-01 to 1, and when setting d1-01 (Speed Reference
1) to step 1, set b1-01 to 0.
• Step 2
When setting terminal A2's (or A3's) analog input to step 2, set H3-09 (H3-05 when A3 is used) to 2 (auxiliary speed reference 1). When setting d1-02 (Speed Reference 2) to step 2, do not set H3-09
(H3-05 when A3 is used) to 2.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step operation.
Inverter
S1 Forward/stop
S2 Reverse/stop
S3 External fault
S4 Fault reset
S5 Multi-step speed reference 1
S6 Multi-step speed reference 2
S9 Multi-step speed reference 3
S7 Jog speed
SC Sequence common
+V Speed setting power (+15 V)
A1
A2
A3
Master speed referennce (0 to 10 V)
[Master speed (b1-01=1)]
Master speed referennce (4 to 20 mA)
[Auxiliary speed (H3-09=2)]
Multi-function analog input (0 to 10 V)
[Unused (H3-05=1F)]
AC Analog common 0 V
Fig 6.8 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation
Speed reference
Speed reference 3
Speed reference 2:
Auxiliary speed
Speed reference 1:
Master speed
Speed reference 8
Speed reference 7
Speed reference 6
Speed reference 5
Speed reference 4
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed reference 1
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog speed selection
Fig 6.9 Multi-step Speed Reference/Jog Speed Selection Time Chart
Jog speed
Speed Reference
6-
11
6
-12
Varispeed F7S Function Block
The following diagram shows the function block diagram of Varispeed F7S. The shaded sections apply only to
Inverters with SPEC: C or later.
speed command) of multi-function contact
Multi-function analog input is invalid.
When 2nd speed analog is selected Multi-function analog input is invalid.
When 3rd speed analog is selected Multi-function analog input is invalid.
H3-02 H3-03
Open Loop Vector for PM
Flux V tor for PM
Seq- uence test
Set- ting Value
Auxiliary frequency reference 1 (2nd step analog) Accel/decel change (reduction coef Overtorque/undertorque detection level Frequency reference lower limit level Torque refrence/torque limit at speed control
Speed Reference
Primary delay filter
Primary delay filter
* 2 is current input.
≠
Primary delay filter
* The same value can not be set in H3-05 and H3-09.
Fig 6.11 AI Input Detailed Diagram
≠
6-
13
6
-14
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the Run Command.
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set constant b1-02 to select the source for the Run Command.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name b1-02
Operation method selection
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Set the Run Command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 181H
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,
JOG, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes .
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control circuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop.
Inverter
Forward/stop
Reverse/stop
Sequence common
Fig 6.12 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example
Run Command
Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence
When any constant from H1-01 to H1-6 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S8) is set to 0, terminals
S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set functions as a Forward/Reverse Run Command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 (terminal S5) becomes the input terminal for the Forward/Reverse Run Command.
Stop switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run Command (operates when ON)
Stop Command (stopped when ON)
Forward/Reverse Command (multi-function input)
Sequence input common
Run Command
Stop Command
Forward/Reverse
Command
Fig 6.13 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF
OFF
(stopped)
OFF (forward) ON (reverse)
Motor speed
Stop Forward Reverse
Fig 6.14 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart
Stop Forward
INFO
1. Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the Run Command. This will make the
Run Command self-holding in the Inverter.
2. When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi-function input terminal constant is set. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
6-
15
6
-16
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent
There are three methods of stopping the Inverter when a Stop Command is sent:
• Deceleration to stop
•
•
DC braking stop
Coast to stop with timer
Set constant b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b1-03 b1-05 b2-01
Stopping method selection
Used to set the stopping method used when a Stop
Command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run Commands are disregarded during deceleration.)
Operation selection for setting E1-
09 or less
Used to set the method of operation when the speed reference input is less than the minimum speed (E1-09).
0: Run at speed reference
(E1-09 not effective).
1: STOP (Speeds below E1-
09 in the coast to stop state.)
2: Run at min. speed.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero-speed (Speeds below E1-09 are zero)
Zero-speed level (DC injection braking starting speed)
Sets the speed in units of 0.1% at which a baseblock will be applied if decelerating to stop.
0, 1, or
3
0 to 3
0.0 to
10.0
0
0
1.0%
*
No
No
No
Q
No
No
Q
A
A
Q
No
A
182H
184H
189H
* The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed. (The factory settings for open-loop vector control for PM are given.)
Stopping Methods
Deceleration to Stop
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration
Time 1))
If the motor speed when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the baseblock will be applied.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-20 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times .
Run Command
ON
Motor speed (Output frequency)
Decelerates to stop at deceleration time
OFF
DC injection brake
Fig 6.15 Deceleration to Stop
The following only applies to Inverters with SPEC: C or later.
The operation after starting or stopping depends on the setting of b1-05 when flux vector control for PM is selected (A1-02 = 6).
Run Command OFF ON OFF
Speed reference via analog input
0
B1-05=0
(Speed reference)
B1-05=1
(Coast)
Baseblock
B1-05=2
(Run on E1-09)
Baseblock
B1-05=3
(Zero-speed)
Baseblock
Baseblock
E1-09
Baseblock
Run Command turns OFF and baseblock starts when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Baseblock
Speed reference drops to less than E1-09 and baseblock starts when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Run Command turns OFF and baseblock starts when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Baseblock
Run Command turns OFF and baseblock starts when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Baseblock
Fig 6.16 Deceleration to Stop (for Flux Vector Control for PM)
6-
17
6
-18
Coast to Stop
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage to the machine and inertia including the load.
Run Command
ON OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted.
Fig 6.17 Coast to Stop
After the Stop Command is input, Run Commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has elapsed.
INFO
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the Stop Command is input, Run Commands are ignored until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the Stop Command is input and the deceleration time.
Run Command
ON
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Operation wait time T
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Operation wait time T Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
Minimum speed
Fig 6.18 Coast to Stop with Timer
Motor speed
(Output frequency) at
Stop Command input
100% (Maximum speed)
Stopping Methods
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1 ) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to a stop at the deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1 ) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1 ) to 17.
After the emergency Stop Command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the Run Command and emergency Stop Command.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
C1-09
Emergency stop time
The deceleration time when the multi-function input
“Emergency (fast) stop” is set to ON.
This function can be used as a stopping method when a fault has been detected.
0.0 to
6000.0
*1
10.0 s No A A A 208H
4-28
6-19
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
6-
19
6
-20
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the motor speed (output frequency) to climb from 0% to 100% of maximum speed. Deceleration time indicates the time taken for the motor speed (output frequency) to reduce from 100% to 0% of maximum speed. The factory setting of the acceleration time is C1-01, and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1-02.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
Name
Acceleration time
1
Deceleration time
1
Acceleration time
2
Deceleration time
2
Acceleration time
3
Deceleration time
3
Acceleration time
4
Deceleration time
4
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum speed, in 1second units.
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum speed to 0, in
1-second units.
The acceleration time when the multifunction input “accel/decel time 1” is set to ON.
The deceleration time when the multifunction input “accel/decel time 1” is set to ON.
0.0 to
6000.
0
*1
10.0 s
The acceleration time when the multifunction input “accel/decel time 2” is set to ON.
The deceleration time when the multifunction input “accel/decel time 2” is set to ON.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
200H
201H
202H
203H
204H
205H
The acceleration time when the multifunction input “accel/decel time 1” and “accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.
The deceleration time when the multifunction input “accel/decel time 1” and “accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
206H
207H
C1-10
Accel/ decel time setting unit
C1-11
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
Accel/ decel time switching speed
Sets the speed for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
Below set speed: Accel/decel time 4
Above set speed: Accel/decel time 1
The multi-function input “accel/decel time 1” or “accel/decel time 2” take priority.
0 or 1
0.0 to
100.0
*3
1
0.0%
*2
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
209H
20AH
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
All sections of the S-curve characteristic time are set in seconds units.
When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
Run Command
Speed
C2 01
O N
C2 02
O FF
C2 03
C2 0 4
Ti me
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s
0.00 s
0.00 s
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
20BH
20CH
20DH
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s No A A A 20EH
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depend on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/ deceleration times become 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
* 2. The display unit varies in accordance with the control method. (The unit for open-loop/flux vector control for PM is given. For sequence test, Hz would be displayed.)
* 3. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. (The unit for open-loop/flux vector control for PM is given. For sequence test, the setting range would be 0.0 to 400.0.)
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. Constant C1-10 is set to 1 at the factory.
Set value
0
1
Details
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 6000.0 in units of 0.1 s.
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
Using the Inverter, you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times. When the multi-function input terminals (H1 ) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/deceleration time selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combining the ON/OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection 1 Terminal
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection 2 Terminal
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Acceleration Time
C1-01
C1-03
C1-05
C1-07
Deceleration Time
C1-02
C1-04
C1-06
C1-08
6-
21
6
-22
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the set speed.
When the motor speed (output frequency) reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0%. If C1-11 is set to 0.0%, the function will be disabled.
Motor speed
(Output frequency)
Acceleration/ deceleration time switching speed
(C1-11)
C1-07 rate C1-01 rate C1-02 rate C1-08 rate
When motor speed (output frequency) ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When motor speed (output frequency) < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).
Fig 6.19 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Speed
Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/deceleration time gain), you can adjust the acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's or A3's input voltage.
The Inverter's acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C1-01 is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain
Acceleration/deceleration time gain (set value: 5)
(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to
10 V) = 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)
Fig 6.20 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and stopping the machine.
Using the Inverter, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: Acceleration start time, deceleration start time, acceleration end time, and deceleration end time.
INFO
Set the S-curve characteristic time to lengthen acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (Deceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Deceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
C2-02 C2-03 C2-04
Motor speed
(Output frequency)
C2-01
C2-01
C2-02
Fig 6.21 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
C2-03
C2-04
6-
23
6
-24
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)
The dwell function stores the speed when starting or stopping heavy loads. By temporarily storing the speed, you can prevent the motor from stalling. When using the dwell function, you must select a deceleration stop.
Set b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) to 0.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b6-01
Dwell speed at start
0.0 to
100.0
0.0% No b6-02
Dwell time at start
Run Command
Speed
O N
O FF
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s No b6-03
Dwell speed at stop b6-04
Dwell time at stop b6 01 b6 03 Ti me b6 02 b6 0 4
The dwell function is used to keep the speed temporarily when driving a motor with a heavy load.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0% No
0.0 to
100.0
0.0 s No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1B6H
1B7H
1B8H
1B9H
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Preventing Overvoltage During Run
The overvoltage inhibit function automatically reduces the regenerative torque limit to suppress the voltage rise of the DC bus, if the voltage rises while the motor is running. While the motor is decelerating, the deceleration time will be automatically set to a longer time, and then the actual deceleration time may be longer than the set value.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
E1-01
L3-11
Input voltage setting
Overvoltage inhibit selection
Set the Inverter input voltage in the unit of 1 V.
This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.
Sets the function to inhibit overvoltage in the Inverter DC bus.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Reduces the regenerative torque limit automatically, depending on the DC bus voltage, to prevent the overvoltage
(OV).
Deceleration time might be longer than the setting due to auto-adjustment of the decelerating rate.
If decelerating with a braking unit or braking resister, set L3-11 to 0
(Disabled). If this is not done, deceleration cannot be achieved in the desired deceleration time.
155 to
255
*2
200 V
*1 *2
0 or 1 1
No
No
Q
No
Q
A
Q
A
300H
4C7H
* 1. In open-loop/flux vector control for PM, this constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
* 2. For 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverters are twice as large.
6-
25
6
-26
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-11 is set to 1 is shown.
Overvoltage inhibit level
DC bus voltage
Deceleration time controlled to prevent overvoltage
Motor speed
During run
RUN command ON
RUN ON
STOP OFF
STOP
Deceleration time
(set value)
RUN
OFF
RUN blinking
STOP ON
Fig 6.22 Overvoltage Inhibit Operation
RUN OFF
STOP ON
Setting Precautions
•
•
If using a braking option, such as the braking resister, braking resister units, or braking units, set L3-11 to
0. If L3-11 is not set to 0, the motor may not stop within the preset allowable deceleration time.
The overvoltage inhibit function automatically adjusts the deceleration rate based on the set value of E1-01
(Input voltage setting). So, make sure that E1-01 is correctly set in accordance with the supply voltage. If not, the motor may not stop, depending on the conditions of the supply voltage.
Adjusting Speed References
Adjusting Speed References
This section explains methods of adjusting speed references.
Adjusting Analog Speed References
Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
H3-01
Signal level selection
(terminal
A1)
0: 0 to 10 V
1: − 10 to 10 V
H3-09
Multi-function analog input
(terminal
A2) function selection
Sets the speed when 10 V is input, as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Sets the speed when 0 V is input, as a percentage of the maximum speed.
H3-04
H3-05
Signal level selection
(terminal
A3)
Multi-function analog input (terminal A3) function selection
0: 0 to 10 V
1: − 10 to 10 V
Select from the functions listed in the following table.
Refer to the next page.
H3-08
Signal level selection
(terminal
A2)
Sets the input gain (level) when 10V is input.
Set according to the 100% value selected from H3-05.
Sets the input gain (level) when 0V is input.
Set according to the 100% value selected from H3-05.
0: 0 to +10V, with lower limit
1: − 10 to +10 V, lower limit
2: 4 to 20 mA.
without
Switch current and voltage input using the switch on the control panel.
Select multi-function analog input function for terminal
A2. Refer to the next table.
-
0 or 1
100.0 to
+100.0
0
0.0 to
1000.0 100.0%
-100.0
to
+100.0
0 or 1
0 to 1F
0.0%
0
1F
0.0 to
1000.0 100.0%
0 to 2
0 to 1F
0.0%
2
0
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
410H
411H
412H
413H
414H
415H
416H
417H
418H
6-
27
6
-28
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
Gain
(terminal
A2)
Bias
(terminal
A2)
Sets the input gain (level) when 10 V (20 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value for the function set for
H3-09.
Sets the input gain (level) when 0 V (4 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value for the function set for
H3-09.
Analog input filter time constant
Sets primary delay filter time constant in seconds for the analog input terminal.
Effective for noise control etc.
0.0 to
1000.0 100.0%
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.00 to
2.00
0.0%
0.03 s
Yes
Yes
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
419H
41AH
41BH
Adjusting Analog Speed Reference Using Constants
The speed reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using speed reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using constants H3-02 and H3-
03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a speed reference terminal, perform adjustments using
H3-10 and H3-11.
Adjustment can be made using H3-06 and H3-07 when multi-function analog input terminal A3 is used as a speed reference terminal.
Speed reference Speed reference
(H3-06)
(H3-07) input voltage
Terminal A1, A3 input
Note: ( ) is for when terminal A3 is used.
Fig 6.23 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
Terminal A2 input
Terminal A2 input voltage (current)
Adjusting Speed References
Adjusting Speed Gain Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 1 (speed gain), you can adjust the speed gain using the analog input terminal
Speed gain
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.24 Speed Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
The speed gain for terminal A1 is the product of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02 is set to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 speed reference will be 50%.
Speed reference
100%
50%
0
H3-02
H3-02 0.5
10 V
Terminal A1 input voltage
Adjusting Speed Bias Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the speed equivalent to the terminal A2 or A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Speed bias terminal A2 or A3 input
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input level
Fig 6.25 Speed Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 or A3 or A3 Input)
6-
29
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the speed reference from terminal
A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.
Speed reference
H3-02
6
-30
Terminal A1 input voltage
0 V 10 V
When constant H3-09 or H3-05 is set to D (speed bias 2), the speed equivalent to the terminal A2 or A3
A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Speed Function)
The jump speed function operates the motor while avoiding resonance caused by characteristic speeds in the machinery.
This function is effective in creating a speed reference dead band.
During constant-speed operation, operation within the jump speed range is prohibited. Smooth operation still used during acceleration and deceleration, i.e., jumps are not performed.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register d3-01
Jump speed
1 d3-02 d3-03
Jump speed
2
Jump speed
3
Set the center values of the jump speeds in %.
This function is disabled by setting the jump speed to 0 %.
Always ensure that the following applies: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump speed range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration, speed changes smoothly without jump.
0.0 to
100.0
*2
0.0%
*1
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
294H
295H
296H d3-04
Jump speed width
Sets the jump speed bandwidth in %.
The jump speed will be the jump speed ± d3-04.
0.0 to
100.0
*3
1.0%
*1
No A A A 297H
* 1. The display units vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence testes display unit is Hz.
* 2. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given. For sequence testes setting range is 0.0 to 400.0.
* 3. The setting ranges vary in accordance with the control method. The units for open-loop/flux vector control for PM are given.
For sequence test, the setting range is 0.0 to 20.0.
Adjusting Speed References
The relationship between the motor speed (output frequency) and the jump speed reference is as follows:
Motor speed (Output frequency)
Speed reference descending
Jump speed width d3-04
Jump speed width d3-04
Speed reference ascending
Jump speed width d3-04
Jump speed
3 (d3-03)
Jump speed
2 (d3-02)
Jump speed
1 (d3-01)
Fig 6.26 Jump speed
Jump speed reference
Setting Jump Speed Reference Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to A (jump speed), you can change the jump speed using the terminal A2 or A3 input level.
Jump speed
Max. output speed
E1-04
0 V
(4 mA)
10 V
(20 mA)
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input level
Fig 6.27 Jump Speed Setting Using an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
•
•
Set the jump speed according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 > Analog input.
When constants d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0%, the jump speed function is disabled.
6-
31
6
-32
Adjusting Speed Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs
The speed reference can be adjusted when b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set the pulse frequency in constant H6-02 to 100% reference, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using H6-
03 and H6-04.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
H6-01
H6-02
H6-03
H6-04
H6-05
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Pulse train input function selection
0: Speed reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Pulse train input scaling
Set the number of pulses in hertz, taking the reference to be 100%.
Pulse train input gain
Pulse train input bias
Pulse train input filter time
0 to 2
1000 to
32000
0
1440
Hz
No
Yes
Set the input gain level as a percent when the pulse train set in H6-02 is input.
Set the input bias when the pulse train is 0.
Set the pulse train input primary delay filter time constant in seconds.
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0 to 100.0
0.00 to
2.00
100.0% Yes
0.0%
0.10 s
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
42CH
42DH
42EH
42FH
430H
The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the speed reference using pulse inputs.
Pulse
RP
Cycle measurement
Filter
1
1+sT
H6-05
Gain and bias
H6-03
H6-04
0 100
=0
=1
=2
H6-01
Scaling using H6-02
Fig 6.28 Speed Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs
Speed reference
PID feedback
PID target value
Speed Limit (Speed Reference Limit Function)
Speed Limit (Speed Reference Limit Function)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Speed
If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given speed, use constant d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the Inverter speed reference as a percent, taking E1-04 (Maximum speed) to be
100%.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description d2-01
Speed reference upper limit
Set the motor speed upper limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0.0 to
110.0
100.0% No A A A 289H
Limiting Minimum Speed
If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given speed, use constants d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum speed, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all speed references.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed reference (i.e., the lower levels of the jog speed, multi-step speed, and auxiliary speed will not be adjusted).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register d2-02 d2-03
Speed reference lower limit
Master speed reference lower limit
Sets the motor speed lower limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0.0%
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
28AH
293H
6-
33
6
-34
Adjusting Speed Lower Limit Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 9 (speed reference lower level), you can adjust the speed reference lower level using the terminal A2 or A3 input level.
Speed reference lower level
Max. speed E1-04
INFO
0 V
(4 mA)
10 V
(20 mA)
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input level
Fig 6.29 Speed Lower Level for Multi-function Analog Input
If constant d2-02 and terminal A2 speed reference lower level have been set at the same time, the larger set value will become the speed reference lower limit.
Machine Protection
Machine Protection
This section explains functions for protecting the machine.
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
Enable this function if you do not want a torque above a specified amount to be applied to the load, or if you do not want a regeneration value above a specified amount to occur. The user-set value is applied to the torque limit.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
L7-01
Forward drive torque limit
L7-02
Reverse drive torque limit
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
L7-03
Forward regenerative torque limit
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
Regenerative state
Regenerative state
No. of motor rotations
Forward
Negative torque
L7-04
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0 to
160
0 to
300
0 to
160
0 to
300
0 to
160
0 to
300
0 to
160
0 to
300
160%
160%
160%
160%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4A7H
4A8H
4A9H
4AAH
Multi-function Analog Input ( H3-05, H3-09)
Setting
Value
Function
10 Positive torque limit
11 Negative torque limit
12 Regenerative torque limit
15 Positive/negative torque limit
Contents (100%)
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
No Yes Yes
No Yes Yes
No
No
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Setting the Torque Limit in Constants
Using L7-01 to L7-04, you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions: Forward drive, reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration.
6-
35
6
-36
Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input
You can change the analog input level torque limit value by setting the torque limit in multi-function analog input terminals A2 and A3 .
The analog input terminal signal level is factory-set as follows:
Multi-function analog input terminal A2: 4 to 20 mA
Multi-function analog input terminal A3: 0 to 10
The following diagram shows the relationship between the torque limits.
Output torque
Positive
Positive/negative torque limits
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Reverse operation
Negative torque limit
Negative
Fig 6.30 Torque Limit by Analog Input
No. of motor rotations
Forward operation
Regenerative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Machine Protection
Setting Torque Limits Using Constants and an Analog Input
The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using constants and torque limit using an analog input.
The lowest torque limit set from among the following is enabled: The torque limit using constants, the torque limit using an analog input, or the torque limit calculated by the inverter's current rating in accordance with the carrier frequency setting.
Multi-function analog input
Terminal or A3
(set value = 10)
Constants
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11)
Regenerative torque limit
(set value = 12)
Positive/negative torque limit
(set value = 15)
Positive forward drive torque
Reverse drive reverse torque
Reverse positive regenerative torque
Forward negative regenerative torque
Forward torque limit
(L7-01)
Reverse torque limit
(L7-02)
Forward regenerative torque limit (L7-03)
Reverse regenerative torque limit (L7-04)
150% (when C6-02 is set to 1 (2 kHz)) or
120% (when C6-02 is set to 2 (4 kHz) or higher) of Inverter rated current
Min: Minimum value priority circuit
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Fig 6.31 Torque Limit Using Constants and an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
When the torque limit function is operating, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled because torque control is given priority. Therefore, the acceleration and deceleration times may increase or the number of motor rotations may decrease.
When using the torque limit to raise and lower loads, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this may result in the motor falling or slipping.
Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value (during 10 V or 20 mA input) of 100% of the motor rated torque. To make the torque limit value during 10 V or 20 mA input 150% of the rated torque, set the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using
H3-10 and for multi-function analog input terminal A3 using H3-06.
•
•
The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at the motor speed of 10% or above. When motor speed is less than 10%, accuracy is lowered.
When the torque is limited while L7-07 is set to 1 (integral control), the acceleration and deceleration times may increase or the motor speed may not agree with the speed reference value.
6-
37
6
-38
Using Speed Detection
Set these constants when outputting one of the speed agree, desired speed agree, or speed detection signals from a multi-function output. When using flux vector control, the motor speed is detected.
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
Speed agreement detection level
Effective when “Desired speed agree 1”, “Speed detection 1>”, or “Speed detection
1<” is set for a multi-function output.
Speeds to be detected are set as a percentage of maximum speed.
Speed agreement detection width
Effective when “Speed agree
1,” “Desired speed agree 1,” or “Speed detection 1<” is set for a multi-function output.
Sets the speed detection width as a percentage of maximum speed.
Speed agreement detection level (+/
-)
Effective when “Desired speed agree 2”, “Desired speed agree1”, “Speed detection3>” or “Speed detection 4<” is set for a multifunction output.
Speed that should be detected is set as a percentage of maximum speed.
Speed agreement detection width
(+/-)
Effective when “Speed agree
2”, “Desired speed agree 1”, or “Speed detection 4<” is set for a multi-function output.
Speed detection width is set as a percentage of maximum speed.
0.0 to
100.0
0.0 to
40.0
-100.0 to
+100.0
0.0 to
40.0
0.0%
4.0%
0.0%
4.0%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A 499H
A 49AH
A
A
49BH
49CH
Machine Protection
Constants and Output Signals
User Constant Number
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
Name
Speed agree detection level
Speed agree detection width
Speed agree detection level (+/-)
Speed agree detection width (+/-)
Function
Desired frequency (speed) Agree 1
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 5
Frequency (speed) Agree 1
Desired frequency (speed) Agree 1
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 5
Desired frequency (speed) Agree 2
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 4
Frequency (speed) Agree 2
Desired frequency (speed) Agree 2
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 4
Set the corresponding setting in the multi-function output (H2-01 to H2-03) to output the frequency (speed) agree signal, desired frequency (speed) agree signal, or frequency (speed) detection signal.
Function
Frequency (speed) Agree 1
Desired frequency (speed) Agree 1
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
Frequency (speed) Agree 2
Desired frequency (speed) Agree 2
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 4
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 5
Setting
2
3
4
5
13
14
15
16
36
6-
39
6
-40
Timing Chart for Speed Detection Operation
Related constant
L4-01: Speed Agree Level
L4-02: Speed Agree Width
Frequency (speed) Agree 1
L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/ −
L4-04: Speed Agree Width +/ −
Frequency (speed) Agree 2
Speed reference
L4-02
Speed reference
L4-04
Frequency
(speed)
Agree
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-02
L4-02
Freq. (FOUT)
Detection 1
ON OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 4)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
(L4-01 < | Output frequency | )
L4-02
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
Frequency
Detection
L4-01
Freq. (FOUT)
Detection 2
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 5)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 5
(L4-01 < | Output frequency | )
L4-02
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency or motor speed
Output frequency or motor speed
Desired frequency
(speed)
Agree
Frequency (speed)
Agree 1
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2)
Desired frequency (speed) Agree 1
(ON at the following conditions during speed agree)
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
Frequency (speed)
Agree 2
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 13)
Desired frequency (speed) Agree 2
(ON at the following conditions during speed agree)
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-04
L4-03
Desired frequency
(speed) Agree 1
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 3)
L4-02
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
(L4-01 > | Output frequency | )
L4-02
Desired frequency
(speed) Agree 2
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 14)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3
(L4-03 > Output frequency)
L4-04
L4-01
L4-03
Output frequency or motor speed
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
Freq. (FOUT)
Detection 3
ON OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 15)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 4
(L4-01 < Output frequency)
Output frequency or motor speed
Freq. (FOUT)
Detection 4
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 16)
L4-04
L4-03
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. (FOUT)
Detection 5
OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 36) OFF during baseblock
Machine Protection
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overtorque) or the load is suddenly lightened (undertorque), you can output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal M1-M2, P1-PC, or P2-PC.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/
NC) in one of the following constants: H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and
P2-PC function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the motor torque (motor rated torque 100%).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L6-01
Torque detection selection 1
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
2: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque
(warning).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
4: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque
(warning).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
0 to 8 0 No No A A 4A1H
6-
41
6
-42
Constant
Number
Name
L6-02
L6-03
Torque detection level 1
Torque detection time 1
L6-04
Torque detection selection 2
L6-05
L6-06
Torque detection level 2
Torque detection time 2
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Motor rated torque is set as
100%.
0 to 300
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time in 1-second units.
Torque detection 1 is output from the multi-function output by setting the overtorque/ undertorque detection 1NO
(B) or 1NC (17) to the multifunction output (H2 ).
Torque detection 2 is output from the multi-function output by setting the overtorque/ undertorque detection 2NO
(18) or 2NC (19) to the multifunction output (H2 ).
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 8
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
150%
0.1 s
0
150%
0.1 s
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A2H
4A3H
4A4H
4A5H
4A6H
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Setting
Value
Function
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON)
17 Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
18 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
19 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Machine Protection
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and LED Indications
The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
0
Function
LED Indications
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 1
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 2
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
OL3 flashes
OL3 flashes
OL3 lit
OL3 lit
UL3 flashes
UL3 flashes
UL3 lit
UL3 lit
OL4 flashes
OL4 flashes
OL4 lit
OL4 lit
UL4 flashes
UL4 flashes
UL4 lit
UL4 lit
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection
Motor output torque
* *
L6-02 or L6-05
Overtorque detection 1 NO or overtorque detection 2 ޓ NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
ON ON
*
Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the motor rated torque.
6-
43
6
-44
• Undertorque Detection
Motor output torque
L6-02 or L6-05
*
Undertorque detection 1 NO or Undertorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06 ON ON
The undertorque detection disabled margin is approximately 10% of the motor rated torque.
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 7 (overtorque/undertorque detection level), you can change the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
If you change the overtorque/undertorque detection level using the multi-function analog input, only overtorque/undertorque detection level 1 will be enabled.
The following diagram shows the overtorque/undertorque detection level using an analog input.
Detection level
Multi-function analog input terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA) (20 mA)
Fig 6.32 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input
Multi-Function Analog Input ( H3-05, H3-09)
Setting
Value
7
Function
Overtorque/undertorque detection level
Contents (100%)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for sequence test mode
Yes Yes Yes
Machine Protection
Motor Overload Protection
You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
E5-03
L1-01
L1-02
Motor rated current
Motor protection selection
Motor protection time constant
Set the motor rated current in units of 0.01 A for a motor with a capacity of 7.5 kW or less, or in units of 0.1 A for one with a capacity of 11 kW or more.
0.00 to
2000.0
Sets whether the motor overload protection function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
4: Variable torque PM motor
5: Constant torque PM motor
6: Increased safety, explosion-proof PM motor (variable torque)
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this constant is set to 4, 5, or 6 (Motor protection function enabled), protection may not be effective.
Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload resistance is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started.
0 or 4
0, 4, 5,
6
0.1 to
5.0
1.65
A
*1
4
*1 *2
1.0 min
No
No
No
No
No
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
* 1. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or control method selection (A1-02).
The values for 0.4 kW 200 V Class standard motors for open-loop vector control (1750 min -1 ) are given.
* 2. This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
* 3. The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
32BH
480H
481H
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Setting
Value
1F
Function
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
Yes Yes Yes
6-
45
6
-46
Setting Motor Rated Current
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E5-03 (motor rated current). This set value is the electronic thermal base current.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The Varispeed F7S is for use only with variable torque motors and constant torque motors.
For use with variable torque IPM motors, set L1-01 to 4 (Variable torque PM motor).
For use with constant torque IPM motors, set L1-01 to 5 (Constant torque PM motor).
For use with increased safety, explosion-proof IPM motors (variable torque), set L1-01 to 6 [Increased safety, explosion-proof PM motor (variable torque)]
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type and Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
Variable torque PM motor
4
5
150
130
115
Torque
100
(%) 85
80
77
67
50
Short time 1 min.
Continuou s
10
0 10 33 100 130 150
Rotation speed/Base speed (%)
Normal operation at 10% speed or less is not possible.
The allowable tolerance of the impact load is within the range defined by the continuous ratings.
Constant torque PM motor
This motor yields its best cooling effect if running at the base speed or higher.
Detect the motor overload protection (OL1), if operating continuously at the base speed or less with
100% torque or more. The
Inverter will output a contact when a fault occurred, and the motor will coast to a stop.
Short time 1 min.
150
125
Torque
115
100
(%)
83
77
67
Continuous
This motor yields its cooling effect if running at low speeds
(approximately 0.2% of the base speed).
Operate continuously at
0.2% to 100% of the base speed.
0 0.2
100 120 130 150
Rotation speed/Base speed (%)
Machine Protection
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type and Tolerance Load Characteristics
Increased safety, explosion-proof PM motor (variable torque)
150
Cooling Ability
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
6
115
Torque
100
(%)
77
67
50
Short time 1 min.
Continuo us
33
10
0 10 33 100 120 130 150
Rotation speed/Base speed (%)
• Increased safety, explosion-proof motor has explosion protection equivalent to Exe II T3, eG3. Cannot be used in some hazardous locations, depending on the level of hazard.
• Normal operation at 10% speed or less is not possible.
The allowable tolerance of the impact load is within the range defined by the continuous ratings.
• The Inverter itself is not explosion-proof. Install the
Inverter in a nonhazardous location.
This motor yields its best cooling effect if running at the base speed or higher.
Detect the motor overload protection (OL1), if operating continuously at the base speed or less with
100% torque or more. The
Inverter will output a contact when a fault occurred, and the motor will coast to a stop.
6-
47
6
-48
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 150% overload is experienced, set the (hot start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 150% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at base speed, variable torque PM motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 4).
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.33 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be protected even if this constant has been set to 4 or 5 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset.
To detect overloads in good time, set the set value in constant L1-02 to a low setting.
When using a variable torque IPM motor, the cooling ability will be lowered by operating under the base speed. Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below the rated current.
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to other than 0) and you set H2-01 to
H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 1F (motor overload
OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
Machine Protection
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction
If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited, a Reverse Run Command will not be accepted even if it is input.
Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description b1-04
Prohibition of reverse operation
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0 or 1 0 No A A A 183H
Detecting Motor Overspeed
An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the regulated limit. An overspeed (OS) is detected when a speed that exceeds the set value in F1-08 continues for longer than the time set in F1-09. In flux vector control for PM, the Inverter will stop according to the setting in F1-03 after detecting an overspeed
(OS). In open-loop vector control for PM, Inverter output will be shut down (baseblock) after detecting an overspeed (OS) fault, and the motor will coast to a stop.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
F1-03
F1-08
F1-09
Operation selection at overspeed
(OS)
Overspeed detection level
Overspeed detection delay time
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, do not normally make this setting.)
0 to 3 1
*
Sets the overspeed detection method.
Speeds above that set for F1-08
(set as a percentage of the maximum speed) that continue to exceed this speed for the time set in F1-09 (unit: s) are detected as overspeed faults.
0 to 120 115%
0.0 to
2.0
0.0 s
*
* The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
A
A
382H
387H
388H
6-
49
6
-50
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference
An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the designated speed and the actual motor speed) is too great. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the speed reference and actual workpiece speed are within the setting of L4-02, if a speed deviation great than the set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.
Related Contents
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
F1-04
F1-10
F1-11
L4-02
Operation selection at deviation
Excessive speed deviation detection level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and operation continued.)
Sets the speed deviation detection method.
Any speed deviation above the F1-10 set level (set as a percentage of the maximum speed) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is detected as a speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the reference command speed.
Speed agreement detection width
Effective when “Speed agree
1,” “Desired speed agree 1,” or “Speed detection 1<” is set for a multi-function output.
Sets the speed detection width as a percentage of maximum speed.
0 to 3
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 to
40.0
3
0 to 50 10%
0.5 s
4.0%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
383H
389H
38AH
49AH
Continuing Operation
Continuing Operation
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation using speed search even if an error occurs.
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored
Even if a momentary power loss occurs, you can restart the Inverter automatically after power is restored to continue motor operation. To restart the Inverter after power has been restored, set L2-01 to the any of 1 to 4.
Make settings of L2-01 to L2-05 for related details of restarting.
• If L2-01 is set to 1:
After a momentary power loss, if the power is restored within the time set at L2-02, the inverter will restart. If not, alarm UV1 will occur.
If using an Inverter with a large capacity (200-V class of 37 kW or more and 400-V class of 75 kW or more), and L2-02 is set to 10 s or more, alarm UV3 (Inrush prevent circuit fault) will occur if the power is not restored within 10 s.
•
•
•
If L2-01 is set to 2:
After a momentary power loss, if the main power is restored while the supply voltage for the control board is maintained, the inverter will restart, and Alarm UV1 will not occur.
If L2-01 is set to 3:
After a momentary power loss, the Inverter will continue operating with Kinetic Energy Braking (KEB) until undervoltage conditions in the main circuit are detected. If the power is restored within the time set at
L2-02, the Inverter will restart. If not, alarm UV1 will occur.
If L2-01 is set to 4:
After a momentary power loss, the Inverter will continue operating with KEB until undervoltage conditions in the main circuit are detected.
If the main power is restored while the supply voltage for the control board is maintained, the Inverter will restart, and alarm UV1 will not occur.
6-
51
6
-52
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
Momentary power loss detection
0: Disabled (UV fault detection at momentary power loss)
1: Enabled (Restart if power returns within the time set in L2- 02. UV fault detection if the time exceeds that set in L2-02.)
2: Enabled during CPU operation (Restart if power returns during CPU operation. No UV fault detection.)
3: KEB operation (Restart if power returns within the time set in L2-02. UV fault detection if the time exceeds that set in L2-02.)
4: KEB operation during
CPU operation (Restart if power returns during CPU operation. No UV fault detection.)
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Sets the Ridethrough time in units of seconds, when
Momentary Power Loss
Selection (L2-01) is set to 1 or
3.
Min. baseblock time
Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time in units of one second, when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
0 to 4
0 to
60.0
0.1 to
5.0
0
*3
0.1 s
*1
0.1 s
*1
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
L2-05
Undervoltage detection level
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level
(main circuit DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower the main circuit undervoltage detection level.
150 to
210
*2
190 V
*2
No No A
* 1. The factory settings vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. (The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class Inverters are given.)
* 2. These are values for 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverter are twice as large.
* 3. The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
A
A
A
A
485H
486H
487H
489H
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that Run Commands from the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss exceeds 15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
Continuing Operation
• If using elevating machines, disable momentary power loss detection (L2-01=0) to prevent the motor from coasting to a stop with the brake disengaged during a momentary power loss.
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of the motor that is rotating on inertia, and then starts smoothly from that speed. When restoring power after a temporary power loss, the speed search function is useful to restart the fan that is rotating on inertia.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b3-01 b3-05
Speed search selection
Enables/disables the speed search function for the Run
Command and sets the speed search method.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If b3-01 set to 1, the motor speed is calculated at the start of a search, and the motor accelerates or decelerates from this calculated speed to a set speed.
(A motor rotational direction search is also possible.)
Search wait time
Sets the magnetic contactor operating delay time when there is a magnetic contactor on the output side of the
Inverter. When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed by the time set here.
0, 1
0.0 to
20.0
1
*
1.0 s
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
191H
195H
* The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-06)
Setting
Value
Function
61 External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
62 External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
No No Yes
No No Yes
6-
53
6
-54
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error may occur. Set either external search command 1 or external search command 2.
If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the period when the Run Command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum
Baseblock Time (L2-03).
If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search
Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 1.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed search. If the delay time is less than 1.0 s, the speed search may not start properly. Make sure that the delay is set to 1.0 s or more.
During a high-speed rotation of 100 Hz or more, a speed search cannot be performed, and an overcurrent
(OC) or overvoltage (OV) fault may be detected.
If one of these faults is detected during a speed search after recovery from a momentary power loss, take the following measures.
•
•
•
Extend the search wait time (b3-05).
Enable the number of auto restart attempts (L5-01) for use together with a speed search.
Switch the speed search to momentary power loss detection (L2-01=3 or 4).
Time Chart
The time chart for speed searches is shown below.
Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command of multi-function inputs has been selected is shown below.
Run Command
OFF ON
Set speed reference
Start using speed detected
Motor speed b3-02
Output current
1.0 s
* Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) × 0.7*
Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the Run Command turns ON in a short time,
the operation may be the same as the search after the short baseblock.
Fig 6.34 Speed Search at Startup
Continuing Operation
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
The time chart when the Inverter operation is restarted after power has been restored is shown below.
• Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON OFF
Start using speed detected
Set speed reference
Motor speed
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1
*2
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the motor speed
immediately before the baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.35 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON OFF
Motor speed
Start using speed detected
Set speed reference
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long, operation may be the same as the search at start.
Fig 6.36 Speed Search After Baseblock (Loss Time > L2-03)
6-
55
6
-56
Continuing Operation During Momentary Power Loss
If L2-01 is set to 3 or 4, Kinetic Energy Braking (KEB) will be performed after a momentary power loss. With
KEB, the motor decelerates to a stop when a momentary power loss occurs and the Inverter continues to be controlled with the energy regenerated during deceleration. KEB control continues while the motor decelerates and the regeneration energy is reduced, until the DC voltage of the main circuit falls below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05).
Related Contents
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
L2-01
L2-02
L2-05
Momentary power loss detection
Undervoltage detection level
0: Disabled (UV fault detection at momentary power loss)
1: Enabled (Restart if power returns within the time set in L2- 02. UV fault detection if the time exceeds that set in L2-02.)
2: Enabled during CPU operation (Restart if power returns during CPU operation. No UV fault detection.)
3: KEB operation (Restart if power returns within the time set in L2-02. UV fault detection if the time exceeds that set in L2-02.)
4: KEB operation during
CPU operation (Restart if power returns during CPU operation. No UV fault detection.)
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Sets the Ridethrough time in units of seconds, when
Momentary Power Loss
Selection (L2-01) is set to 1 or
3.
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level
(main circuit DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower the main circuit undervoltage detection level.
0 to 4
0 to
60.0
150 to
210
*2
0
*3
0.1 s
*1
190 V
*2
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
485H
486H
489H
Continuing Operation
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
L2-06
KEB deceleration time
Enabled when L2-01 is set to
3 or 4.
Sets the deceleration time in seconds from the maximum speed to zero-speed at momentary power loss command (KEB).
Controller power supply will be extended if deceleration time is shortened.
0.0 to
200.0
30.0 s
*3
No No A
* 1. The factory settings vary in accordance with the Inverter capacity. (The settings for 0.4 kW 200 V Class Inverters are given.)
* 2. These are values for 200 V Class Inverters. Values for 400 V Class Inverter are twice as large.
* 3. The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
A 48AH
Operation Example
Main circuit power supply ON OFF ON
DC bus voltage
KEB operation level
Undervoltage detection level
(L2-05)
Motor speed
(Output frequency)
During normal operation
Run command
During KEB operation
During
Coasting Speed search restart
Speed search start
ON
CASE A
Continuous operation possible 䋨 L2-02 䋩
CASE B
Continuous operation possible
Fig 6.37 KEB Operation
Continuous operation possible 䋨 L2-02 䋩
•
•
The KEB operation levels are calculated by the following equations.
200 V class: KEB level = Set value (L2-05) + 50 (V)
400 V class: KEB level = Set value (L2-05) + 100 (V)
Possible duration for continuous operation
• If L2-01 is set to 3, the Inverter will restart (reaccelerate) if the power supply of the main circuit is restored within the time assigned to L2-02 after a momentary power loss, as shown by Case A in the preceding figure. If using Inverters of 30 kW or less in the 200-V class or 55 kW or less in the 400-V class, the time assigned to L2-02 will start to be measured after the DC voltage of the main circuit falls
6-
57
6
-58
•
• below the undervoltage detection level set at L2-05. So, the possible duration for continuous operation can be longer than that for Inverters of other capacities, as shown by Case B in the preceding figure.
If L2-01 is set to 4, the Inverter will restart (reaccelerate) if the main power is restored while the power supply for the control board is maintained after a momentary power loss.
Shorten the KEB deceleration time at L2-06 if the inertia of the machine is low and an STO alarm or other similar alarm occurs after the power supply is restored.
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that Run Commands from the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss exceeds 15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
Kinetic Energy Braking (KEB) cannot be used to restart a motor driven by rotational inertia.
IMPORTANT
If using the 200-V class Inverter with a capacity of 37 kW to 75 kW or a 400-V class inverter with a capacity of
75 kW to 300 kW and set L2-01 to 2, 3, or 4, do not change the wiring of the control power-supply terminals
(200V class: r/
1
, 200/
2
200 , 400V class: r/
1
, 400/
2
400). Leave the terminals at their factory settings. For example, if the control power-supply terminals (r/
1
and /
2
) are separated from the power supply lines (R/L1 and S/L2) and the control power is supplied from different lines, then do not set L2-01 to 2, 3, or 4. If these settings are used, the Inverter may be damaged.
Refer to the Main Circuit Configurations on page 2-13 and the Standard Connection Diagrams on page 2-14.
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Speed Reference Is Lost
The speed reference loss detection function continues operation using 80% speed of the speed reference before loss when the speed reference using an master speed analog input* is reduced 90% or more in 400 ms.
When the error signal during speed reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function contact output terminal M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to C (speed reference lost).
* Speed references using the following master speed analog inputs are used to detect a frequency loss.
• Analog input using terminal A1
• Analog input using terminal A2 when H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) is set to 0 (Add to terminal A1).
• Analog input using terminal A2 when H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) is set to 2 (Auxiliary speed reference 1) and H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 switching) is set to 1 (Use terminal A2 analog input as the master speed reference).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
L4-05
Operation when speed reference is missing
0: Stop (Operation follows the speed reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed continues. (At 80% of speed before the speed reference was lost)
Speed reference is lost: Speed reference dropped over 90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1 0 No No A A 49DH
Continuing Operation
Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function)
If an Inverter fault occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no fault is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart using the speed search function. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in constant L5-01. A fault reset is attempted every 5 ms after a fault occurs and minimum baseblock time has passed. The number of auto restarts is counted when the Inverter attempts a fault reset and restarts operation. The protection function will operate if a fault continues to occur after auto restarting the number of times set in L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following faults. If a fault not listed below occurs, the protection function will operate and the auto restart function will not.
• OC (Overcurrent) • RH (Braking resistor overheating)
• GF (Ground fault)
• PUF (Fuse blown)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit
Magnetic Contactor Operation Failure)
*
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• LF (Output phase failure)
• RR (Braking transistor error)
• OL1 (Motor overload)
• OL2 (Inverter overload)
• OH1 (Cooling fan overheating)
• OL3 (Overtorque)
• OL4 (Overtorque)
* If L2-01 (Momentary power loss detection) is set to 0 (Disabled), the protection function will be activated, not the auto restart function.
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2,
P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
L5-01
Number of auto restart attempts
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
Sets the number of auto restart attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run speed.
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
0 to 10
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
49EH
49FH
Application Precautions
• The number of auto restarts count is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
After the protection operation has been performed, and the fault has been verified, and an fault reset has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
6-
59
6
-60
• Do not use the auto restart function for applications using elevating machines (Set L5-01 to 0). If so, motor will be coasting to a stop with the brake disengaged when a fault occur during run.
Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault (SPEC: C or Later Only)
Use the constant setting to select the operation of the motor after a cooling fan fault occurs. This function can be used for times when a motor should not be stopped quickly (with an emergency stop.)
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-32
OH1 detection of
Inverter’ s cooling fan
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0: Disabled (FAN minor fault detection)
1: Enabled (OH1 major fault detection)
0 or 1 1 No A A A 4E2H
The following table describes the operation of the motor and the display of the Digital Operator in accordance with the settings of the L8-32 if a cooling fan fault occurred.
Setting
Value
Operator
Multi-function Contact
Output
Coast to a stop Fault
0
Cooling Fin Overheating OH1 (lit)
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault FAN (blink) Continue operation
* Minor fault
1
Cooling Fin Overheating OH (lit)
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault OH1 (lit)
Coast to a stop
Coast to a stop
Fault
Fault
* If L8-32 is set to 0, the motor will continue running even if a cooling fan fault occurred. However, the Inverter rated output current and the overload capacity will be reduced. The rated output current will be reduced to 80% if the normal rated output current is 100%, and the overload capacity will be reduced to the values as follows.
When CT is selected: 100% per every 3 minutes, 150% per every 30 seconds.
When VT is selected: 100% per every 37 seconds, 120% per every 13 seconds.
IMPORTANT
If L8-32 is set to 0, be sure to set H2-01 to H2-03 multi-function contact outputs to 10 (minor fault) or to 3D
(Inverter’s cooling fan fault.) If a cooling fan fault occurs, stop the Inverter immediately and replace the cooling fan. If the Inverter continues to run while a cooling fan fault occurs, the Inverter’s cooling ability will be affected and the Inverter’s internal temperature will increase and shorten the Inverter’s life.
During a cooling fan fault, the cooling fan stops for about 3 seconds every minute (interval operation.)
Inverter Protection
This section explains the functions for protecting the Inverter and the braking resistor.
Inverter Protection
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors
Perform overheating protection on Inverter-mounted braking resistors (Model: ERF-150WJ ).
When overheating in a mounted braking resistor is detected, an alarm RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to a stop.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
L8-01
Protect selection for internal DB resistor
(Type ERF)
0: Disabled (no overheating protection)
1: Enabled (overheating protection)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0 or 1 0 No A A A 4ADH
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Setting
Value
Function
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
Yes Yes Yes
INFO
The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) being detected are that the deceleration time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration time or replace the Braking Resistor Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity.
When using a braking resistor other than the Braking Resistor Unit, provide a sequence with a thermal overload relay or similar means to turn off the power input to the Inverter when it detects resistor overheating. See the Connection Diagram on page 2-3 for this sequence circuit.
6-
61
6
-62
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels
The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermistor, and protects the Inverter from overheating. You can receive Inverter overheating pre-alarms in units of 1 ° C.
The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Stopping the Inverter as error protection, and continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fins overheating) on the Digital Operator flashing.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
L8-02
L8-03
Overheat pre-alarm level
Operation selection after overheat prealarm
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm in ° C.
The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat prealarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
3: Continue operation
(Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting
0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.
50 to
130
0 to 3
95
*
3
° C
No
No
* The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
A
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
4AEH
4AFH
Input Terminal Functions
Input Terminal Functions
This section explains input terminal functions, which set operating methods by switching functions for the multi-function contact input terminals (S3 to S8).
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control
Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter Run Command inputs and speed reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an output from H1-01 to
H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote selection).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name b1-01
Reference selection b1-02
Operation method selection
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Set the speed reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input
Set the Run Command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
0 to 4
0 to 3
1
1
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
180H
181H
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
INFO
6-
63
6
-64
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation, and prohibit Inverter output using the baseblock commands. At this time, the motor will be coasting and “BB” will blink on the Digital Operator.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-06)
Setting
Value
8
9
Function
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Time Chart
The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Baseblock command
Speed reference
Input Cleared
Output frequency
Coasting to a stop
Fig 6.38 Baseblock Commands
IMPORTANT
• If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during operation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in the motor falling or slipping.
• If the baseblock command is cleared when the output frequency is high (100 Hz or more), OC, OV, or
STO alarm may occur. Clear the baseblock command when the output frequency is less than 100 Hz.
Input Terminal Functions
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold)
The acceleration/deceleration ramp hold function stops acceleration and deceleration, stores the motor speed
(output frequency) at that point in time, and then continues operation.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to
A (acceleration/deceleration ramp hold) to stop acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned ON and to store the motor speed (output frequency) at that point in time. Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the terminal is turned OFF.
If d4-01 is set to 1 and the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input, the motor speed (output frequency) is still stored even after the power supply is turned OFF.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register d4-01
Speed reference hold function selection
Sets whether or not speeds on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at the previous hold speed.)
This function is available when the multi-function inputs “accel/decel Ramp
Hold” or “up/down” commands are set.
0 or 1 0 No No A A 298H
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Power supply
Forward/Stop
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Speed reference
Motor Speed
(Output frequency)
Hold Hold
Fig 6.39 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
6-
65
6
-66
Application Precautions
•
•
•
When d4-01 is set to 1, the motor speed (output frequency) on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. If performing operations using this speed (frequency) after the Inverter has also been turned
OFF, input the Run Command with the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON.
When d4-01 is set to 0 and a Run Command is input while the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold is turned ON, the motor speed (output frequency) will be set to zero.
If you input an Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during positioning, deceleration may be canceled.
Raising and Lowering Speed References Using Contact Signals (UP/
DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter speed references by turning ON and OFF a multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S8.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair.
The motor speed (output frequency) depends on the acceleration and deceleration time. Be sure to set b1-02
(Run Command selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description d2-01 d2-02 d2-03
Speed reference upper limit
Speed reference lower limit
Master speed reference lower limit
Set the motor speed upper limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Sets the motor speed lower limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0.0 to
110.0
100.0% No A A A 289H
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0.0%
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
28AH
293H
Precautions
When setting and using UP and DOWN commands, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S8 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function input selection) will occur:
•
•
Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
Input Terminal Functions
Application Precautions
• Speed outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the speed reference upper and lower limits set in constants d2-01 to d2-03. Here, speed references from analog speed reference terminal A1 becomes the speed reference lower limit. If using a combination of the speed reference from terminal A1 and the speed reference lower limit set in either constant d2-02 or d2-03, the larger lower limit will become the speed reference lower limit.
•
•
•
If inputting the Run Command when using UP/DOWN commands, the motor speed (output frequency) accelerates to the speed reference lower limit.
When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
When d4-01 (Speed Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the speed reference held using the UP/
DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is turned
ON and the Run Command is input, the motor accelerates to the speed reference that has been stored. To reset (clear to 0) the stored speed reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while the Run Command is OFF.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Constant
H1-01
H1-02
Name
Multi-function input (terminal S3)
Multi-function input (terminal S4)
Set Value
10
11
0 to 10 V analog signal
Inverter
Forward operation/Stop
Reverse operation/Stop
Up command
Down command
Sequence common reference lower limit
Fig 6.40 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
6-
67
6
-68
Output frequency
(motor speed) upper limit
Accelerates to lower limit
Lower limit
Same frequency
Forward operation/stop
UP command
DOWN command
Frequency (speed) reference reset
Frequency (speed) matching signal*
Power supply
* The frequency (speed) matching signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/ decelerating while the Run Command is ON.
Fig 6.41 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
Input Terminal Functions
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Speeds in the Analog References (+/- Speed)
The +/- speed function increments or decrements the speed set in analog speed reference d4-02 (+/- Speed
Limit) using two contact signal inputs.
To use this function, set One of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to S8 function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command can be used as a pair.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name d4-02
+ - Speed limits
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Set the speed to be add to or subtracted from the analog speed reference as a percent, taking the maximum speed to be 100%.
Enabled when the increase (+) speed command or decrease (-
) speed command is set for a multi-function input.
0 to 100 10% No No A A 299H
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Speed Reference
The speed references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown below.
Speed Reference
Set Speed
Reference
+ d4-02
Set Speed
Reference
- d4-02
Set Speed Command
Trim Control Increase
Command Terminal
Trim Control Decrease
Command Terminal
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Application Precautions
•
•
•
Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference is from an analog input.
When the analog speed reference value - d4-02 < 0, the speed reference is set to 0.
If only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S8, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected) will occur.
6-
69
6
-70
Hold Analog Speed Using User-set Timing
When one of H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) is set to 1E
(sample/hold analog speed command), the analog speed reference will be held from 100 ms after the terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that speed.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the speed reference.
Sample/hold command
Analog input ms ms ms
Speed reference
Fig 6.42 Sample/Hold Analog Speed
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog speed references, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog speed reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same time.
If these commands are used at the same time, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) will occur.
•
•
•
Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
UP/DOWN command
Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
Application Precautions
• When performing sample/hold of analog speed references, be sure to store references of 100 ms minimum.
If the reference time is less than 100 ms, the speed reference will not be held.
• The analog speed reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit Terminals
You can switch reference input between the Communications option card and the control circuit terminals. Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to 2
(Option/Inverter selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when the
Inverter is stopped.
Input Terminal Functions
Setting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications option card and the control circuit terminals, set the following constants.
•
•
•
Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal [analog input])
Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 (Control circuit terminal (sequence inputs])
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to 2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Terminal Status
OFF
ON
Speed Reference and Run Command Selection
Inverter
(Can be operated from speed reference or control circuit terminal from analog input terminal.)
Communications option card
(Speed reference and Run Command are enabled from Communications option card.)
Jog Speed Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/
RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog speeds by using the terminal ON/OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the Run Command.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register d1-17
Jog speed reference
The speed reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or
RJOG command is ON.
0.00 to
100.00
*
10.00% Yes Q Q Q 292H
* For sequence test (display unit: Hz), the setting ranges change. For open-loop/flux vector control or vector control with a PG for PM, the upper limits of the setting would be calculated by the following formula: E1-09 × E5-04 ÷ 120.
For sequence test, the upper limits of the setting would be E1-09.
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-06)
Setting
Value
Function
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
No Yes Yes
No Yes Yes
Application Precautions
•
•
Jog speeds using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other speed references.
When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
6-
71
6
-72
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the
Inverter (External Fault Function)
The external fault function performs the error contact output, and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External fault [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external fault signal. For example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external fault function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-06 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
•
•
External fault detection method
Operation during external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-
.
Set
Value
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NC Contact
Yes
Yes
Yes
Error Detection Method
(See Note 2.)
Constant
Detection
Detection
During
Operation
Yes
Operation During Error Detection
Decelerate to Stop
(Error)
Yes
Coast to
Stop
(Error)
Emergency Stop
(Error)
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2E
2F
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note 1. Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External fault when ON; NC contact: External fault when
OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
Output Terminal Functions
Output Terminal Functions
The output terminal function, which sets the output methods by switching the settings of H2-01 to H2-03
(Multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC), is described here.
During Run (Setting: 0)
OFF
ON
The Run Command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
The Run Command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
OFF
ON
Baseblock, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop, or during initial magnetic pole calculation.
The Inverter is outputting a frequency.
• These outputs can be used to indicate the Inverter's operating status.
Run Command
OFF ON
Baseblock command
OFF ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output
OFF ON
During run 2 output
OFF ON
Fig 6.43 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
Zero-speed (Setting: 1)
OFF
The motor speed (output frequency) is greater than the minimum speed (E1-09).
[With flux vector control for PM, is greater than the zero-speed level
ON
The motor speed (output frequency) is less than the minimum speed (E1-09).
[With flux vector control for PM, is less than the zero-speed level (b2-01).]
Output frequency
Minimum speed (E1-09)
[Zero-speed level (b2-01) when flux vector control is being used.]
Zero-speed output
OFF ON
Fig 6.44 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
6-
73
6
-74
Motor Overload (OL1) Pre-alarm (Setting: 1F)
OFF The motor protection function's electronic thermal value is less than 90% of the detection level.
ON The motor protection function's electronic thermal value is greater than 90% of the detection level.
•
•
This output function is valid when the motor overload protection function is enabled (L1-01 =1).
This output can be used to warn of overheating before the protection function itself operates.
Inverter Overheat (OH) Pre-alarm (Setting: 20)
OFF
ON
The cooling fin temperature is less than the "OH Pre-Alarm Level" set in L8-02.
The cooling fin temperature exceeds the "OH Pre-Alarm Level" set in L8-02.
• This output function indicates that the temperature of the cooling fins reaches the temperature set in L8-02
(the Inverter overheating alarm detection level).
Speed reference limit (Setting: 31)
OFF
ON
Other than ON condition
Enables the speed reference limit in the following conditions:
• Speed reference ≥ Speed reference upper limit (d2-01)
Speed reference ≤ Speed reference lower limit (d2-02)
Speed reference ≥ Speed reference lower limit of the multi-function analog input
(Setting: 9)
• The speed reference is the Min. Speed (EI-09) or less in open-loop vector control for PM.
The speed reference is the Min. Speed (E1-09) or less, and b1-05 is set to 1, 2, or 3 in flux vector control for PM.
Integral power (Setting: 39) (SPEC: C or later)
ON The integral power has exceeded the output level set to H2-06. (Contact output for 200 ms.)
The contact output function with integral power will integrate the power used to run the Inverter every 100 ms.
If the power surpasses the level set at H2-06, the multi-function output terminal will send a signal for 0.2 seconds to indicate that the power is too high.
The following diagram shows an example of the Multi-function contact output.
INFO
• The power will not be integrated, if the power value is negative, indicating a regenerative state.
• The integral power value will be maintained while control power is being supplied. If control power is cut off because of a momentary power loss or other reason, however, the integral power value will be reset.
Integral power output level
(H2-06)
Integral power
(every 100 ms)
Multi-function contact output
(H2-01 to H2-03)
OFF ON ON OFF
0.2 s
Fig 6.45 Example of Multi-function Contact Output when Integral Power is ON
Output Terminal Functions
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
H2-06
Integral power output level selection
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Select the output level for the multi-function contact when selecting 39 to one of H2-01 to H2-03.
0: 0.1 kWh
1: 1 kWh
2: 10 kWh
3: 100 kWh
4: 1000 kWh
0 to 4 0 No A A A 437H
• If the integral power output level selection (H2-06) is changed, the integral power value will be automatically reset.
• If the integral power value has exceeded the set level while the integral power (multi-function contact output) is still on, then the multi-function contact output will remain on. INFO
Fan fault alarm (Setting: 3A or 3B) (SPEC: C or later)
To enable the contact output for the fan fault alarm, set one of H2-01 to H2-03 to 3A or 3B.
3A ON Fan fault alarm (NO contact output)
3B ON Fan fault alarm (NC contact output)
The fan fault alarm contact will be on if any fan-related fault or alarm, such as Overheat (OH), OH1, OH2, or
FAN occurs. For details on individual faults or alarms, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting .
6-
75
6
-76
Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor constants.
Using the Analog Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor constants.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
H4-01
Name
H4-02
Gain (terminal FM)
H4-03
H4-04
Monitor selection
(terminal
FM)
Bias (terminal FM)
Monitor selection
(terminal
AM)
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) from terminal FM. The monitor items that can be set depends on the control method.
4, 10 to 14, 28 to 30, 34, 39 to
41, 49, 58, 61, 63, 70 to 77, 79 to 82 cannot be set.
23, 25, 35, 42, 43, 45 to 48, 50 to 57, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 83 to
99 are not used.
1 to 99 5
*2
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*1
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/ down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*1
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) from terminal AM.
The monitor items that can be set depends on the control method.
4, 10 to 14, 28 to 30, 34, 39 to
41, 49, 58, 61, 63, 70 to 77, 79 to 82 cannot be set.
23, 25, 35, 42, 43, 45 to 48, 50 to 57, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 83 to
99 are not used.
0.00 to
2.50
-10.0 to
+10.0
1 to 99
1.00
0.0%
3 *2
No
Yes
Yes
No
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
41DH
41EH
41FH
420H
Monitor Constants
Constant
Number
H4-05
H4-06
H4-07
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Gain (terminal AM)
Bias (terminal AM)
Analog output 1 signal level selection
Channel 1 monitor selection
Channel 1 gain
Channel 2 monitor selection
Channel 2 gain
Set the voltage level gain for multi-function analog output
2.
Set the number of multiples of
10 V to be output as the 100% output for the monitor items.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*1
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/ down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
A meter calibration function is available.
*1
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 1 (terminal FM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
1: − 10 to 10 V output
Effective when the Analog
Monitor Board is used.
Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor item to be output. (U1 )
The monitor items that can be set depends on the control method.
Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for outputting monitor items.
4, 10 to 14, 28 to 30, 34, 39 to
41, 49, 58, 61, 63, 70 to 77, and 79 to 82 cannot be set. 23,
25, 35, 42, 43, 45 to 48, 50 to
57, 59, 60, 62, 64 to 67, and
83 to 99 are not used. When the AO-12 Analog Monitor
Board is used, outputs of ± 10
V are possible. To output ± 10
V, set F4-07 or F4-08 to 1.
When the AO-08 Analog
Monitor Board is used, only outputs of 0 to +10 V are possible.
A meter calibration function is available.
*3
Channel 1 output monitor bias
Sets the channel 1 item bias to
100%/10 V when the Analog
Monitor Board is used.
0.00 to
2.50
-10.0 to
+10.0
0 or 1
1 to 99
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
5
*2
1 to 99 3
*2
-10.0 to
10.0
0.50
0.0%
0
1.00
0.50
0.0%
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
421H
422H
423H
391H
392H
393H
394H
395H
6-
77
6
-78
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
F4-06
F4-07
F4-08
Channel 2 output monitor bias
Sets the channel 2 item bias to
100%/10 V when the Analog
Monitor Board is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
Analog output signal level for channel 1
Analog output signal level for channel 2
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0 or 1
0.0%
0
0
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
396H
397H
398H
* 1. Adjustment target is the FM terminal when the H4-02 or H4-03 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
Adjustment target is the AM terminal when the H4-05 or H4-06 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
To adjust the meter, multiply a value that is equivalent to 100% of the output by the gain setting and add the set bias.
* 2. The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed.
* 3. Adjustment target is the CH1 output when the F4-02 or F4-05 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
Adjustment target is the CH2 output when the F4-04 or F4-06 setting is displayed in quick, advanced, or verify mode while the motor is stopped.
To adjust the meter, multiply a value equivalent to 100% of the output by the gain setting, and then add the set bias.
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
The digital operator monitor items (U1 [status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants , and set the values for the part of U1-
(status monitor).
Alternatively, you can output monitor items (U1 [status monitor]) from analog output option terminal channels 1 and 2 on analog monitor boards AO-08 and AO-12. Refer to the table of constants, and set the values.
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06. Also, adjust the output voltage for output channels 1 and 2 of Analog Output option cards AO-08 and AO-12 using the gain and bias in F4-02, F4-04, F4-05, and F4-06.
Adjusting the Meter
The output voltage for terminals FM-AC and AM-AC and output channels 1 and 2 of the AO option card can be adjusted while the Inverter is stopped. For example, just pressing the Enter Key and displaying the data setting display for H4-02 or H4-03 will cause the following voltage to be output by the FM-AC terminals.
10 V/100% monitor output × output gain (H4-02) + output bias (H4-03)
Just pressing the Enter Key and displaying the data setting display for F4-02 or F4-05 will cause the following voltage to be output to channel 1 of the AO option card.
10 V/100% monitor output × output gain (F4-02) + output bias (F4-05)
Monitor Constants
Output voltage
Gain x 10 V
Bias x 10/100 V
Monitor item
Fig 6.46 Monitor Output Adjustment
Switching Analog Monitor Signal Levels
Monitor items corresponding to − 10 to 10 V output 0 to 10 V signals when the monitor value is positive (+), and 0 to -10 V signals when the monitor value is negative (-). For monitor items corresponding to − 10 to 10 V, refer to Chapter 5 User Constants .
You can select the signal levels separately for multi-function analog output terminals and analog output option terminals.
INFO
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents
This section explains pulse monitor constants.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
H6-06
Pulse train monitor selection
H6-07
Pulse train monitor scaling
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Select the pulse train monitor output items (value of the part of U1 ).
There are two types of monitor items: Speed-related items and PID-related items.
Set the number of pulses output when speed is 100% in
Hz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to
0, to make the pulse train monitor output synchronously to the motor speed.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
0 to
32000
2
1440
Hz
Yes
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
431H
432H
6-
79
6
-80
Selecting Pulse Monitor Items
Output digital operator monitor items (U1 [status monitor]) from pulse monitor terminal MP-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants , and set the part of U1 (Status monitor). The possible monitor selections are limited as follows: U1-01, 02, 05, 20, 24, 36.
Adjusting the Pulse Monitor Items
Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monitor terminal MP-AC. Set the pulse frequency output when
100% frequency is output to H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter's U-phase output.
Application Precautions
When using a pulse monitor constant, connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions.
If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the machinery.
Using a Sourcing Output
Output Voltage
(Isolated)
VRL (V)
+5 V min.
+8 V min.
+10 V min.
Load Impedance (k Ω )
1.5 k Ω min.
3.5 k Ω min.
10 k Ω min.
MP
AC
VRL
Load impedance
Using a Sinking Input
External Power
Supply (V)
Sink Current (mA)
12 VDC ± 10%,
15 VDC ± 10%
16 mA Max
MP
External power supply
Load impedance
Sinking current
AC
Individual Functions
Individual Functions
This section explains the individual functions used in special applications.
Using MEMOBUS Communications
You can perform serial communications with MEMOCON-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or similar devices using the MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communications between master and slave are normally started by the master, and the slave responds.
The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address of each slave beforehand, so the master can perform signal communications using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response to the master.
MEMOCON-series PLC
Inverter Inverter Inverter
RS-485 connections example
Fig 6.47 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item
Interface
Communications Cycle
Communications Parameters
Communications Protocol
Number of Connectable Units
Specifications
RS-422, RS-485
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate: Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 19,200 bps.
Data length:
Parity:
Stop bits:
8 bits fixed
Select from even, odd, or none.
1 bit fixed
MEMOBUS (RTU mode only)
31 units max. (when using RS-485)
6-
81
6
-82
Communications Connection Terminal
MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only, as seen from the PLC.
RS-422A or RS-485
S+
-
+
SS1
R+
O
F
F
R-
Switch
1
Terminating resistance (1/2 W, 110 Ohms)
1
2
Fig 6.48 Communications Connection Terminal
OFF ON
Terminating resistance
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communication cables, connect the shield cover to the Inverter earth terminal, and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected to prevent operating errors due to noise.
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior.
R+ R S+ S
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply turned and connect the communication cable between the PLC and the
Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications constants (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
INFO
Set the timer on the master to monitor response time from the slave. Set the master so that if the slave does not respond to the master within the set time, the same command message will be sent from the master again.
Individual Functions
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b1-01
Reference selection
Set the speed reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input b1-02
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
Operation method selection
Set the Run Command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
Slave address
Communication speed selection
Set the Inverter's slave address.
Set the baud rate for MEMO-
BUS communications of communications connection terminals.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Communication parity selection
Set the parity for MEMOBUS communications of communications connection terminals.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
Stopping method after communication error
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
Communication error detection selection
Send wait time
Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 20
*
0 to 4
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 or 1
1
1
1FH
3
0
3
1
5 to 65 5 ms
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
180H
181H
425H
426H
427H
428H
429H
42AH
6-
83
6
-84
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
H5-07
RTS control
ON/OFF
Select to enable or disable
RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always
ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)
0 or 1 1 No A A A 42BH
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-
02.
•
•
Monitoring operation status from the PLC
Setting and reading constants
•
•
Resetting errors
Inputting multi-function commands
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S8.
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is changed by the command (function) contents.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must support the following.
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Inverter to PLC
Response message
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long H5-06 setting
24 bits long
Fig 6.49 Message Spacing
5 ms min.
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 20 Hex. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the
Inverter will not return responses).
Individual Functions
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
03H
08H
10H
Function
Read storage register contents
Loopback test
Write multiple storage registers
Command Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
8
8
11
8
8
41
Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
7
8
8
37
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method.
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communications is usually 0, but when using the MEMOBUS system, set the factory setting to 1 (i.e., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves, and compare them to the CRC-16 in the response messages.
6-
85
6
-86
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Storage Register Contents
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive, starting from a specified address. The contents of the storage register are separated into higher place 8 bits and lower place 8 bits, and comprise the data within response messages in address order.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Command Message
02H
03H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address 02H
Function Code 03H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 02H
Function Code 83H
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
00H
20H
00H
04H
45H
F0H
Data quantity
Lead storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
08H
00H
65H
00H
00H
00H
00H
01H
F4H
AFH
82H
Error code
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
03H
F1H
31H
Individual Functions
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter.
Command Message
Slave address
Function code
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
01H
08H
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave address 01H
Function code 08H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address 01H
Function code 89H
Error Code
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
01H
86H
50H
Writing to Multiple Storage Registers
Write the specified data to each specified storage register from the specified addresses. The written data must be in the following order in the command message: Higher place 8 bits, then lower place 8 bits, in storage register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency
(speed) reference of 60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC.
Command Message
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
10H 10H Function Code 90H Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
No. of data
Lead data
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
00H
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
00H
01H
00H
02H
10H
08H
Error code
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
02H
CDH
C1H
Next data
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
6-
87
6
-88
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle response messages in the same way.
INFO
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
Register No.
0000H
0001H
0002H
0003H
0004H
0005H
0006H
0007H
0008H
Contents
Not used
Speed (frequency) reference
Bit 0 Forward Run/Stop Command 1: Forward run 0: Stop
Bit 1
Bit 2 External fault 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Fault reset
ComNet
ComCtrl
1: Reset command
Multi-function input command 3
Multi-function input command 4
Multi-function input command 5
Multi-function input command 6
Multi-function input command 7
Multi-function input command 8
Bit C to F Not used
Speed (frequency) reference (Set units using constant o1-03)
Not used
Not used
Not used
PID target value
Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 11 V/1540)
Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 11 V/1540)
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0
Reverse Run/Stop Command 1: Reverse run 0: Stop
Contact output (Terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
0009H
Bit 1 PHC1(Contact P1-PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 PHC2(Contact P2-PC)
Bit 3 to 5 Not used
Bit 6
1: ON 0: OFF
Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC)
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
Reference selection settings
000FH
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 0
Bit 1
Not used
Use MEMOBUS 0006H PID target value 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 2 to B Not used
C
D
E
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F Broadcast data terminal S8 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Individual Functions
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No.
0020H
0021H
0022H
0023H
0024H
0025H
0026H
0027H
0028H
0029H
002AH
002BH
Contents
Inverter status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Error 1: Error
Data setting error 1: Error
Multi-function contact output (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 1 (terminal P1 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 2 (terminal P2 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to B Not used
Error details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Inverter overload (OL2)
Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2) Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Fuse blown (PUF)
PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
External fault (EF, EFO) Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Hardware error (CPF)
Motor overload (OL1), overtorque 1 (OL3) detected, or overtorque 2 (OL4) detected
PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D
Bit E
Main Circuit Voltage Fault (PF), Output Open-phase (LF)
MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Bit F
Data link status
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Writing data
Not used
Not used
Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F Not used
Speed reference (U1-01)
Output frequency (U1-02)
Output voltage reference (U1-06)
Output current (U1-03) (Unit: 1/0.1A)
Output power (U1-08)
Torque reference (U1-09)
Not used
Not used
Sequence input status
Bit 0 Multi-function contact input terminal S1 1: ON, 0: OFF
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Multi-function contact input terminal S2 1: ON, 0: OFF
Multi-function contact input terminal S3 1: ON, 0: OFF
Multi-function contact input terminal S4 1: ON, 0: OFF
Multi-function contact input terminal S5 1: ON, 0: OFF
Bit 5
Bit 6
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 1: ON, 0: OFF
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 1: ON, 0: OFF
Bit 7 Multi-function contact input terminal S8 1: ON, 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
6-
89
6
-90
Register No.
Contents
Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero-speed 1: Zero-speed
Bit 2 Frequency (speed) matching 1: Matched
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
User-defined speed matching
Frequency detection 1
Frequency detection 2
1: Matched
1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
1: Startup completed
002CH
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Inverter startup completed
Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9
Bit A
Speed (frequency) reference mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Run Command mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit B Overtorque detection 1: Detected
002DH
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Speed (frequency) reference lost 1: Lost
Retrying error 1: Retrying
Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Multi-function contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 1 (terminal P1 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function PHC output 2 (terminal P2 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 3 to F Not used
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
0032H
0033H
Torque monitor (Unit: 1/0.1%)
Output power (U1-08)
0034H - 0037H Not used
0038H PID feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. speed; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H
003AH
003BH
003CH
PID input quantity (±100%/±Max. speed; 10/1%; with sign)
PID output quantity (±100%/±Max. speed; 10/1%; with sign)
CPU software number
Flash software number
003DH
003EH
003FH
Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1
Bit 2
Invalid data length
Not used
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Parity error
Overrun error
Framing error
Time-out
Bits 7 to F Not used kVA setting
Control method
Note Communications error details are stored until an fault reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
Individual Functions
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Address
Contents
0001H
0002H
Operation signal
Bit 0 Run Command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3 Not used
Bit 4
Bit 5
External fault 1: Error (set using H1-01)
Fault reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Bits 6 to B Not used
Bit C Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Frequency reference
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S8 input
30000/100%
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
ENTER Command
When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the constants are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter. To enable these constants in the constant data area, use the ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H.
Register No.
0900H
0910H
Contents
Write constant data to EEPROM
Constant data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
INFO
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100 thousand. Do not frequently execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
6-
91
6
-92
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code
01H
02H
03H
21H
22H
23H
24H
Contents
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing constants.
• When writing constants, the constant setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write constants from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write constants other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing constants from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during constants processing
Attempting to write constants from the PLC while processing constants in the Inverter.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function. If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
•
•
When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
•
•
When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
When the command message data length is invalid.
Application Precautions
Set a timer in the master to monitor response time from the slaves. Make the setting so that if no response is sent to the master from the slave within the set time, the same command message is sent again from the master.
Individual Functions
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface circuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communications parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Inverter, and checks if communications are being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter, and set 67 (communications test mode) in constant H1-05 (Terminal S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again.
Fig 6.50 Details of Communications Terminals
“Pass” will be displayed if self-diagnosis is completed without an error occurring.
If an error occurs, a CE (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
Using the Timer Function
Multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S8 can be designated as timer function input terminals, and multifunction output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC can be designated as timer function output terminals. By setting the delay time, you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches.
•
•
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8) to 18 (timer function input).
Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 12
(timer function output).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b4-01
Timer function ONdelay time
Sets the timer function output
ON-delay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in
1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 or H2-
.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s No No A A 1A3H
6-
93
6
-94
Constant
Number
Name b4-02
Timer function OFFdelay time
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Sets the timer function output
OFF-delay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in
1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 or H2-
.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s No No A A 1A4H
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.51 Timer Function Operation Example
Using PID Control
PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combining proportional control (P), integral control (I), and derivative control (D), you can even control targets
(machinery) with play time.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.
P control Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback value to the target value. I control is not suited, however, to rapid variations.
D control Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation. Can respond promptly to rapid variations.
Individual Functions
PID Control Operation
To understand the differences between each PID control operation (P, I, and D, the variation in the amount of operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
Amount of operation
PID control
I control
D control
P control
Time
Fig 6.52 PID Control Operation
PID Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
Application
Control Details
Speed Control
• Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed to the target value.
• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Pressure
Control
Flow Rate
Control
Temperature Control
Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control.
Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately.
Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control by rotating the fan.
Example of Sensor Used
Tachometer generator
Pressure sensor
Flow rate sensor
• Thermocouple
• Thermistor
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b5-01
PID control method selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled (speed reference + PID output, D control of deviation)
4: PID control enabled (speed reference + PID output, D control of feedback value).
0 to 4 0 No No A A 1A5H
6-
95
6
-96
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register b5-02 b5-03 b5-04
Proportional gain (P)
Sets P-control proportional gain as a percentage.
P-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
Integral (I) time
Integral (I) limit
Sets I-control integral time in
1-second units.
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum speed.
b5-05
Derivative
(D) time b5-06 PID limit b5-07 b5-08
PID offset adjustment
Sets D-control derivative time in 1-second units.
D-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
Sets the limit after PID-control as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Sets the offset after PID-control as a percentage of the maximum speed.
PID primary delay time constant
Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PID-control outputs in 1-second units.
Not usually necessary to set.
b5-09 b5-10 b5-11 b5-12
PID output characteristics selection
Select forward/reverse for
PID output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
(highlights the output code)
PID output gain
Sets output gain.
PID reverse output selection
0: 0 limit when PID output is negative.
1: Reverses when PID output is negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit is selected using b1-04.
Selection of
PID feedback command loss detection
0: No detection of loss of PID feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID feedback.
Operation continues during detection, with the malfunctioning contact not operating.
2: Detection of loss of PID feedback.
Coasts to stop during detection, and fault contact operates.
0.00
to
25.00
0.0 to
360.0
0.0 to
100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0.0 to
100.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0 or 1
0.0 to
25.0
0 or 1
0 to 2
1.00
1.0 s
100.0% Yes
0.00 s Yes
100.0% Yes
0.0%
0.00 s
0
1.0
0
0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1A6H
1A7H
1A8H
1A9H
1AAH
1ABH
1ACH
1ADH
1AEH
1AFH
1B0H
Individual Functions
Constant
Number b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17
H6-01
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
PID feedback command loss detection level
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percent units, with the maximum speed at 100%.
PID feedback command loss detection time
PID sleep function operation level
PID sleep operation delay time
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level in s units.
Set the PID sleep function start level as a speed.
(Enabled if PID control is not selected.)
Set the delay time until the
PID sleep function starts in seconds.
Accel/decel time for PID reference
Set the accel/decel time for
PID reference in seconds.
Pulse train input function selection
0: Speed reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
0 to 100 0%
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
100.0
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
25.5
0 to 2
1.0 s
0.0%
0.0 s
0.0 s
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1B1H
1B2H
1B3H
1B4H
1B5H
42CH
Monitor Functions
Constant
Number
Name Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
U1-24
U1-36
U1-37
U1-38
PID feedback value
PID input volume
PID output volume
PID target value
Monitors the feedback value when PID control is used.
The input for the maximum speed corresponds to
100%.
*
10 V: Max. speed
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
PID feedback volume
Given as maximum speed/
100%
(
10 V: Max. speed
− 10 to 10 V possible)
PID control output
Given as maximum speed/
100%
PID target value
Given as maximum speed/
100%
(
10 V: Max. speed
− 10 to 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. speed
* The unit is set in 01-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
57H
63H
64H
65H
6-
97
6
-98
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-06)
Setting
Value
Function
19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control)
31 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
34 PID soft starter ON/OFF
35 PID input characteristics switch
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Setting
Value
B
C
Function
PID feedback
PID target value
Contents (100%)
Maximum speed
Maximum speed
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
PID Control Methods
There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting constant b5-01.
Set Value
1
2
3
4
Control Method
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID target value and feedback value.
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID target value and feedback value.
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
PID feedback value.
PID Input Methods
Enable PID control using constant b5-01, and set the PID target value and PID feedback value.
PID Target Value Input Methods
Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the speed reference selected in b1-01 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target value as shown in the following table.
PID Target Input Method
Multi-Function Analog Terminal A2, or A3 Input
MEMOBUS register 0006H
Pulse train input
Setting Conditions
Set H3-05 or H3-09 to C (PID target value). Also, be sure to set H6-01 (pulse train input function selection) to 1 (PID feedback value).
The negative inputs cannot be used for target values.
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PID target value from communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PID target value.
Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).
Individual Functions
PID Feedback Input Methods
Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods.
Input Method Setting Conditions
Multi-function analog input
Pulse train input
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).
Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.
INFO
PID Adjustment Methods
Use the following procedure to adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response waveform.
1. Set b5-01 (PID Control Method Selection) to 1 or 2 (PID control enabled).
2. Increase b5-02 (Proportional Gain (P)) to within a range that does not vibrate.
3. Reduce b5-03 (Integral (I) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
4. Increase b5-05 (Derivative (D) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
PID Fine Adjustment Methods
This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control constants.
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce derivative time (D), and increase integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
6-
99
6
-100
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen derivative time
(D).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, the integral operation is too strong.
Lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short, and the cycle is almost identical to the derivative time (D) set value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the derivative time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the derivative time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Individual Functions
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
In PID control, the b5-04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a specified amount. If the load changes rapidly, the machine may be damaged or the motor may stall because of unpredictable response from the Inverter. In this case, reduce the set value.
The b5-06 constant is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
The b5-07 constant is used to adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum speed to be 100%.
Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this constant to prevent machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to reduce Inverter responsiveness.
Using b5-09, you can invert the PID output polarity. Consequently, if you increase the PID target value, you can apply this constant to applications to lower the Inverter output frequency.
Using b5-10, you can apply gain to the PID control output. Enable this constant to adjust the amount of compensation if adding PID control output to the speed reference as compensation.
When PID control output is negative, you can use constant b5-11 to invert the Inverter. When b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (enabled), however, PID output limit is 0.
With the Inverter, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in constant b5-17, you can increase or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/ deceleration function (constant C1) used normally, however, is allocated after PID control, so depending on the settings, resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens, reduce constant C1 until hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b5-
17. Also, you can disable the set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using multifunction input set value 34 (PID soft starter).
6-
101
PID Control Block
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter.
Output frequency (U1-02)
6
-102
Fig 6.53 PID Control Block
Individual Functions
PID Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. If PID feedback is lost, the Inverter speed reference may accelerate to the maximum speed.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and continues for the time set in b5-14, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator and Inverter operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital
Operator, the error contact will operate, and Inverter operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.
PID feedback value
Loss detection level
(b5-13)
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
Time
No FbL detection
FbL detection
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
Fig 6.54 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID sleep function delay time continues while the PID control target value is at an insufficient level to operate the PID sleep function. When the PID sleep delay time continues and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level, Inverter operation will automatically resume.
When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function, select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.
PID target value
Sleep operation level b5-15
Sleep operation delay time b5-16
Internal Run Command
Operation
External Run Command
Operating
Sleep operation delay time b5-16
Stopped
Run Command has been input
Operation status output
Fig 6.55 PID Sleep Time Chart
6-
103
6
-104
Torque Control (SPEC: C or Later Only)
With flux vector control for PM, the motor's output torque can be controlled by a torque reference from an analog input. Set d5-01 to 1 to control torque.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register d5-01 d5-02 d5-03 d5-05
Torque control selection
0: Speed control (C5-01 to
C5-07)
1: Torque control
To use the function for switching between speed and torque control, set to 0 and set the multi-function input to
“speed/torque control change.”
Torque reference delay time
Set the torque reference delay time in ms units.
This function can be used to adjust the noise of the torque control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation occurs during torque control, increase the set value.
Speed limit selection
Set the speed limit command method for the torque control method.
1: The analog input limit from a speed reference (see b1-01)
2: Limited by d5-04 constant setting values.
d5-04 Speed limit
Speed limit bias
0 or 1
0 to
1000
1 or 2
0
0 ms
*
1
Set the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum speed.
This function is enabled when d5-03 is set to 2. Directions are as follows.
+: Run Command direction
-: Run Command opposite
direction
Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Bias is given to the specified speed limit. It can be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit.
-120 to
+120
0%
0 to 120 5%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
29AH
29BH
29CH
29DH
29EH
Individual Functions
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register d5-06
Speed/ torque control switching timer
Set the delay time from inputting the multi-function input
“speed/torque control change”
(from On to OFF or OFF to
ON) until the control is actually changed, in ms units.
This function is enabled when the multi-function input
“speed/torque control change” is set. In the speed/torque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold the values of when the “speed/torque control change” changes. Always be sure to allow time for this process to finish completely.
H3-04
H3-05
Signal level selection
(terminal
A3)
Multi-function analog input (terminal A3) function selection
0: 0 to 10 V
1: − 10 to 10 V
Select from the functions listed in the following table.
Refer to the next page.
H3-08
Signal level selection
(terminal
A2)
Sets the input gain (level) when 10V is input.
Set according to the 100% value selected from H3-05.
Sets the input gain (level) when 0V is input.
Set according to the 100% value selected from H3-05.
0: 0 to +10V, with lower limit
1: − 10 to +10 V, lower limit
2: 4 to 20 mA.
without
Switch current and voltage input using the switch on the control panel.
H3-09
Multi-function analog input
(terminal
A2) function selection
Select multi-function analog input function for terminal
A2. Refer to the next table.
H3-10
H3-11
Gain
(terminal
A2)
Bias
(terminal
A2)
Sets the input gain (level) when 10 V (20 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value for the function set for
H3-09.
Sets the input gain (level) when 0 V (4 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value for the function set for
H3-09.
0 to 1F
-
0 to
1000
0 or 1
100.0 to
+100.0
0 to 2
0 to 1F
-100.0
to
+100.0
50 ms
0
1F
0.0 to
1000.0 100.0%
0.0%
2
0
0.0 to
1000.0 100.0%
0.0%
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No 29FH
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
413H
414H
415H
416H
417H
418H
419H
A 41AH
6-
105
6
-106
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-06)
Setting
Value
Function
71 Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
78 Polarity reversing command for external torque reference
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
No Yes No
No Yes No
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-03)
Setting
Value
32
Function
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
Output if the external torque reference is limited (the internal torque reference is less than the external torque reference) when the torque control is selected.
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
No Yes No
Multi-function Analog Inputs (H3-05, H3-09)
Setting
Value
0
13
14
Function
Add to terminal A1
Torque reference/torque limit at speed control
Torque compensation
Contents (100%)
Maximum speed
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
Yes Yes Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Monitor Function
Constant
Number
Name Description
U1-09
Torque reference
Monitor in internal torque reference value for vector control.
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
10 V: Motor rated torque
( − 10 to 10 V possible)
0.1% No A A 48H
Individual Functions
Inputting Torque References and Torque Reference Directions
The torque reference can be changed according to an analog input by setting H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 selection) to 13 (torque reference) or 14 (torque compensation). The torque reference input methods are listed in the following table.
Torque Reference Input
Method
Reference Location
Selection
Method
Remarks
Voltage input ( − 10 to 10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA)
Between A3 and AC
Between A2 and AC
(Turn OFF pin 2 of
SW1.)
Between A2 and AC
(Turn ON pin 2 of
SW1.)
H3-04 = 1
H3-05 = 13
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 13
Set H3-04 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque reference.
To switch the torque reference between positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
Set H3-08 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque reference.
To switch the torque reference between positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-09 to 14.
To switch the torque reference between positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-09 to 14.
Option card (AI-14B)
( − 10 to 10 V)
Between TC2 and TC4
F2-01 = 0
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-05 to 14.
The direction of the torque output from the motor will be determined by the sign of the analog signal input. It does not depend on the direction of the Run Command. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive analog reference: Torque reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
• Negative analog reference: Torque reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
6-
107
6
-108
Application Precautions
If the analog signal input level is 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA, a forward torque reference will not be applied. To apply reverse torque, use an input level of -10 V to 10 V or switch the direction using a multi-function input set to 78 (polarity Reverse Command for external torque reference).
Torque compensation from analog input
Torque reference from analog input
Speed limit from analog input from terminal A1
Speed limit d5-04
Torque primary delay filter d5-02 d5-03
Speed limit bias d5-05
Speed feedback
Speed limiter
Torque limit
Refer to torque limit setting via constants and analog input
Internal torque reference
Fig 6.56 Torque Control Block Diagram
Speed Limiter (Speed Limit Function)
If the external torque reference and load are not balanced during torque control, the motor will accelerate in either the forward or reverse direction. The speed limit function is used to limit the speed to a specified value and it consists of the speed limiter circuit.
When the motor speed exceeds the speed limit value during torque control, the speed limiter circuit generates the suppression torque proportional to the speed above the limit value and adds to the torque reference.
Individual Functions
Application Precautions
There are two ways to set a speed limit: using an input from an analog input terminal and setting a speed limit in d5-04. The inputs methods for a speed limit are listed in the following table.
Speed Limit Input Method
Voltage input ( − 10 to 10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA)
Option card (AI-14B)
( − 10 to 10 V)
Location of Reference
Set in d5-04
Between A1 and AC
Between A2 and AC
Between A2 and AC
Between TC1 and TC4
Constant Settings d5-03 = 2 b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 1
Remarks
Set H3-01 to 0 if the speed limit is always to be positive.
b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 1 b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 1 b1-01 = 3
F2-01 = 0
The value will be added to the value input on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Set H3-03 to 0 if the speed limit input on
A2 is always to be positive.
Turn OFF (V side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1 on the terminal board.
The value will be added to the value input on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Turn ON (I side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1 on the terminal board.
If H3-09 is set to 0, the sum of the input between TC2 and TC4 will be added the input between TC1 and TC4 to determine the speed limit.
IMPORTANT
The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal and the direction of the Run Command.
• Positive voltage applied: The speed in the forward direction will be limited for forward operation.
• Negative voltage applied: The speed in the reverse direction will be limited for reverse operation.
If the direction of motor rotation and the command direction are not the same, speed will be limited to 0 as long as b5-05 is set to 0.
Torque Limit Operation Examples
Operation examples will be described separately for winding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in the same directions, and rewinding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in opposite directions.
Winding Operation
In a winding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the same direction. For the winding operation, both the speed limit and the torque reference input are positive. The motor will accelerate when the torque reference input is larger than the load and will decelerate when it is smaller than the load. If the motor turns faster than the sum of the speed limit and d5-05 (speed limit bias), a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. When the speed then drops below the speed limit, a positive compensation value is output. The torque compensation is proportional to the ASR proportional gain. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant speed.
Rewinding Operation
In a rewinding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the opposite directions. (In this example, we’ll assume that the line speed is positive and the torque reference input is negative.) For the rewinding operation, the speed limit is positive and the torque reference input is negative. If the motor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. If the motor is rotating in reverse, a negative compensation value is output. If the speed is 0 or is below the sum of the
6-
109
6
-110 speed limit and d5-05 (speed limit bias), a 0 compensation value is output. In this way, the output from the speed limiter is used to maintain the motor speed between 0 and the speed limit. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant speed.
Winding Operation Rewinding Operation
Line direction N T N T
T N
Line direction
T N
X X X X
Configuration
Line direction
M M M
Normal Rotation
Direction
Torque Reference
Polarity (TREF)
Speed Limit Polarity (SLIM)
Forward Reverse Forward
Generated Torque
Torque limit
Torque
64'(
Ǎ0
64'(
%
Δ 0
Speed
Torque limit
Torque limit
㧔F㧕
5.+/
Torque
Speed
64'(
Ǎ0
Ǎ0
64'(
%
Torque limit
Torque limit
Torque
㧔F㧕
5.+/
Speed
Ǎ0
64'(
Ǎ0
64'(
%
Torque limit
M
Line direction
Reverse
Torque limit
Ǎ0
64'(
Torque
Speed
5.+/
㧔F㧕
Ǎ0
64'(
%
Torque limit
Torque Reference Adjustment
Consider the following information when adjusting the torque.
Torque Reference Delay Time: d5-02
The time constant of the primary filter in the torque reference section can be adjusted. This constant is used to eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness to the host controller. Increase the setting if oscillation occurs during torque control.
Setting the Torque Compensation
Set multi-function analog input A2 or A3 to torque compensation (setting 14). When the amount of torque loss for mechanical loss or other factor at the load is input to one of these terminals, it is added to the torque reference to compensate for the loss. The direction of torque will be as follows:
•
•
Positive voltage (current): Torque compensation reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
Negative voltage: Torque compensation reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque compensation can be input when the 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected. If you want to input reverse torque compensation, be sure to select the − 10 to 10 V signal level.
Individual Functions
Speed/Torque Control Switching Function
It is possible to switch between speed control and torque control when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-06) is set to 71 (Speed/Torque Control Change). Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and torque control is performed when the input is ON. Set d5-01 to switch speed/torque control.
Setting the Speed/Torque Control Switching Timer
The delay between a change in the speed/control switching function input (ON to OFF or OFF to ON) and the corresponding change in the control method can be set in d5-06. During the timer delay, the value of the 3 analog inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/OFF status of speed/torque control switching signal was changed. Use this delay to complete any changes required in external signals.
Application Precautions
• The speed reference (during speed control) is set in b1-01. The speed limit during torque control is set in d5-03.
•
•
•
If the torque reference has been assigned to a multi-function analog input, terminal A2, or terminal A3, the input function changes when the control method is switched between torque control and speed control.
During speed control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input.
During torque control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input.
When the Run Command turns OFF, the control method when stopped will be for speed control. Even from the torque control method, the system will automatically change to speed control and decelerate to a stop when the Run Command turns OFF.
When A1-02 (control method selection) is set to 3 (flux vector control), the speed/torque change command
(a setting of 71) can be set for a multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-06) to switch between speed and torque control during operation. An example is shown below.
Terminal No.
User Constant No.
Factory Setting
S8 H1-06 8
A1
A3 b1-01 d5-03
H3-05
1
1
0
Setting
71
1
1
13
Function
Speed/torque control change
Speed reference selection
(terminals A1, A2)
Speed limit (terminals A1, A2)
Torque reference/torque limit
A timing chart for switching between speed and torque control is shown in the following figure.
CLOSED CLOSED
OPEN OPEN
Speed/torque change signal
(terminal S8 input)
Run
Run Command
Stop
Control mode Speed (decel to stop)
Terminal A1 input
Terminal A3 input
Speed
Speed reference
Torque limit
Torque
Speed limit
Speed
Speed reference
Torque limit
Torque reference
Torque
Speed limit
Torque reference
Fig 6.57 Speed/Torque Control Switching Time Chart.
6-
111
6
-112
Speed Control (ASR) Structure
Speed control (ASR) adjusts the torque reference so that the deviation between the speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback) is 0.
The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed control.
Speed reference
Detected speed
+
−
Torque limits
C5-01, C5-03
P
I
I limit
C5-02, C5-04 C5-08
+
+
Primary filter
C5-06
(C5-10)
For Flux Vector Control for PM
L7-01 to L7-04
Torque reference
Speed reference
Estimated speed
+
−
Torque limits
C5-01, C5-03
P
I
I limit
C5-02, C5-04 C5-08
+
+
Primary filter
C5-06
(C5-10)
For Open-loop Vector Control for PM
L7-01 to L7-04
Fig 6.58 Speed Control Block Diagrams
Torque reference
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
C5-01
ASR proportional
(P) gain 1
C5-02
ASR integral (I) time 1
Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop (ASR.)
Sets the integral time of the speed loop (ASR) in 1-second units.
0.00 to
300.00 10.00
0.000 to
10.000
0.500
s
*
*
C5-03
ASR proportional
(P) gain 2
Usually setting is not necessary.
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
P,I
C5-04
ASR integral (I) time 2
0
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
E1-04 Motor speed (Hz)
C5-06
ASR primary delay time
Sets the filter time constant for outputting torque references from the speed control loop (ASR). It is set in
1-second units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0.00 to
300.00 10.00
*
0.000 to
10.000
0.000 to
0.500
0.500
s
*
0.016 s
*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
21BH
21CH
21DH
21EH
220H
Individual Functions
Constant
Number
C5-07
ASR switching frequency
C5-08
Name
ASR integral (I) limit
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Sets the speed for switching between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and
Integral Time 1, 2 in % units.
The multi-function input “ASR switching proportional gain” has the priority.
Sets the upper limit for the integral
(I) amount for the speed control loop
(ASR) to a percentage of the rated load.
0.0 to
100.0
0 to
400
0.0%
400%
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
221H
222H
* The setting value will return to the factory setting if the control method is changed.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-06)
Setting
Value
Function
E Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled)
77 Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03)
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
No Yes Yes
No Yes No
6-
113
6
-114
Speed Control (ASR) Gain Adjustment
Use the following procedure to adjust C5-01 and C5-03 with the mechanical system and actual load connected.
At zero-speed, increase the setting of C5-01
(ASR P Gain 1) until no oscillation occurs.
At zero-speed, decrease the setting of C5-02
(ASR I Time 1) until no oscillation occurs.
Does oscillation develop when the motor operates at the maximum normal operating speed?
NO
Adjustment completed.
(When there is higher-level position control, adjust the position loop gain so that overshooting/undershooting doesn't occur.)
YES Decrease the setting of C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1).
Increase the setting of C5-02 (ASR I Time 1).
Fig 6.59 Adjustment for Flux Vector Control for PM
When the motor is rotating at minimum speed
(E1-09), increase the setting of C5-01 (ASR
P Gain 1) until no oscillation occurs.
When the motor is rotating at minimum speed
(E1-09), increase the setting of C5-02 (ASR I
Time 1) until no oscillation occurs.
Does oscillation develop when the motor operates at the maximum normal operating speed?
Any oscillation if motor started from a stopped state?
NO
Adjustment completed.
YES Decrease the setting of C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1).
Increase the setting of C5-02 (ASR I Time 1).
Fig 6.60 Adjustment for Open-loop Vector Control for PM
INFO
For oscillation, increasing the setting of C5-06 (ASR primary delay time) may be effective. By increasing the setting, the control responsiveness may slow down, so make adjustments until the control responsiveness is within the range necessary for the machines.
Individual Functions
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. Constant settings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to monitor the speed waveform.
Constant
No.
H4-01
H4-02
H4-03
Name
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM monitor selection
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM output gain
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM bias
Setting
20
1.00
0.0
Explanation
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 1 to be used to monitor the speed reference after a soft-start.
H4-04
H4-05
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM monitor selection
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM output gain
5
1.00
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 2 to be used to monitor the motor speed.
H4-06
H4-07
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM bias selection
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal signal level selection
0.00
1
H4-08 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal signal level selection 1
Settings that allow a − 10 to 10 V signal range to be monitored.
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings.
• Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM): Outputs speed reference after a soft-start ( − 10 to 10 V).
• Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM): Outputs actual motor speed ( − 10 to 10 V).
Terminal AC is the multi-function analog output common.
We recommend monitoring both the speed reference after a soft-start and the motor speed to monitor the response delay or deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 (C5-01)
This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness is increased when this setting is increased. Usually this setting is higher for larger loads. Oscillation will occur if this setting is increased too much.
The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR proportional gain is changed.
Motor speed
The proportional gain is high.
(Oscillation occurs when the gain is too high.)
The proportional gain is low.
Time
Fig 6.61 Responsiveness for Proportional Gain
6-
115
Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 (C5-02)
This constant sets the speed control (ASR) integral time.
Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness, and weakens the resistance to external influences.
Oscillation will occur if this setting is too short. The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed.
Motor speed
Short integral time
Long integral time
6
-116
Time
Fig 6.62 Responsiveness for Integral Time
Different Gain Settings for Low-speed and High-speed
Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the mechanical system at low speed or high speed. The proportional gain P and integral time I can be switched according to the motor speed, as shown below.
P, I
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04 (Low speed)
Motor speed (Hz)
C5-07
If C5-07 is set to 0, P = C5-01 and I = C5-02.
Fig 6.63 Low-speed and High-speed Gain Settings
Setting the Gain Switching Speed (C5-07)
Set the switching speed to about 80% of the motor operating speed or the speed at which oscillation occurs.
Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03, C5-04)
Connect the actual load and adjust these constants at zero-speed operation in the flux vector control for PM or at minimum speed operation in the open-loop vector control for PM. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain
2) until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) until there is no oscillation.
High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-01, C5-02)
Adjust these constants at normal operating speed. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) until there is no oscillation. Refer to Fine Adjustments on page 6-115 for details on making fine adjustments of high-speed operation.
Individual Functions
ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting
When one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-06) is set to 77, the input can be used to switch between
C5-01 (proportional gain 1) and C5-03 (proportional gain 2). Proportional gain 2 is used when the multi-function input is ON. This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07.
ON
ASR Gain Switch signal
(a multi-function input)
OFF
Proportional gain (P)
Proportional gain determined by motor speed.
C5-03 gain setting
C5-02 C5-02
The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 (C5-02).
Fig 6.64 ASR Proportional Gain Switch
Droop Control Function (SPEC: C or Later Only)
Droop control allows the motor to have speed drooping characteristics commensurate with the load torque.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name b7-01
Droop control gain b7-02
Droop control delay time
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Sets the speed drop as a percentage of maximum speed when the maximum speed is specified and the rated torque occurs.
Droop-control is not performed when the setting is
0.0.
Droop control responsiveness constant
When hunting or oscillation occurs, increase the value.
0.0 to
100.0
0.03 to
2.00
0.0
0.05 s
Yes
Yes
No
No
A
A
No
No
1CAH
1CBH
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
Droop control is disabled if b7-01 is set to 0.0.
Set b7-01 to the amount of speed in %, as a percentage of the maximum speed, when the rated torque is generated.
Constant b7-02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control. Increase this setting if oscillation or hunting occur.
6-
117
6
-118
Setting the Droop Control Gain
Set the droop control gain as the speed reduction at a 100% motor torque, as a percentage of the maximum speed.
Torque b7-01
100%
0 Speed reference
Fig 6.65 Droop Control Gain
Speed
Digital Operator Functions
Digital Operator Functions
This section explains the Digital Operator functions.
Setting Digital Operator Functions
You can set Digital Operator-related constants such as selecting the Digital Operator display, multi-function selections, and copy functions.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register o1-02
Monitor selection after power up o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.
1: Speed reference
2: Motor speed
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the speed reference and speed monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum output frequency is
100%)
2 to 39: min
-1
units (Sets the motor poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.
1 to 4
0 to
39999
1
1
Yes
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
501H
502H o2-01
LOCAL/
REMOTE key enable/ disable
Set 4-digit number excluding the decimal point.
Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set 12000
Sets the Digital Operator
Local/Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital
Operator and the constant settings.)
0 or 1 1 No A A A 505H
6-
119
6
-120
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register o2-02 o2-03 o2-05 o2-07 o2-10
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
User constant initial value
Speed reference setting method selection
Cumulative operation time setting
Sets the Stop Key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the Run
Command is issued from and external terminal, the
Stop Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set constants as user initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)
When the set constants are recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
When the speed reference is set on the Digital Operator speed reference monitor, sets whether the Enter Key is necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the speed reference without Enter Key operation.
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from the set values.
Fan operation time setting
Set the initial value of the fan operation time using time units.
The operation time accumulates from the set value.
0 or 1
0 to 2
0 or 1
0 to
65535
0 to
65535
1
0
0
0 hr
0 hr
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
506H
507H
509H
50BH
50EH
Changing Speed Reference and Display Units
Set the Digital Operator speed reference and display units using constant o1-03. You can change the units for the following constants using o1-03.
•
•
U1-01 (Speed reference)
U1-02 (Output frequency)
•
•
•
U1-05 (Motor speed)
U1-20 (Speed reference after soft start) d1-01 to d1-17 (Speed references)
Digital Operator Functions
Switching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON
Using constant o1-02, select the monitor item (U1 [status monitor]) to be displayed on the Digital Operator when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1 in Chapter 5
User Constants .
Setting Precautions
If selecting monitor constants other than U1-01 (Speed Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency), and U1-03
(Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01, and then set o1-02 to 4.
Disabling the STOP Key
If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2, or 3, the Stop Command from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is an emergency Stop Command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency Stop Commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. You cannot switch Inverter reference inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operator, b1-01 (Reference Selection), or b1-02
(Operation Method Selection).
Initializing Changed Constant Values
You can save to the Inverter constant set values that you have changed as constant initial values. Change the set values from the Inverter factory settings, and then set o2-03 to 1.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the Inverter constants using the user-set initial values in memory. To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Speed Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the Enter
Key
Use this function when inputting speed references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you can increment and decrement the speed reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter Key.
For example, enter the Run Command using a 0% reference, and then continuously press the UP Key to increment the speed reference by 0.01% only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.01% every 80 ms for 3 s thereafter.
Press and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum speed 10 s after that. The speed reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys are released.
Clearing Cumulative Operation Time
Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(Inverter Operating Time).
Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time
Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling
Fan Operating Time).
6-
121
6
-122
Copying Constants
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).
•
•
•
Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants (VERIFY)
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description o3-01
Copy function selection o3-02
Read permitted selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to
Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to
Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0 to 3 0
0 or 1 0
No A A A 515H
No A A A 516H
COPY Function Selection (SPEC: C or Later Only)
The available COPY functions (o3-01 “Copy function selection”) differ depending on the SPEC of Inverter as shown in the table below.
READ Source
COPY Destination
READ (Inverter
READ (Inverter
→ Operator)
→ Operator)
VERIFY
Inverter with
SPEC: B or earlier
(PRG:103 )
Inverter with
SPEC: B or earlier
(PRG:103 )
Available
Available
Available
Inverter with
SPEC: B or earlier
(PRG:103 )
Inverter with
SPEC: C or earlier
(PRG:104 )
Available
Available
*
N/A
* The initial values of user constants that have been stored using the constant o2-03 cannot be copied.
Inverter with
SPEC: C or earlier
(PRG:104 )
Inverter with
SPEC: B or earlier
(PRG:103 )
Available
N/A
N/A
Inverter with
SPEC: C or earlier
(PRG:104 )
Inverter with
SPEC: C or earlier
(PRG:104 )
Available
Available
Available
Digital Operator Functions
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method. Set 03-02
(Read permitted selection) to 1 (read permitted).
Table 6.1 READ Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display Explanation
1
Press the Menu Key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
3
4
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement Key.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants setting display.
5
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment
Key.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER
Key. The READ function will start.
7
If the READ function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-
01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the display returns to o3-01.
An error may occur while saving to memory. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write operation.
Select READ Permitted
Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you set o3-01 to 1, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the write operation will be stopped.
6-
123
6
-124
Writing Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, make the settings using the following method.
Table 6.2 COPY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display Explanation
1
Press the MENU Key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
3
4
5
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement Key.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants setting display.
Change the set value to 2 using the Increment
Key.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER
Key. The COPY function will start.
7
If the COPY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the display returns to o3-01.
During the copy operation, errors may occur. If an error is displayed, set the constants again. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning
Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.
Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital
Operator are different.
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter control method stored in the Digital Operator are different.
Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital Operator shows they are different.
After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the Inverter constant area and the sum value of the Digital Operator constant area shows they are different.
Digital Operator Functions
Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values, make the settings using the following method.
Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display Explanation
1
Press the MENU Key. and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
3
4
5
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement Key.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the function setting display.
Change the set value to 3 using the Increment
Key.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER
Key. The VERIFY function will start.
7
If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant o3-
01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the display returns to o3-01.
An error may occur during the comparison. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).
Application Precautions
• When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type • Inverter capacity and voltage
• Software number • Control method
•
•
Use the copy function off-line or with a communications option card removed.
A CPF03 fault (EEPROM error) can occur if the power is shut down while the Inverter constants are being copied. Do not shut down the power while copying the constants.
6-
125
6
-126
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 constant groups, and refer to drive mode, using the Digital Operator.
If you set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S8 function selection) to 1B (write constants permitted), you can write constants from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing constants other than the speed reference is prohibited. You can, however, reference constants.
Constant
Number
Name
A1-01
Constant access level
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring and setting the constants for drive mode,
A1-01, and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-
01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming
(A) mode.)
0 to 2 2 Yes A A A 101H
Digital Operator Functions
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot refer to or change the settings of constants A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all constants except A1-00 by using the password function in combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
A1-01
Constant access level
A1-04 Password
A1-05
Password setting
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring and setting the constants for drive mode,
A1-01, and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-
01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming
(A) mode.)
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed,
A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to
A2-32 constants can no longer be changed. (Programming mode constants can be changed.)
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant is not usually displayed. When the Password (A1-04) is displayed, hold down the RESET Key and press the Menu Key and the password will be displayed.
0 to 2
0 to
9999
0 to
9999
2
0
0
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
101H
104H
105H
Setting Precautions
Constant A1-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A1-05, hold down the RESET
Key and press the MENU Key while A1-04 is displayed.
6-
127
6
-128
Displaying User-set Constants Only
You can set and refer to constants necessary to the Inverter only, using the A2 constants (user-set constants) and A1-01 (Constants Access Level).
Set the number of the constant to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. You can set and refer to constants set in A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 only, using advanced programming mode.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting constants
Used to set the constant numbers that can be set/read. Maximum 32.
Effective when the Constant
Access Level (A1-01) is set to
User Program (1). Constants set in constants A2-01 to A2-
32 can be set/read in programming mode.
b1-01 to o3-02
No A A A
106H to
125H
Options
Options
This section explains the Inverter option functions.
Performing Speed Control with PG
This section explains functions with flux vector control for PM.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
F1-02
Operation selection at
PG open circuit (PGO)
F1-05 PG rotation
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, do not normally make this setting.)
0: Phase A leads with Forward Run Command.
(Phase B leads with
Reverse Run Command.)
1: Phase B leads with Forward Run Command.
(Phase A leads with
Reverse Run Command.)
0 to 3
0 or 1
1
1
*
F1-14
F1-18
F1-19
PG open-circuit detection time
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time. PGO will be detected if the detection time continues beyond the set time.
DV3 Detection selection
DV4 Detection selection
Sets the conditions of DV3 detection (inversion detection).
0: DV3 detection disabled n: DV3 detection enabled if
DV3 detection conditions are detected for 5 ms × n times in succession.
Sets the conditions of DV4 detection (inversion prevention detection).
0: DV4 detection disabled n: DV4 detection enabled if n pulses of A/B phase pulse inverted to the speed reference are detected.
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 5
0 to
5000
* The setting values will return to the factory settings if the control method is changed.
2.0 s
5
128
No
No
No
Νο
Νο
No
No
No
Νο
Νο
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
Νο
Νο
Νο
381H
384H
38DH
3ADH
3AEH
6-
129
6
-130
Using PG Speed Control Board
The following PG Speed Control Board can be used.
• PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
For the connection diagram, refer to page 2-35 to 2-35.
Number of PG Pulses
Yaskawa's standard PG (pulse generator or encoder) has a pulse number of 1024 PPR.
Options
Matching PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction
Constant F1-05 matches the PG rotation direction and the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating forwards, set whether it is A-phase driven or B-phase driven.
Inverter
Motor PG (encoder)
Forward
Command
A-phase driven when set value = 0
A-phase
B-phase
Pulse output
B-phase driven when set value = 1
A-phase
B-phase
Example: Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa motor (PG used: Samtack (KK))
Forward
Command
Motor output axis rotates counter-clockwise during Inverter Forward Command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
Yaskawa standard PG used is B-phase driven (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Fig 6.66 PG Rotation Direction Setting
Detecting PG Open Circuit
Select the stopping method when PG cable disconnected is detected and the PG open circuit (PGO) detection time.
When the Inverter is operating with the speed reference set to 1% minimum, if the speed feedback from PG is greater than the time setting in F1-14, PGO is detected.
Detecting Z-phase Pulse Fall
If a Z-phase pulse is not detected during one full turn of the motor, the Z-phase pulse fault (DV1) alarm will be activated.
Detecting Z-phase Noise Fault
If a Z-phase pulse is detected with improper timing (the difference in the Z-phase between this rotation and the last rotation is outside the allowable range of discrepancy per single turn of the motor ± 5 degrees) in a succession exceeding the setting of F1-17, then the Z-phase noise fault (DV2) alarm will be activated.
Detecting Motor Inversion
• During Inverter operation, if the torque reference is positive and the acceleration speed is negative, or vice versa, and the difference between the speed reference and the motor speed is greater than 30% and this condition is detected in succession more times than the time multiplication of the setting of F1-18 by 5 ms
(F1-18 × 5 ms), then the motor inversion fault (DV3) alarm will be activated.
6-
131
6
-132
• During Inverter operation, if the n pulses (setting of F1-19) of A/B-phase pulse inverted to the speed reference (F1-19) are detected, the inversion protection fault (DV4) alarm will be activated.
Using Digital Output Boards
There are two types of Inverter digital output boards:
• DO-02C
Relay contact output (DPDT contact)
• DO-08
6 photocoupler output channels (shared commons)
2 (independent) relay contact output channels (NC contact)
Inverter control panel
3CN 3CN
+24 V
NC NO
TD
1
2
3
NC NO
4
5
6
CH1
CH2
Relay contact
DO-02C Digital Output Board
Inverter control panel
3CN 3CN
Photocoupler
TD5
CH1
TD6
CH2
TD7
CH3
TD8
CH4
TD9
CH5
TD10
TD11
TD1
TD2
TD3
TD4
Photocoupler
CH6
COM (0 V common)
CH7
CH8
Relay contact
DO-08 Digital Output Board
Fig 6.67 Digital Output Boards
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
F5-01
Channel 1 output selection
Effective when a Digital Output Board (DO-02C or DO-
08) is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
F5-02
Channel 2 output selection
Effective when a Digital Output Board (DO-02C or DO-
08) is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
0 to 3D
0
0F
1
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
399H
39AH
F5-03
Channel 3 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
0F
2
No No A A 39BH
F5-04
Channel 4 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
0F
4
No No A A 39CH
Options
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
0F
F5-05
Channel 5 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
6
No No A A 39DH
F5-06
Channel 6 output selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 3D
F5-07
F5-08
F5-09
Channel 7 output selection
Channel 8 output selection
DO-08 output mode selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 3D
0 to 3D
0 to 2
0F
37
0F
0F
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
39EH
39FH
3A0H
3A1H
Setting Output Items for the DO-02C Digital Output Board
If using DO-02C Digital Output Board, set the output items using F5-01 and F5-02.
Setting Output Items for the DO-08 Digital Output Board
If using DO-08 Digital Output Board, select one of the following three output modes according to the setting in F5-09.
F5-09 Set to 0
Set Value
0: 8 separate outputs
Terminal
Number
TD5-TD11
TD6-TD11
TD7-TD11
Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
Overvoltage (OV)
Inverter overload (OL2)
Output Details
TD8-TD11
TD9-TD11
Fuse blown (PUF)
Overspeed (OS)
TD10-TD11 Inverter overheated (OH1) or motor overload (OL1)
TD1-TD2 Zero-speed detected
TD3-TD4 Speed agreement
6-
133
6
-134
F5-09 Set to 1
Set Value
1: Binary code output
Terminal
Number
TD5-TD11 bit 0
TD6-TD11
TD7-TD11
TD8-TD11 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3
TD9-TD11 Zero-speed detected
TD10-TD11 Speed agreement
TD1-TD2
TD3-TD4
Operating
Minor fault
Output Details
Encoded output
(Refer to table below)
The following table shows the code outputs.
Bits 3, 2, 1, and 0
0000
0001
Output Details
No error
Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
Overvoltage (OV)
Inverter overload (OL2)
Inverter overheated (OH, OH1)
Overspeed (OS)
Fuse blown (PUF)
Dynamic braking resistor (RH)
Injection brake transistor error (RR)
F5-09 Set to 2
Output depends on the settings in F5-01 to F5-08.
Bits 3, 2, 1, and 0
1000
Output Details
External fault (EFxx)
1001 Control board error (CPFxx)
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
Motor overload (OL1)
Not used
Power loss (UV1, UV2, or UV3)
Speed deviation (DEV)
PG open circuit (PGO)
1111 Not used
Using an Analog Reference Board (SPEC: C or Later Only)
AI-14B provides 3 channels of bi-polar inputs with 13-bit A/D conversion accuracy (and a + sign bit). The function of each channel is determined by the setting of F2-01.
AI-14U provides 2 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy. Channel 1 is a voltage input and channel 2 is a current input. The sum of channels 1 and 2 is a frequency input. F2-01 does not need to be set for the AI-14U.
Options
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
F2-01
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
Sets the functions for channel
1 to 3 which are effective when the AI-14B Analog Reference Board is used.
0: 3-channel individual
(Channel 1: terminal A1,
Channel 2: terminal A2,
Channel 3: terminal A3)
1: 3-channel addition (Addition values are the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-
01. In this case the multi-function input “Option/Inverter selection” cannot be used.
0 or 1 0 No A A A 38FH
Setting Precautions
Always set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 1 (control circuit terminal) when using the AI-14B for three channels of independent inputs. When this is done, H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function contact inputs) cannot be set to
2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Using a Digital Reference Board (SPEC: C or Later Only)
When using a DI-08 or DI-16H2 Digital Reference Board, set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3 (Option Card).
The DI-16H2 can be used to set a speed using a 16-bit digital reference. The DI-08 can be used to set a speed using a 8-bit digital reference.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
F3-01
Digital input option
Sets the Digital Reference
Board input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5digit input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the
DI-16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher, the input will be BCD, and the units will change to the o1-03 setting.
0 to 7 0 No A A A 390H
6-
135
6
-136
Constant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the speed reference and speed monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum output frequency is
100%)
2 to 39: min
-1
units (Sets the motor poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.
0 to
39999
1 No A A A 502H
Set 4-digit number excluding the decimal point.
Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set 12000
Options
Selecting Input Terminal Functions for the DI-16H2 Digital Reference Board
The speed reference from the DI-16H2 Board is determined by the setting of F3-01 and the 12/16-bit switch on the option card. The possible settings are listed in the following table.
Terminal Pin No.
1
12-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
S1: 12 bit
Bit 1 (2
0
)
16-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
S1: 16 bit
Bit 1 (2
0
)
3-digit BCD with
Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 12 bit
1
4-digit BCD with
Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 16 bit
5-digit BCD without Sign
F3-01 = 6
S1: 16 bit
1 2
2
3
Bit 1 (2
1
)
Bit 1 (2
2
)
Bit 1 (2
1
)
Bit 1 (2
2
)
2
4
BCD digit 1
(0 to 9)
2
4
BCD digit 1
(0 to 9)
4
8
BCD digit 1
(0, 2, 4, 6, 8)
TC1
4
5
6
7
8
Bit 1 (2
3
)
Bit 1 (2
4
)
Bit 1 (2
5
)
Bit 1 (2
6
)
Bit 1 (2
7
)
Bit 1 (2
3
)
Bit 1 (2
4
)
Bit 1 (2
5
)
Bit 1 (2
6
)
Bit 1 (2
7
)
8
1
2
4
8
BCD digit 2
(0 to 9)
8
1
2
4
8
BCD digit 2
(0 to 9)
1
2
4
8
1
BCD digit 2
(0 to 9)
TC2
TC3
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit 1 (2
8
)
Bit 1 (2
9
)
Bit 1 (2
10
)
Bit 1 (2
11
)
Bit 1 (2
8
)
Bit 1 (2
9
)
1
2
Bit 1 (2
10
) 4
Bit 1 (2
11
) 8
-
-
-
Bit 1 (2
12
)
Bit 1 (2
13
)
Bit 1 (2
14
)
Bit 1 (2
15
)
Sign signal (0: Forward, 1: Reverse)
SET (read) signal (1: Read)
Input signal common (0 V)
Shield wire connection terminal
BCD digit 3
(0 to 9)
-
-
-
-
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
BCD digit 3
(0 to 9)
BCD digit 4
(0 to 9)
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
BCD digit 3
(0 to 9)
BCD digit 4
(0 to 9)
BCD digit 5
(0 to 3)
Application Precautions
•
•
The maximum speed reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting: 6 or 7) and all bits are 1.
Setting F3-01 to 6 is valid only when the D1-16H2 is used. Using this setting, a frequency from 0.00 to
399.8 Hz can be set in BCD. The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set. Also, the digit starts from 0, so the minimum setting is 0.02 Hz.
6-
137
6
-138
Selecting the Input Terminal Function for a DI-08 Digital Reference Board
The speed reference from a DI-08 Board is determined by the setting of F3-01, as shown in the following table.
Terminal Pin No.
1
8-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
Bit 1 (2
0
)
2-digit BCD with Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
1
TC
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Bit 1 (2
1
)
Bit 1 (2
2
)
Bit 1 (2
3
)
Bit 1 (2
4
)
Bit 1 (2
5
)
Bit 1 (2
6
)
Bit 1 (2
7
)
Sign signal
SET (read) signal
Reference common signal (0 V)
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
BCD digit 1
(0 to 9)
BCD digit 2
(0 to 15)
Application Precautions
The DI-08 will not function if F3-01 is set to 6
Selecting the Digital Reference
The range of the digital references is determined by the combination of the settings of o1-03 and F3-01. The information monitored in U1-01 (Speed reference) will also change.
Options
DI-16H2 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-16H2, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
o1-03 F3-01
Switch
S1
Reference Input Mode
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1%
U1-01 Monitor Unit o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
0
Reference Setting
Range
-110 to 110%
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1% -110 to 110%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1% -110.0 to 110.0%
1
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
-110.0 to 110.0%
-15.99 to 15.99%
2
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
-110.0 to 110.0%
-400 to 400 Hz
3
0 or 1 16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
-400 to 400 Hz
-159.9 to 159.9 Hz
0.01 Hz 0.01%
4
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
-400.0 to 400.0 Hz
-15.99 to 15.99 Hz
5
6
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
16 bits 5-digit BCD without sign, 0.01 Hz
-159.99 to 159.99 Hz
000.00 to 399.98 Hz
2 to 39 x0040 to x9999
(x = 0 to 3) x1000
(x = 1 to 3)
7
-
-
-
-
12 bits 12-bit binary with sign, 100%/4095
16 bits 16-bit binary with sign, 100%/30000
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4digit setting of o1-03)
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4digit setting of o1-03)
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/10000
-4095 to 4095
-33000 to 33000
-1599 to 1599 rpm
-15999 to 15999 rpm
-1599 to 1599
-9999 to 9999
(when o1-03 = 9999)
-1000 to 1000
1 rpm
1 rpm
5th digit of o1-03 setting:
X = 0, unit: 1
X = 1, unit: 0.1
X = 2, unit: 0.01
X = 3, unit: 0.001
DI-08 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-08, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
F3-01 Reference Input Mode Reference Setting Range
U1-01 Monitor Unit o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
0 2-digit BCD with sign, 1% -110 to 110%
1 2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1% -15.9 to 15.9%
4
5
2
3
6
7
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
2-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
-1.59 to 1.59%
-159 to 159 Hz
-15.9 to 15.9 Hz
-1.59 to 1.59 Hz
-
8-bit binary with sign, 100%/255 -255 to 255
0.01 Hz 0.01%
6-
139
6
-140
Maintenance Timer Display Function (SPEC: C or
Later Only)
This function indicates that the estimated performance life of the cooling fan and electrolytic capacitor have been reached.
IMPORTANT
The maintenance time periods displayed in the monitors as a percentage to the total life are only an estimate, not an exact prediction of actual performance life.
Use them as guidelines for replacement.
Settings Required to Use Maintenance Timer Display Function
Set H2 to 2F to use a multi-function contact output for this function and display an alarm on the Digital
Operator (the constants U1-61 and U1-63).
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
The maintenance time period for the cooling fan or electrolytic capacitor can be output from the multi-function contact terminal by setting H2 to 2F. Minor faults will not be output.
Setting
Value
Function
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
Yes Yes Yes
Page
2F Maintenance timer display (ON: Maintenance timer for capacitors or fans.)
Refer to Multi-function Contact Output Functions in Chapter 5 User Constants for information on multi-function contact outputs.
Related Status Monitoring Constants
Constant
Number
Name Description
U1-40
Cooling fan operating time
Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan.
The time can be set in 02-
10.
U1-61
Electrolytic capacitor maintenance
Displays the estimated time for the electrolytic capacitor maintenance in % units.
(Can be set in o2-18.)
(100% is the estimated time for replacement.)
U1-63
Cooling fan maintenance timer
Cooling fan maintenance timer
(100% is the estimated time for replacement.)
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for
PM
Open
Loop
Vector for
PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
1 hr
1%
1%
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
67H
7CH
7EH
Maintenance Timer Display Function (SPEC: C or Later Only)
Related Alarm Displays
When setting a multi-function contact output H2 to 2F, the alarm is displayed on the Digital Operator as shown below.
Display
(blinking)
Meaning
Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance
Timer
Monitor U1-61 has reached 100%.
Probable causes
The electrolytic capacitors have reached their estimated maintenance time period.
Corrective Actions
Reset o2-18 to “0%” after replacing the electrolytic capacitors.
(blinking)
Cooling Fan Maintenance Timer
Monitor U1-63 has reached 100%.
The cooling fan has reached its estimated maintenance time period.
Replace the cooling fan and set o2-10 to “0H”.
Settings Required After Replacement of Cooling Fan or Electrolytic
Capacitor
•
•
Set o2-10 to 0 after replacing the cooling fan.
Set o2-18 to 0 after replacing the electrolytic bus capacitor.
Refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection for the replacement procedure.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name o2-10
Fan operation time setting o2-18
Capacitor maintenance setting
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Sequence
Test
Flux
Vector for PM
Open
Loop
Vector for PM
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
Set the initial value of the fan operation time using time units.
The operation time accumulates from the set value.
Clears the electrolytic capacitor maintenance (U1-61)
[setting:0] and sets the setting value in % unit.
0 to
65535
0 to
150
0 hr
0%
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
50EH
51DH
6-120
-
6-
141
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Inverter and motor problems and countermeasures.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................7-2
Troubleshooting .........................................................7-20
7
-2
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection, alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Be sure to turn Run Command to OFF first, use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restarting the Inverter.
•
•
•
Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-06) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the fault reset signal.
Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Meaning
Overcurrent
The Inverter output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level. (200% of rated current)
Probable Causes
• A short-circuit or ground fault occurred at the Inverter output. (A short or ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
• The load is too large or the acceleration/deceleration time is too short.
• A special-purpose motor or motor with a capacity too large for the
Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic contactor was switched at the Inverter output.
Corrective Actions
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Note) Before turning the power
ON again, make sure that no short-circuit or ground fault occurs at the Inverter output.
Ground Fault
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approximately 50% of the Inverter rated output current.
*
• A short-circuit between +V, − V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the speed setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or less.)
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter output. (A ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Note) Before turning the power
ON again, make sure that no short-circuit or ground fault occurs at the Inverter output.
• A short-circuit between +V, − V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the speed setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or less.)
* The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases.
y A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
y A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning
Fuse Blown
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
Probable Causes
• The output transistor has failed because of a short-circuit or ground fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit between the following terminals. A short-circuit will damage the output transistor:
B1 ( 3) ←→ U, V, W
←→ U, V, W
• Input power was supplied from the output side. (Improper wiring, the sequence for switching commercial power supply was wrong, etc.)
Corrective Actions
Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200 V Class: Approx. 410 V
400 V Class: Approx. 820 V
(E1-01 ≥ 400 V)
Approx. 720 V
(E1-01 < 400 V)
The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
Motor ground fault
(Ground fault current flowed to the capacitor in the control circuit of the
Inverter through the power supply.)
Improper PG cable connection
(PG noise, PG disconnection)
Increase the deceleration time or connect a braking resistor (or
Braking Resistor Unit).
Check the output cable, relay terminal, or motor terminal box and correct the cause of ground fault.
Check to see if the PG cable is connected properly.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it's within specifications.
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection Level
(L2-05).
200 V Class: Approx. 190 V
400 V Class: Approx. 380 V
Main Circuit Magnetic Connector
Operation Failure
The magnetic connector stopped responding during Inverter operation.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V Class: 37 to 75 kW
400 V Class: 75 to 300 kW
• An open-phase occurred with the input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large.
• A fault occurred in the surge prevention circuit.
• The magnetic contactor in the control circuit was released (Contact failure in the auxiliary contact).
• The contact of the magnetic contactor in the control circuit was corroded due to environmental dust or gas.
• Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
• Improve the power supply environment. (Check to see if the correct power tap is selected.)
• Improve the operating environment.
• Replace the Inverter.
Control Power Fault
The control power supply voltage dropped.
• The wiring of the control power circuit is incorrect.
• A Backup Capacitor Unit for
Momentary Power Loss is not attached to a 200 V/400 V Class
Inverter of 11 kW or less and the value of the Momentary power loss ridethru time (L2-02) factory setting has been changed to the larger value.
• Fix the wiring.
• Try turning the power supply off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
• Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss.
7-
3
7
-4
(
Display
)
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault
Malfunction in the inrush prevention circuit.
The magnetic contactor did not respond for 10 s even though the magnetic contactor ON signal has been output.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V Class: 37 to 75 kW
400 V Class: 75 to 300 kW
Probable Causes Corrective Actions
• The magnetic contactor in the main circuit failed.
• The magnetic contactor excitation coil is burned out.
• Try turning the power supply off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates unusually (not when regenerating).
This fault is detected when L8-05 is set to 1.
• An open-phase occurred in the input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases is bad.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the
Inverter output.
This fault is detected when L8-07 is set to 1 or 2.
• There is a broken wire in the output cable.
• There is a broken wire in the motorwinding.
• The output terminals are loose.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
The motor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the Inverter maximum applicable motor output.
Check the motor and Inverter capacity.
Output Current Imbalance
Each or one of the three phases of the output current is imbalanced or unequal.
• An open phase in the Inverter wiring on the output side.
• An open phase of the gate drive signal.
• An imbalance in the motor’s threephase impedance.
• Correct the wiring on the
Inverter’s output side. Tighten the terminal screw.
• Replace the gate drive board.
• Replace the motor.
Contact your Yaskawa representative for more information on replacing the gate drive board or the motor.
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-02 or the overheat protection level.
OH: The temperature exceeded the setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can be changed by L8-03.).
OH1: The temperature exceeded
100 ° C (Stopping method: Coast to stop).
There is a heat source nearby.
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
• A short-circuit between +V, − V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
Remove the heat source.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.)
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the speed setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or less.)
Inverter's Cooling Fan Fault
(11 kW or more)
This fault is detected when L8-32 is set to 1.
The ambient temperature is too high.
Install a cooling unit.
• The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
• The heatsink is clogged.
• Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.)
• Clean the heatsink.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault
An Inverter’s cooling fan fault was detected, and the Inverter-overload protection was activated based on the internal electric thermal value.
This fault is detected when L8-32 is set to 0.
The Inverter continued running with an overload after the cooling fan stopped.
Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.)
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Motor Overheating Fault
E was set for H3-05 or H3-09 and the motor temperature thermistor input exceeded the fault detection level.
The motor has overheated.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature input on terminals A2 and A3.
Check the setting of motor rated current (E2-01).
Installed Braking Resistor Overheating
The braking resistor is overheated and the protection function has operated if it has been enabled in L8-01.
The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
• Reduce the load, increase the deceleration time, or reduce the motor speed.
• Change to a Braking Resistor
Unit.
Internal Braking Transistor Fault
The braking transistor is not operating properly.
• The braking transistor is damaged.
• The Inverter’s control circuits are faulty.
• Try turning the power supply off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time, and cycle time are too short.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Motor overload occurred when running at low speed. (If a variable torque
PM motor is used, motor overload can occur when running at low speed even if running within the rated current.)
• Check the size of the load.
• Check the setting of L1-01.
• Increase the frame size of the
Inverter.
Motor Overload
The motor overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value.
The directions of the motor and PG are different. (Only in flux vector control)
The V/f characteristics voltage is too high or too low.
• Correct the PG wiring.
• Correct the motor wiring.
• Change the setting of PG rotation (F1-05).
Check the V/f characteristics.
The setting of the Motor Rated Current (E5-03) is incorrect.
Check the setting of the Motor
Rated Current (E5-03).
• A short-circuit between +V, − V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the speed setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or less.)
7-
5
7
-6
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle time are too short.
Corrective Actions
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
The directions of the motor and PG are different. (Only in flux vector control)
• Correct the PG wiring.
• Correct the motor wiring.
• Change the setting of PG rotation (F1-05).
The V/f characteristics voltage is too high or too low.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Inverter Overload
The Inverter overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
Replace the Inverter with one that has a larger capacity.
• A short-circuit between +V, − V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the speed setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or less.)
Overtorque Detected 1
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
Overtorque Detected 2
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
Undertorque Detected 1
There has been a current less than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
Undertorque Detected 2
There has been a current less than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the setting in F1-08 for longer than the setting in F1-09.
Inverter overload occurred when running at a low speed of 6 Hz or less.
-
-
-
-
• Reduce the load.
• Increase the frame size of the
Inverter.
• Lower the carrier frequency.
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
Overshooting/Undershooting are occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Corrective Actions
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
PG Disconnection Detected
PG pulses were input when the
Inverter was outputting a frequency.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Brake is applied to the motor.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the setting in F1-11.
The load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
The load is locked.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-10 and
F1-11.
Motor hunting and vibration
Motor control was lost due to hunting and vibration.
Z-phase pulse fall detection
(Always detected when applying current.)
Z-phase pulse was not detected during one turn of the motor.
Z-phase noise fault detection
(Always detected when applying current.)
The Z-phase pulse was detected at the improper timing (The difference of the
Z-phase detection between this time and last time is outside the allowable range of one turn of the motor ± 5 degrees) in succession for more than the number of times assigned to F1-
17.
Brake is applied to the motor.
-
• Incorrect wiring of PG cables.
• Disconnected PG cables.
• Damage of PG on the motor side.
• Noise interference affected the PG cables (Z-phase).
• Disconnected PG cables.
• Damaged PG card.
• Damage of PG on the motor side.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
• Check the settings of the motor constants.
• Check the motor's working temperature.
• Decrease the ASR Gain
(C5-01).
• Extend the acceleration time
(C1-01).
• Correct the wiring.
• Reconnect the PG cables.
• If the dv1 fault is detected even after taking preventative measures, replace the PG card or the
PG. Contact your Yaskawa representative for more information.
• Separate the PG wiring from the noise source (Inverter output line) by more than 30 cm.
• Correct the wiring.
• Reconnect the PG cables.
• If the dv2 fault is detected even after taking preventative measures, replace the PG card or the
PG. Contact your Yaskawa representative for more information.
7-
7
7
-8
Display Meaning
Inversion detection
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
(Only detected while running.)
Occurs when the torque reference is positive and the acceleration speed is negative or vice versa, and the difference between the speed reference and the motor speed is greater than 30% and this condition is detected in succession for more than the number of times assigned to F1-18.
Probable Causes
• Incorrect setting for the compensation amount of the zero-point pulse using a PG (E5-11).
• Noise interference affected the PG cables (A/B-phase).
• Incorrect wiring of PG cables.
• Disconnected PG cables.
• Damaged PG card.
• Damage of PG on the motor side.
• The PG rotation (F1-05) is set to the phase opposite that of the main wiring of the motor.
Corrective Actions
• Reset the compensation amount of the zero-point pulse using a
PG (E5-11) to that for Delta
Theta ( Δθ ) on the motor’s nameplate. If replacing the PG or changing the rotational direction of the motor, make an adjustment for the zero-point pulse of the PG.
• Check that the rotational direction of the motor is correct.
• Check to see if the load is overhauling the motor. If so, remove the cause and correct the operating conditions.
• Correct the wiring.
• Reconnect the PG cables.
• Correctly connect the main wiring of the motor to the U, V, or
W-phase.
Inversion prevention detection
(Only detected while running.)
The motor rotated in the opposite direction to that of the speed reference for the number of times assigned to
F1-19.
• Incorrect setting for the compensation amount of the zero-point pulse using a PG (E5-11).
• Noise interference affected the PG cables (A/B-phase).
• Incorrect wiring of PG cables.
• Disconnected PG cables.
• Damaged PG card.
• Damage of PG on the motor side.
• In an application in which an overhauling load causes the motor to rotate in the opposite direction of the speed reference, disable the dv4 fault detection
(F1-19=0).
• Take the same measures as for a dv3 fault.
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13 (PID feedback loss detection level) for longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID feedback loss detection time).
The settings in b5-13 and b5-14 aren’t appropriate.
Check the settings in b5-13 and b5-14.
The wiring of the PID feedback circuit is incorrect.
Fix the wiring.
External Fault input from Communications Option Card
-
Check the Communications
Option Card and communications signals.
External Fault (Input Terminal S3)
External Fault (Input Terminal S4)
External Fault (Input Terminal S5)
External Fault (Input Terminal S6)
An "external fault" was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S8).
• Reset external fault inputs to the multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external fault.
External Fault (Input Terminal S7)
External Fault (Input Terminal S8)
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The connection to the Digital Operator was broken during operation for a Run
Command from the Digital Operator.
-
Check the connection to the Digital Operator.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning
MEMOBUS Communications Error
A normal reception was not possible for 2 s or longer after control data was received once.
Probable Causes
-
Corrective Actions
Check the communications devices and communications signals.
Option Communications Error
A communications error was detected during a Run Command or while setting a speed reference from a Communications Option Card.
-
Digital Operator Communications
Error 1
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5 seconds after the power was turned on.
The Digital Operator's connector isn't connected properly.
The Inverter's control circuits are faulty.
Check the communications devices and communications signals.
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
Replace the Inverter.
CPU External RAM Fault
Digital Operator Communications
Error 2
After communications were established, there was a communications error with the Digital Operator for more than 2 seconds.
-
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
The control circuits were destroyed.
Replace the Inverter.
The Digital Operator isn't connected properly.
The Inverter's control circuits are faulty.
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
Replace the Inverter.
Baseblock Circuit Error
EEPROM Error
CPU Internal A/D Converter Error
-
-
The control circuit is damaged.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
The Inverter power supply was shut off while writing data to the Inverter constants.
The control circuit is damaged.
Initialize the constant settings
(A1-03).
-
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
The control circuit is damaged.
• A short-circuit between +V, − V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the speed setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or less.)
7-
9
7
-10
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes
-
Corrective Actions
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
CPU External A/D Converter Error
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
• A short-circuit between +V, − V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the speed setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or less.)
The option card is not connected properly.
Turn off the power and insert the board again.
Option Card Connection Error
ASIC Internal RAM Fault
The Inverter or option card is faulty.
-
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the option card or the
Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Watchdog Timer Fault
CPU-ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault
The control circuit is damaged.
-
-
The control circuit is damaged.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
ASIC Version Fault The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter.
Communications Option Card A/D
Converter Error
The option card is not connected properly.
The option card's A/D converter is faulty.
Turn off the power and insert the board again.
Replace the Communications
Option Card.
Communications Option Card Self
Diagnostic Error
Communications Option Card fault.
Replace the option card.
Communications Option Card
Model Code Error
Communications Option Card
DPRAM Error
Communications Option Card fault.
Replace the option card.
The copy function of the Digital Operator was used during communications.
• Use the copy function off-line.
• Use the copy function with an option card removed.
The option card is not connected properly.
Turn off the power and insert the board again.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.2 Causes and Corrective Actions When the Digital Operator Goes Dark
Meaning Probable Causes
• A short-circuit between +V, − V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
Corrective Actions
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
The short-circuit bar between +1 and
+2 terminals in the control circuit has been removed.
Attach the short-circuit bar.
No display
There was a drop in control power voltage.
P terminal and N terminal of the Braking Unit are connected in reverse.
• Check the wiring for the Braking Unit, including cables connected to the Braking Unit and relay terminals.
• Replace the Inverter.
Control power circuit failure
Malfunction occurred in the control power circuit.
Charge indicator is lit:
• Replace the Digital Operator.
• Replace the control circuit terminal board or the Inverter.
Charge indicator is not lit:
• Check the input power supply voltage.
• Replace the Inverter.
Turn OFF the power, wait for 5 minutes, and turn ON the power again.
7-
11
7
-12
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display blinks and an alarm is sent from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03) if selected.
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Display
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Meaning
Input Together than 0.5 s.
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Both the forward and Reverse Run
Commands have been ON for more
Probable causes
-
Corrective Actions
Check the sequence of the forward and Reverse Run Commands.
Since the rotational direction is unknown, the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault occurs.
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred when there was no Run signal.
• The main circuit DC voltage was below the Undervoltage Detection
Level Setting (L2-05).
• The surge current limiting magnetic contactor opened.
• The control power supply voltage when below the CUV level.
See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3 faults in the previous table.
See corrective actions for UV1, UV2, and UV3 faults in the previous table.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200 V Class: Approx. 410 V
400 V Class: Approx. 820 V
(E1-01 ≥ 400 V)
Approx.720 V
(E1-01 < 400 V)
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it's within specifications.
The ambient temperature is too high.
Install a cooling unit.
There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-02.
• A short-circuit between +V, − V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the speed setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or less.)
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault
An Inverter’s cooling fan fault was detected.
This fault is detected when L8-32 is set to 0.
The Inverter’s cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.)
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
(blinking)
Meaning
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Probable causes
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm
An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter overheating alarm signal) was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S8).
-
Corrective Actions
Clear the multi-function input terminal's overheating alarm input.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
(blinking)
Motor Overheating
E was set for H3-05 or H3-09 and the motor temperature thermistor input exceeded the alarm detection level.
The motor has overheated.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature input on terminals A2 and A3.
(blinking)
(blinking)
Overtorque 1
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
Overtorque 2
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
-
-
• Make sure that the settings in L6-
02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Undertorque 1
There has been a current less than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
Undertorque 2
There has been a current less than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the setting in F1-08 for longer than the setting in F1-09.
-
-
• Make sure that the settings in L6-
02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
Overshooting/undershooting are occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-
09.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
The PG is Disconnected
The Inverter is outputting a frequency, but PG pulses aren't being input.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Brake is applied to the motor.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
7-
13
7
-14
Display
(blinking)
Meaning
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Probable causes
The load is too large.
Corrective Actions
Reduce the load.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the setting in F1-11.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
The load is locked.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't appropriate.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-
11.
Brake is applied to the motor.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
(blinking)
External Fault Input from Communications Option Card
Continuing operation was specified for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external fault was input from the option card.
-
Remove the cause of the external fault.
(blinking)
External Fault (Input Terminal S3)
(blinking)
External Fault (Input Terminal S4)
(blinking)
External Fault (Input Terminal S5)
An external fault was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S8).
(blinking)
External Fault (Input Terminal S6)
• Reset external fault inputs to the multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external fault.
(blinking)
External Fault (Input Terminal S7)
(blinking)
External Fault (Input Terminal S8)
(blinking)
(blinking)
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13 (PID feedback loss detection level) for longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID feedback loss detection time).
The settings in b5-13 and b5-14 aren’t appropriate.
The wiring of the PID feedback circuit is incorrect.
Check the settings in b5-13 and b5-
14.
Fix the wiring.
MEMOBUS Communications Error
Normal reception was not possible for
2 s or longer after received control data.
-
Check the communications devices and signals.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
(blinking)
Meaning
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Probable causes
Option Card Communications
Error
A communications error occurred in a mode where the Run Command or a speed reference is set from a Communications Option Card.
-
Corrective Actions
Check the communications devices and signals.
(blinking)
Communications on Standby
Control data was not normally received when power was turned ON.
(blinking)
Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance
Timer
Monitor U1-61 has reached 100%.
-
Check the communications devices and signals.
The electrolytic capacitors have reached their estimated maintenance time period.
Reset o2-18 to “0%” after replacing the electrolytic capacitors.
(blinking)
Cooling Fan Maintenance Timer
Monitor U1-63 has reached 100%.
(blinking)
(blinking)
Reset during Run Command Input
Error
The reset signal was input during Run
Command input from an external terminal or other source.
Receiving External Baseblock
Command
External baseblock was input from external terminal again while it was input.
The cooling fan has reached its estimated maintenance time period.
-
-
(blinking)
Communications Test Mode Error
A Run Command was entered during a communications test.
-
Replace the cooling fan and set o2-10 to “0H”.
Check that a Run Command is not being input from an external terminal or other source.
-
-
7-
15
7
-16
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings. It won't be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault contact outputs will not operate either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the errors.
Display
Table 7.4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Meaning
Incorrect Inverter
Capacity Setting
Incorrect settings
• The Inverter capacity setting does not match the Unit. Contact your Yaskawa representative.
• The Inverter model does not support the version of the software being used.
Check the Inverter nameplate for applicable software versions. Contact your
Yaskawa representative for more information.
Constant Setting Range
Error
The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range.
Press the ENTER Key on the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant (U1-
34).
*
Multi-function Input
Selection Error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-
06) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs. (0F:
Unused, 20 to 2F: Except for the external fault)
• An up or down command was selected independently. (They must be used together.)
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were selected at the same time.
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set frequency) were selected at the same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while PID Control Method
Selection (b5-01) was enabled.
• Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time.
• The emergency Stop Command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
Option Card Selection
Error
Control Method Selection Error
Multi-function Analog
Input Selection Error
Constant Selection
Error
The option card was selected as the speed reference source by setting b1-01 to 3, but an option card isn't connected (C option).
6 (flux vector control for PM) was selected in A1-02, but a PG Speed Control Card is not connected.
The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID function selection.
• H3-09 or H3-05 = B and H6-01 = 1
• H3-09 or H3-05 = C and H6-01 = 2 b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (pulse input) and H6-01 (Pulse Train Input
Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (speed reference).
H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 switching) is set to 1 and H3-09 is set to other than 2 or H3-
05 is set to 0 or 2.
The same value is set to H3-05 and H3-09.
A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Ex.: A function used only with open-loop vector control for PM was selected for sequence test mode.
Press the ENTER Key on the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant (U1-
34).
*
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
PID Control Selection
Error
Table 7.4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings (Continued)
Meaning Incorrect settings
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PID Control Method Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
V/f Data Setting Error
Constant Setting Error
Energy-saving Constants Setting Error
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
For the open loop vector or flux vector control for PM
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-09 (FMIN)
For the sequence test mode
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
The values of the carrier frequency and on-delay time were outside the allowable setting range. Contact your Yaskawa representative for more information.
The values of the energy-saving constants were outside the allowable setting range.
Check if the set values for the motor constants (E5 constants) are the same as the values shown on the motor’s nameplate.
EEPROM Write Error
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
* Displayed only on the LCD operator (JVOP-160).
Note If the settings for the constants of an Inverter with a different version of software are copied, an OPE error can occur. Contact your Yaskawa representative if wanting to copy the settings with a different software version.
7-
17
7
-18
Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and alarm output will not function.
Display
Alarm
Meaning
Motor data error
STOP key input
Resistance error
Zero-point pulse of
PG adjustment error
Table 7.5 Errors During Autotuning
Probable causes
There is an error in the data input for autotuning.
Corrective Actions
• Check the input data.
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and motor.
The alarm was detected before autotuning was started or during autotuning.
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel autotuning.
• Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
• Check the load.
• Autotuning was not completed in the allowable set time.
• The autotuning results were outside the allowable range.
• Check the input data.
• Check the capacities of the Inverter and the motor.
• Check the motor wiring.
• Autotuning was started while the motor was running at more than 30 min
-1
.
• Autotuning was not completed in the allowable set time.
• The difference of measurement results between the first time and the second time was more than 3.0 degrees (electric angle).
• Check the motor wiring.
• Separate the motor from the mechanical system if connected.
• Check if the wiring of the PG card is correct.
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
Function
The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-01 will be displayed. The error contact output and alarm output will not function.
Table 7.6 Errors during Copy Function
Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
Read
Digital Operator write-protected
Illegal read data
Illegal write status o3-01 was set to 1 to write a constant when the Digital Operator was writeprotected (o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing constants with the Digital Operator.
The read data length does not agree.
Repeat the read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
The write data is incorrect.
Replace the Digital Operator.
An attempted write of a constant to
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed.
A low Inverter voltage has been detected.
Repeat the read.
Replace the Digital Operator.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Function
Copy
Verify
Display
Inverter capacity matched
Control method matched
Table 7.6 Errors during Copy Function (Continued)
Meaning
ID not matched
Verify error
Checksum error
Verify error
Probable causes Corrective Actions
The Inverter product code or software number is different.
Use the copy function for the same product code and software number.
The capacity of the Inverter being copied and the capacity in the Digital
Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
Inverter capacity.
The control method of the Inverter being copied and the control method in the Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same control method.
The constant written to the Inverter was compared with the constant in the
Digital Operator and they were different.
Retry the copy.
The checksum in the Inverter constant area was compared with the checksum in the Digital Operator constant area and they were different.
Retry the copy.
The Digital Operator and Inverter settings do not agree.
Retry the copy and verify again.
7-
19
7
-20
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions .
If Inverter Constants Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if an Inverter constant cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings.
Constant write enable is input.
This occurs when "constant write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-06). If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the constants.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the constant A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the constants for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password in constant A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE13 is displayed.
The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
Troubleshooting
If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.
The motor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.
IMPORTANT
If the Inverter is not in drive mode and the DRIVE indicator on the Digital Operator (JVOP-161) does not light up, the Inverter will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to make the DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. The DRIVE indicator will light when drive mode is entered.
The operation method setting is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate when the Run Key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
The speed reference is too low.
If the speed reference is set below the speed set in E1-09 (Min. speed), the Inverter will not operate.
Raise the speed reference to at least the minimum speed.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog
Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to 1 (speed gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the speed reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is not in drive mode.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode and the DRIVE indicator on the Digital Operator (JVOP-161) does not light up, the Inverter will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU Key make the DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. The DRIVE indicator will light when drive mode is entered.
7-
21
7
-22
The operation method selection is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE Key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through
H1-06, terminals S3 to S8) to 0, and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-06, terminals S3 to
S8) to a value other than 0.
The speed reference is too low.
If the speed reference is set below the speed set in E1-09 (Min. speed), the Inverter will not operate. Raise the speed reference to at least the minimum output speed.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 or H3-09 is set to 1 (speed gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the speed reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The motor responsiveness limit can be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The Inverter does not operate.
Probable Causes
Run command is not sent.
The operation method selection is wrong.
The speed reference is too low.
Descriptions
Inverter does not operate if a Run command is not sent.
Corrective Actions
If the indicator on the RUN Key is not lit, the Run Command is not sent. Input the
Run Command.
b1-02 has to be set according to the Run
Command input method to be used. b1-02=
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (factory setting)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input
Set b1-02 according to the Run Command input method to be used.
The speed reference has to be set above the frequency set in E1-09 (Min. speed).
If the indicator on the STOP Key is flashing, check the speed reference monitor
(U1-01) and set the speed reference above the speed set in E1-09.
Troubleshooting
Probable Causes
The speed reference selection is wrong.
The MENU Key was pressed.
The ESC Key was pressed twice.
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key was pressed.
Descriptions b1-01 has to be set according to the speed reference input method to be used. b1-01=
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (factory setting)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option card
4: Pulse train input
If the LOCAL/REMOTE Key is pressed while the Inverter is stopped, the Inverter will switch to Digital Operator operation and cannot be operated with the external input terminals.
Corrective Actions
Set b1-01 according to the speed reference input method to be used.
If the MENU Key is pressed once or the
ESC Key is pressed twice, the Inverter will exit the drive mode and will not operate. If the MENU Key is pressed during operation, the Inverter will not start even if the Run
Command is sent at the next operation.
• Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Set b8-01 (Run Command selection in programming modes) to 1(Cannot operate) to remain in the drive mode and continue operation even if the MENU
Key or ESC Key is pressed.
• Press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Set o2-01 (LOCAL/REMOTE Key enable/disable) to 0 (Disabled) to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key.
The STOP Key was pressed.
Wrong selection of a 2-wire or a 3-wire sequence.
“Reverse run prohibited” is selected.
Autotuning has just been completed.
If the STOP Key is pressed during operation, the Inverter will decelerate to a stop.
If 0 is set to one of H1-01 to H1-06, a 3wire sequence is set.
• Turn the Run Command off and then on again.
• Set o2-02 (STOP key during control circuit terminal operation) to 0 (Disabled) to disable the STOP Key.
Make sure that H1-01 to H1-06 are set to a value other than 0 to use a 2-wire sequence.
If b1-04 (Prohibition of reverse operation) is set to 1 (Reverse disabled), the motor will not start if the Reverse Run Command is sent.
Check the setting of b1-04.
The Inverter remains in the autotuning mode right after autotuning has been completed and cannot be operated even if the
Run Command is sent.
Press the MENU Key to display the drive mode on the Digital Operator and press the DATA/ENTER Key to enter the drive mode.
The motor does not accelerate.
If the torque limit settings (L7-01 to L7-04) or the torque reference input (torque control) are too small, the motor may not be able to accelerate. Check the settings and input values.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
"Reverse run prohibited" is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the Inverter will not receive Reverse Run Commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set b1-04 to 0.
7-
23
7
-24
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U),
T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a Forward Run Command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W).
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
Use the following information if the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-09 or H3-05 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference
Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference.
The analog speed reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The speed reference bias set in constant H3-03 is added to the speed reference. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
A signal is being input to the speed reference terminal A2 or A3 .
When 0 (Add to terminal A1) is set for constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function the terminal A2 or A3 input voltage (current) is added to the speed reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.
The following causes are possible.
Troubleshooting
"Overvoltage inhibit selection enabled" is set.
When braking resistor is connected, set constant L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit selection) to 0 (disabled). When this constant is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking resistor does not fully function.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider increasing the motor capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog
Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to 10, 11, 12 or 15 (positive and negative torque limit), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If the Motor Overheats
Take the following steps if the motor overheats.
The load is too big.
If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated torque, the motor will overheat. Some motor rating are given for short period performance and are not continuous ratings. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.
7-
25
7
-26
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio
If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
•
•
•
•
•
Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input area.
Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply output area.
Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
Ground the Inverter and motor.
Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run
The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of
0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
Use the following information when there is mechanical oscillation.
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants
C6-02.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump speed functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I, and D constants. (Refer to page 6-99.)
Troubleshooting
If Motor Speed Does Not Rise to Speed Reference
Use the following information if the motor speed does not rise to the speed reference.
The speed reference is within the jump speed range.
When the jump speed function is used, the motor speed does not change within the jump speed range. Check to be sure that the jump speed (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and jump speed width (constant d3-04) settings are suitable.
The speed reference upper limit has been reached.
The speed upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Speed (E1-04) × Speed Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
7-
27
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter.
Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2
Maintenance and Inspection
8
-2
Outline of Free Warranty
The free warranty period of the Inverter is as follows:
Free warranty Period: This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa’s customer or if applicable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa’s factory whichever comes first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
•
•
There should be no abnormal heat generation.
The ambient temperature should not be too high.
•
•
The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Turn OFF the main circuit power supply, wait for the time indicated on the front cover, and make sure the CHARGE indicator light has gone out, and then perform maintenance and inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Item
External terminals, mounting bolts, connectors, etc.
Table 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Inspection
Are all screws and bolts tight?
Are connectors tight?
Corrective Procedure
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Heatsinks
PCBs
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 10
4
to 58.8 x 10
4
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm
2
).
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 10
4
to 58.8 x 10
4
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm
2
).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Cooling fan
Power elements
Smoothing capacitor
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded
20,000 hours?
Replace the cooling fan.
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the elements?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 10
4
to 58.8 x 10
4
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm
2
).
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use of the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Refer to Cooling Fan Replacement Outline (Page 8-5) for replacing a cooling fan and Circulation Fan
Replacement Outline (Page 8-14) for replacing a circulation fan.
To replace other parts, contact your Yaskawa representative or YASKAWA ELECTRIC ENGINEERING
CORPORATION for details on preventive maintenance for Inverters.
Cooling fan
Breaker relays
Fuses
Part
Smoothing capacitor
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs
Table 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
5 years
-
Replace with new part. (Determine need by inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
10 years
5 years
Replace with new part.
Replace with new board. (Determine need by inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30 ° C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
Types and Number of Cooling Fans Used in the Drive
Cooling fans used for the Drive has two types; Heatsink cooling fan and heatsink circulation fan. Heatsink cooling fan blows air to the Drive cooling fin. Heatsink circulation fan stirs up the air inside the Drive unit.
Table 8.3
shows the number of cooling fans used in the Drive. For more information on models and specifications of cooling fans, contact your Yaskawa representative or YASKAWA ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COR-
PORATION.
When replacing the fan, use the specified type of the fan. If the inapplicable fans are used, performance of the
Drive will not be fully obtained.
Maximum Motor
Capacity
(kW)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
Table 8.3 Number of Cooling Fans to be Used
200 V Class
Heatsink Cooling
Fan
Heatsink Circulation
Fan
-
-
-
-
400 V Class
Heatsink Cooling
Fan
Heatsink Circulation
Fan
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
1
1
-
-
-
8-
3
8
-4
Maximum Motor
Capacity
(kW)
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
90
110
132
160
37
45
55
75
185
220
300
Table 8.3 Number of Cooling Fans to be Used (Continued)
200 V Class
Heatsink Cooling
Fan
Heatsink Circulation
Fan
1 -
Fan
1
400 V Class
Heatsink Cooling Heatsink Circulation
Fan
-
2
2
2
2
-
1
-
1
2
2
2
2
-
1
-
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
-
-
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
1
-
4
4
2
2
5
2
2
1
1
2
Maintenance and Inspection
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the airflow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the Inverter.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter.
1
Airflow direction
2
1
Fan cover
Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 5.5 kW)
8-
5
8
-6
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW, 30kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW to 55 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the control board bracket to which the boards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the control board. The cables connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed at the same time by removing them together with the control circuit terminal board. This procedure is not required for 400 V
Class Inverters of 37 kW, 45 kW, and 55 kW. (Refer to page 8-18.)
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate drive board positioned at the back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components. Refer to the next page for attaching the fan cover.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Control b oard b racket
Control b oard
Air flo w direction
Fan co v er
Connector
Gate dri v e b oard
Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW)
Maintenance and Inspection
Attaching the Fan Cover
1. Tilt the fan cover toward the bottom of the Inverter as shown in Fig 8.3 and insert it to the mounting hole until it meets with A.
F an cover
A
B ottom I nverter
Coo li ng fan
T op I nverter
Fig 8.3
2. Push the fan cover toward the top of the Inverter.
Fig 8.4
3. Make sure that there is no gap between the fan cover and A. Then screw it in place with the three screws.
M a k e sure that there i s no gap .
A
N G
A
Fig 8.5
8-
7
8
-8
200 V Class Inverters of 55 kW, 75 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW, 90 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Pull the cooling fan power cable connector that extends from the fan cover cable hole out of the cooling fan power relay board.
3. Only for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW and 90 kW, loosen the resistor unit mounting screws and slide the resistor unit to remove it. Take care as the resistor unit is hot.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Front cover mounting screws
Front cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Fan support
Fan support mounting screws
Circulation fan
Circulation fan mounting screws
Fan cable pullout position
Airflow direction
Fan support
Airflow direction
Cooling fans
Resistor unit
Fan power relay board
Cooling fans
Resistor unit mounting screws
Cooling fan mounting screws
Cooling fan mounting screws
Fan power cable pullout position
Fig 8.6 Cooling Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW and 90 kW)
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V Class Inverters of 37 kW and 45 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the panel to which the control board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan power relay board are mounted. Remove any cables that are connected to the control board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page 8-18.)
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Fan support mounting screws
Front cover mounting screws
Fan cover Panel mounting screws
Cooling fan power relay board
Gate drive board
Front cover
Panel mounting screws
Capacitor
Terminal cover
Terminal board
Terminal cover mounting screws
Pay attention to the protruding part of the fan cable.
Circulation fan mounting screws
Circulation fan
Cooling fans
Airflow direction
Cooling fan mounting screws
Fan cover
Fig 8.7 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 37 kW and 45 kW)
8-
9
8
-10
400 V Class Inverters of 110 kW and 132 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page
8-18.)
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Front cover mounting screws
Front cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Cooling fan power relay board
Fan cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
Airflow direction
Circulation fan mounting screws
Circulation fan
Circulation fan power connector
Cooling fan mounting screws
Fig 8.8 Cooling Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 110 kW)
Maintenance and Inspection
400 V Class Inverters of 160 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page
8-18.)
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Front cover mounting screws Fan cover Fan cover mounting screws
Fan power relay board
Gate drive board
Front cover
Control board
Terminal cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
Circulation fan mounting screws
Fan cover mounting screws
Circulation fan airflow direction
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan airflow direction
Fan power relay board
Fan mounting screws
Finger guard
Cooling fan
*1
Fan ground cable *2
* 1. There is no finger guard mounted to the fan for some capacities. (There is a guard on the Inverter side.)
* 2. There is no fan ground cable for the capacities without a finger guard.
Fig 8.9 Cooling Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 110 kW)
8-
11
8
-12
400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board.
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan covers from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Make sure that the fan cable and the fan ground cable are not tangled or pinched.
F ront cover mount i ng screws
F an cover
F an power re l ay b oard
F an cover
T op front cover
B ottom front cover
T erm i na l cover
T erm i na l cover mount i ng screws
F an cover mount i ng screws
E
n
l
arged v
i
ew
F an ca bl e
F an ground ca bl e
F an cover mount i ng screws
F an a i rf l ow d i rect i on
Co lli ng fan
Coo li ng fan mount i ng screws
Fi nger guard
Fig 8.10 Cooling Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW)
Maintenance and Inspection
400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the terminal board can be removed together with the terminal board.
3. Remove the fan unit screws and pull out the fan units from the Inverter.
4. Replace the fan units with new ones.
And, remove the screws for the fan power relay board and attach this board to the new unit.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan unit, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
Front cover mounting screws
Fan cover
Fan power relay board
Fan cover
Top front cover
Bottom front cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Fan cover mounting screws
Enlarged view
Relay board mounting screws
Fan power relay board
Fan cover mounting screws
Fan units
Fig 8.11 Cooling Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW)
Fan airflow derection
8-
13
8
-14
Circulation Fan Replacement Outline
With some capacities, there is a small fan installed inside the Inverter for the purpose of increasing circulation in areas where heat has built up. These fans have built-in fan sensors that output an alarm when the rotation rate of the fan drops to indicate that replacement is necessary.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 11 kW
The circulation fan is installed behind the control circuit terminal board inside the Inverter.
The circulation fan can be replaced by removing the control circuit terminal board.
Removing the Circulation Fan
1. Remove the Digital Operator, the terminal cover, and the front cover.
2. Remove the control circuit terminal board. Remove the cables connected to the terminals if necessary.
3. While pushing the two tabs (A) in direction 1, pull the fan out in direction 2.
4. Remove the relay connector connected to the fan.
Mounting the Circulation Fan
Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows towards the top of the Inverter (direction indicated by the arrow).
Mount the fan securely using the tabs (A).
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
2
Control board
1
Airflow direction
Tabs (A)
Circulation fan
Inverter with Control Circuit Terminal Board Removed
Fig 8.12 Circulation Fan Replacement (200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 11 kW)
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW
The circulation fan is installed at the top-left corner of the Inverter interior.
Removing the Circulation Fan
1. Remove the Digital Operator, the terminal cover, and the front cover.
2. While pushing the relay connector tab (A) in direction 1, pull the relay connector out in direction 2.
3. While pushing the fan tabs (B) in direction 3, pull the fan out in direction 2.
4. Remove the relay connector connected to the fan.
Mounting the Circulation Fan
Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows towards the bottom of the Inverter (direction indicated by the arrow).
Mount the fan securely using the fan tabs (B).
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
Circulation fan
4
2 1
Relay connector tab (A)
Fan tabs (B)
3
Airflow direction
Fig 8.13 Circulation Fan Replacement (200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW)
200 V Class Inverters of 37 kW or More and 400 V Class Inverters of 75 to 160 kW
The circulation fan is installed in front of the fan cover inside the Inverter. Remove the circulation fan using the procedure for replacing the cooling fan and replace it with the new fan. (The installation position for 200 V
Class Inverters of 75 kW is different.)
8-
15
8
-16
400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW
Two circulation fans are installed as described in the following sections.
Removing the Circulation Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers.
2. Unscrew the frame fixing screws and take off the frame.
3. Remove the relay connector connected to the fan.
4. Remove the fan cover mounting screws and pull the fan cover out.
5. Remove the fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Circulation Fan
Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows in the direction indicated by the arrow in the corresponding diagram.
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
Fan cable
Fix the fan cable with lnsulok ties
Frame
Frame fixing screws
Fan airflow direction
Enlarged view
Fan cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
Enlarged view
Fan airflow direction
Fan cover mounting screws
Fan cable
Fig 8.14 Circulation Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW)
Maintenance and Inspection
400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW
Two circulation fans are installed as described in the following sections.
Removing the Circulation Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers.
2. Unscrew the frame fixing screws and takeoff the frame.
3. Remove the relay connector connected to the fan.
4. Remove the fan cover mounting screws and pull the fan cover out.
5. Remove the fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Circulation Fan
Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows in the direction indicated by the arrow in the corresponding diagram.
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
Fan cable
Fix the fan cable with Insulok ties
Frame
Frame fixing screws
Fan airflow direction
Enlarged view
Fan cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
Fan airflow direction
Fix the fan cable with Insulok ties
Enlarged view
Fan cable
Fan cover mounting scerws
Fig 8.15 Circulation Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW)
8-
17
8
-18
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board
The control circuit terminal board can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.
Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal board.
IMPORTANT
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Board
1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal board.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal board out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the board.
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal board.
Confirm that the control circuit terminal board and the control board properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on the board.
The connector pins may be bent if the board is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Inverter operation.
Removing and Mounting the
Control Circuit Terminal Board
FE NC
Fig 8.16 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Board
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications ..................................9-2
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices .......9-6
9
-2
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Model Number CIMR-F7S
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
Rated input current (A)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11 15 18.5
22 30 37 45 55 75
3.8
1.2
3.2
4.9
1.6
4.1
8.4
2.7
7.0
11.5
3.7
18
5.7
24
8.8
37
12
52
17
68
22
84
27
94
32
120
44
160
55
9.6
15 23 31 45 58 71 85
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
115 145
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max. 300 Hz max.
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
198
69
180
237
82
215
317
110
283
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
+ 10%, - 15%
±5%
DC reactor
Measures for power supply harmonics
12-phase rectification
Optional
Not possible
Built in
Possible *3
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 6-pole IPM motor manufactured by Yaskawa. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. The startup torque for a 200 V Class Inverter for 110 kW is 120% (low carrier).
* 3. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
Standard Inverter Specifications
400 V Class
Model Number CIMR-F7S
Max. applicable motor output
(kW) *1
Rated input current (A)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
40P4
0.4
2.2
1.4
1.8
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
40P7
0.75
2.5
1.6
2.1
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
41P5 42P2 43P7 45P5 47P5 4011
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
4.4
2.8
6.4
4.0
9.0
5.8
15
9.5
20
13
29
18
3.7
5.3
7.6
12.5
17 24
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max. 300 Hz max.
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
4015
15
37
24
31
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
±5%
Optional
Not possible
4018
18.5
47
30
39
Model Number CIMR-F7S
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
*1
Rated input current (A)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
4022
22
50
34
45
4030
30
66
46
60
4037
37
4045
45
4055
55
4075
75
4090
90
4110
110
4132
132
4160
160
4185
185
83 100 120 165 198 238 286 334 407
57 69 85 110 140 160 200 230 280
75 91 112 150 180 216 260 304
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
370
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max. 300 Hz max.
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
4220
220
557
390
506
+ 10%, - 15%
4300
300
743
510
675
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
Built in
Possible *2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 6-pole IPM motor manufactured by Yaskawa. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9-
3
9
-4
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-F7S
Control method
Torque characteristics
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
*3
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
*3
Speed accuracy (temperature characteristics)
Speed setting resolution
Specification
Sine wave PWM,
Open-loop vector control for PM, Flux vector control for PM
50% (Open-loop vector control for PM)
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% (Flux vector control for PM)
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% (Flux vector control for PM)
1:10 (Open-loop vector control for PM), 1:500 (Flux vector control for PM)
±0.2% (Open-loop vector control for PM), ±0.02% (Flux vector control for PM)
Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.)
±10% (Open-loop vector control for PM), ±5% (Flux vector control for PM)
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10 ° C to +40 ° C)
Analog references: ±0.1% (25 ° C ±10 ° C)
Digital references: 0.01 %
Analog references: 0.1% (+10 bit),
0.001 Hz
0.05 % (±11 bit)
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% of rated output current per minute *2, *5, *7
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current per minute *5, *7
-10 to +10V , 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, pulse train
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Output frequency resolution
Overload capacity and maximum current *1
Speed setting signal
Acceleration/Deceleration time
Braking torque
Main control functions
Motor protection
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Fuse blown protection
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Momentary power loss ridethru *8
Cooling fin overheating
Overvoltage inhibit
Grounding protection *6
Charge indicator
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Altitude
Vibration
Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option *4 , braking transformer built into 200 V and 400 V Class
Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.)
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, torque limits, 17-speed control (maximum), acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire sequence, autotuning (line-to-line resistance or
Zero-point pulse ), dwell functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, jump speeds, upper and lower limits for speed references, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, Droop control , function copying, torque control, speed/torque control switching , etc.
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
(This protection function, however, does not protect the irreversible magnetization of the magnet in the PM motor.)
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Stops for fuse blown.
CT selected (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% of rated output current per minute *2
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current per minute
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above applox. 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above applox. 820 V if E1-01 ≥ 400 V or applox. 720 V if E1-01 < 400 V.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below applox. 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below applox. 380 V.
Stops for 15 ms or more.
With a suitable constant setting, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Protection by thermistor.
Overvoltage inhibit during running.
Protection by electronic circuits. (Overcurrent level)
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
-10 ° C to 40 ° C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
-10 ° C to 45 ° C (Open chassis type)
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20 ° C to + 60 ° C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
1000 m max.
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s 2
20 to 50 Hz: 2.0 m/s 2
Standard Inverter Specifications
* 1. Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected.
* 2. Only VT can be set for 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters.
* 3. The speed control accuracy depends on the installation condition and types of motor used. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
* 4. When connecting a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit, set L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit selection) to 0 (disabled). Stopping may not be possible in the specified deceleration time if this function is not disabled.
* 5. Derating is required for applications that use repetitive loads. (Refer to page 10-6 for details.)
* 6. The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases.
y A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
y A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
* 7. If running at a speed of 6 Hz or less, the overload protection function can operate even if running within 150% of rated output current per minute when CT is selected, 120% of rated output current per minute when VT is selected.
* 8. Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V/400 V Class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
9-
5
9
-6
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter. Select them according to the application.
Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices
Purpose
Protect Inverter wiring
Prevents burning when a Braking Resistor is used.
Contains switching surge
Isolates I/O signals
Improve the input power factor of the
Inverter
Name
MCCB or Ground
Fault Interrupter
*1
Magnetic Contactor
Surge Absorber
Isolator
DC Reactor
AC Reactor
Input Noise Filter
Model (Code)
NF
SC series
DCR2
DGP
UZDA
UZBA
LNFD
FN
Descriptions
Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to protect Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable for high frequencies.
Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the coil.
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors and relays near the Inverter.
Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective against inductive noise.
Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All
Inverters of 22 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors.
These are optional for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Install
DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Reduces noise coming into the Inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the Inverter into the power supply line. Connect as close to the
Inverter as possible.
Power supply
Molded-case circuit breaker or ground fault interrupter
Magnetic contactor (MC)
AC reactor for power factor improvement
Zero phase reactor
Braking resistor
Reduce the affects of radio and control device noise
Finemet zerophase reactor to reduce radio noise
*2
F6045GB
(FIL001098)
F11080GB
(FIL001097)
Reduces noise from the line that sneaks into the Inverter input power system. Insert as close to the Inverter as possible.
Can be use on both the input side and output side.
Reduces noise generated by the Inverter. Connect as close to the Inverter as possible.
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED).
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor.
Input noise filter
Inverter
Enable stopping the machine in a set time
Output Noise Filter
Braking Resistor
Braking Resistor
Unit
Braking Unit
F200160BP
(300-001-041)
LF
ERF-150WJ
(R00 )
LKEB
(75600-K 0)
CDBR
(72600-R 0)
1 m cable: (72616-
WV001)
3 m cable: (72616-
WV003)
Varispeed F7
ᧂⓂ
Ground
Output noise filter
DC reactor for power factor improvement
Zero phase reactor
Operates the Inverter externally
Digital Operator
Connection Cable
Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely.
Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
Low-voltage manual starter *3
Controls an Inverter system
Provides Inverter momentary power loss recovery time
Set/monitor speeds and voltages externally.
VS System Module
Backup Capacitor
Unit for Momentary Power Loss
Tachometer
Speed Setter
JGSM-
P00 0
(73600-P00
DCF-6A
Speed Setter Knob CM-3S
0)
RV30YN20S (2 k Ω )
A system controller that can be match to the automatic control system to produce an optimum system configuration.
Handles momentary power losses for the control power supply for models 11 kW or less (maintains power for
2 s).
Devices to set or monitor speeds externally.
Ground
Motor
Output Voltmeter SCF-12NH
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for use with a PWM Inverter.
Correct speed reference input, tachometer, ammeter scales
Variable Resistor
Board for Speed
Reference
Tachometer Scale
Correction Resistor
2 k Ω
20 k
(ETX003270)
Ω (ETX003120)
(RH000850)
Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a speed reference.
Calibrates the scale of tachometers and ammeters.
* 1. Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors. The interrupter must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example:NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)
* 2. The Finemet Zero-phase Reactor is manufactured by Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
* 3. For selection of the low-voltage manual starter, refer to the Varispeed F7S catalogue or contact your Yaskawa representative.
Example: AICUT LB series manufactured by AICHI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
Built-in
(connect to connector)
Type
The following option cards are available
Table 9.5 Option Cards
Name
Code Number
Function
Analog Reference Board
AI-14U
73600-
C001X
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog speed references.
• Input signal ranges: 0 to 10 V (20 k Ω ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω ), 1 channel
• Input resolution: 14-bit (1/16384)
Speed
(Frequency)
Reference
Option
Cards
Analog Reference Board
AI-14B
Digital Reference Board
DI-08
Digital Reference Board
DI-16H2
Analog Monitor Board
AO-08
Monitoring
Option
Cards
Analog Monitor Board
AO-12
Digital Output Board
DO 08
73600-
C002X
73600-
C003X
73600-
C016X
73600-
D001X
73600-
D002X
73600-
D004X
Document
Number
TOE-C736-
30.13
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog speed references.
• Input signal ranges: − 10 to 10 V (20 k Ω )
4 to 20 mA (500 Ω ), 3 channels
• Input resolution: 13-bit + sign (1/8192)
Enables 8-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 8-bit binary
2-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
Enables 16-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 16-bit binary
4-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
With 16-bit/12-bit switch.
Converts analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.) to absolute values and outputs them.
• Output resolution: 8 bits (1/256)
• Output voltage: 0 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
TOE-C736-
40.7
TOE-C736-
30.21
Output analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.).
• Output resolution: 11 bits (1/2048) + sign
• Output voltage: -10 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
Outputs isolated digital signals to monitor the Inverters operating status (alarm signals, zero-speed detection, etc.)
Output form: Photocoupler output, 6 channels
(48 V, 50 mA max.)
Relay contact outputs, 2 channels
(250 VAC: 1 A max., 30VDC: 1 A max.)
TOE-C736-
30.14
TOE-C736-
30.15
TOE-C736-
30.22
TOE-C736-
30.24
2C-Relay
Output Board
DO 02C
73600-
D007X
Provides two multi-function outputs (DPDT relay contacts) in addition to those provided by the Inverter.
TOE-C736-
40.8
PG
Speed
Control
Cards
PG-X2
73600-
A015X
• A-, B-, Z-phase pulse (differential pulse) input
• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
• Input: Conforms to RS-422
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TOE-C736-
40.4
9-
7
9
-8
Type Name
DeviceNet
Communications Interface Board
SI-N1
Built-in
(connected to connector)
Communications
Option
Cards
CC-Link
Interface
Card
SI-C
L ON W ORKS
Communications Interface Board
SI-J
Table 9.5 Option Cards (Continued)
Code Number
Function
73600-
C021X
73600-
C032X
73600-
C035X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using DeviceNet communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using CC-Link communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using L ON W ORKS communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Document
Number
-
-
-
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Inverter Application Precautions ................................10-2
Motor Application Precautions ...................................10-5
Conformance to UL Standard ....................................10-6
Conformance to CE Markings....................................10-8
Wiring Examples......................................................10-15
User Constants ........................................................10-23
10
10
-2
Inverter Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting, and handling Inverters.
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase advancing capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V Class Inverters of 22 to 75 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 10.1
Applications with Repetitive Loads
Applications with repetitive loads (cranes, elevators, presses, washing machines, etc.) using Inverters require derating for the repetitive load [reducing carrier frequency and current (changing accel/decel timing, increasing the frame size of the Inverter)]. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Starting Torque
The overload current ratings of the Inverter and the type of motor being used restrict motor startup and acceleration characteristics depending on the amount of torque the load required. The load torque must be within the range that the Inverter can handle in combination with the IPM motor.
Emergency Stop
Although the Inverter's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emergency stop.
Options
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa.
Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
Inverter Application Precautions
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, air-bourne matter, dust, and other contaminants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Motor Maximum Speed
The maximum speed of the motor is determined by the settings for the motor’s maximum speed (E1-04) and the number of motor poles (E5-04). If the settings are incorrect, the machine or the machine operator may be harmed. Check the motor nameplate to select the correct settings.
Deceleration Time
The motor's deceleration time is determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD 2 /4). If the overvoltage inhibit selections are activated during deceleration, increase the deceleration time. The overvoltage inhibit selections will increase the deceleration time by the amount of time the overvoltage inhibit selection is active.
To reduce the deceleration time, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more than one time every 30 minutes.
10
10-
3
10
-4
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher)
If the jumper is inserted into a power tap that does not match the actual power supply voltage, the lifetime of the transformer for the power supply or the wind capacity of the cooling fan may be reduced.
If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too low for the actual power supply, a power surge may occur on the transformer for the power supply and reduce the lifetime of the transformer.
If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too high for the actual power supply, the wind capacity of the cooling fan is reduced.
Insert the jumper into the power tap with the voltage setting nearest to the voltage of the actual power supply.
Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation for the procedure.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turn OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.
Motor Application Precautions
Motor Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for motor application.
Applicable Motor
To the Varispeed F7S-Series Inverter, apply the dedicated IPM motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed.
10-
5
10
10
-6
Conformance to UL Standard
To comply with UL standard, follow the appropriate installation instructions.
Note Yaskawa IPM motor does not conform to UL/cUL standards.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter in a pollution degree 2 environment or equivalent.
Specification of Closed-Loop Connector
The closed-loop connectors must be installed on conductors before installing to terminal blocks.
Use UL Listed closed-loop connectors shown below.
Table 10.1 JST Closed-Loop Connector Model
Inverter
Model CIMR-F7S Input
JST Kit P/N
Output
2011 14-5 14-5
2015 38-6 22-6
2018
2022
2030
2037
38-8
60-8
60-8
100-10
38-8
38-8
60-8
100-10
4030
4037
4045
4055
2045
2055
2075
4022
150-10
60-10 (2perPh)
100-10 (2perPh)
22-6
38-6
38-8
60-8
70-8
150-10
60-10 (2perPh)
80-10 (2perPh)
14-6
22-6
38-8
60-8
70-8
4160
4185
4220
4300
4075
4090
4110
4132
100-10
60-10 (2perPh)
70-10 (2perPh)
70-10 (2perPh)
80-12 (2perPh)
150-16 (2perPh)
325-16 (2perPh)
150-16 (4perPh)
80-10
100-10
60-10 (2perPh)
70-10 (2perPh)
80-12 (2perPh)
150-16 (2perPh)
200-16 (2perPh)
150-16 (4perPh)
Control Circuit Terminal
A UL Listed, Class 2 power supply must be used for the control circuits. See below table.
Conformance to UL Standard
.
Table 10.2 Power Supply for Control Circuits
Input/Output Terminal Power Supply
Open Collector Outputs
P1, P2, PC Class 2 power supply
Digital Inputs
Analog Inputs
S1, S2, S3, S4,
S5, S6, S7,
SC
S8 ,
RP, +V, -V , A1,
A3
LVLC power supply when using internal power supply. Class 2 power supply when using external power supply.
Interrupting Rating
Varispeed F7S is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 VAC maximum (200 V Class) and 480 VAC maximum (400 V Class).
Use a circuit breaker or fuses having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes,
600 VAC maximum.
Motor Overheat Protection
To protect the motor from overheating, set the E5-03 constant in the Inverter to the same value as the level of the motor rated current.
10-
7
10
10
-8
Conformance to CE Markings
Points regarding conformance to CE markings are given below.
Note Yaskawa IPM motor does not conform to CE Markings.
CE Markings
CE markings indicate conformance to safety and environmental standards that apply to business transactions
(including production, imports, and sales) in Europe. There are unified European standards for mechanical products (Machine Directive), electrical products (Low Voltage Directive), and electrical noise (EMC Directive). CE markings are required for business transactions in Europe (including production, imports, and sales).
The Varispeed F7S-Series Inverters bear CE markings indicating conformance to the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC Directive.
•
•
Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
Machinery and installations that incorporate the Inverter are also subject to CE markings. It is ultimately the responsibility of customers making products incorporating the Inverter to attach CE markings to the finished products. The customer must confirm that the finished products (machines or installations) conform to the
European Standards.
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings
Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed F7S-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive under the conditions described in European Standard EN50178.
Requirements for Conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed F7S-Series Inverters must satisfy the following conditions in order to conform to the Low Voltage
Directive.
• It must be used under conditions corresponding to overvoltage category 3 or less and pollution degree 2 or less as specified in IEC664.
•
•
Input fuses:
For details on selecting fuses, refer to Table 10.3 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples .
With Inverters CIMR-F7S2022 to 2075 and CIMR-F7S4022 to 4300, an enclosure preventing foreign matter from entering from the top or front sides is required (IP4X or higher: panel installation).
Conformance to CE Markings
Wiring Example
This example shows wiring for conforming to undervoltage reference.
Thermal switch contact
Braking Unit
(optional)
/%%$
(7
(8
(9
Noise filter
Level detector
Thermal relay trip contact
2
$
Braking Resistor Unit
(optional)
(7
(8
(9
3-phase power
200 to 240 V
50/60 Hz
4
5
6
8O
(WUG /%%$
10
/%%$ 6*4: 1((
/%
/%
5#
Thermal relay trip contact for Braking Resistor Unit
6*4:
5#
Thermal relay trip contact for motor cooling fan
/%
/% /#
64:
5#
64:
Fault contact
Multi-function contact inputs
Factory settings
/%
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Thermal switch contact for Braking Unit
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-step speed reference 1
(Main speed switching)
Multi-step speed reference 2
Jog speed selection
Not used
5
5
4.
5.
6.
5
5
5
5
5
5
Inverter
CIMR-F7S2022
76
86
96
2):
QRVKQPCN
'
/2
#%
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 k
Ω
)
Default: Output frequency
7
8
9
Motor
6#
%
,
$
+
#
*
&
(
6#
S h i e l d tw i sted pa i r w i res
Pulse A
Pulse monitor output
30 mA max.
Pulse B Wiring distance:
30 m max.
2)
Cooling fan
+/
/
8O#
CN5 (NPN setting)
5%
#/
(/
#%
㧙
#/
Ammeter adjustment
Mǡ
㧗
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Output current
0 to +10 V
㧙
(/
Tachometer adjustment
Mǡ
㧗
Multi-function analog output 1
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Motor speed
0 to +10 V
External speed references
Pulse train input
Speed setter
Mǡ
Mǡ
Speed setting adjustment
VQ8
VQO# 2
VQ8
MEMOBUS communications
RS-485/422
2
2
8
')
Shield wire connection terminal
42 Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 k
Ω
)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
8
#
#
#
#%
Speed setting power
+15 V, 20 mA
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 k
Ω
)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250
Ω )
[0 to 10 V (20 k
Ω
) input]
8
Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 k
Ω
)
Factory setting:
Not used
8 㧔8O#
Terminating resistance
4
4
5
5
+)
')
/#
/$
/%
/
/
2
2
2%
/#
/%
Error contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Default: Running signal
Open collector 1
Default: Zerospeed Multi-function open-collector outputs
48 VDC 50 mA max.
Open collector 2
Default: Speed agree signal
* 1. The main circuit is separated from the terminal cover for safety reasons.
* 2. The contact output circuit is separated from the main circuit and the control circuit by reinforced insulation.
It can be connected to extra-low voltage circuits or circuits that are 250 VAC 1 A, 30 VDC 1 A or less.
* 3. The control circuit is an extra-low voltage circuit and separated from the main circuit and the contact output circuit by reinforced insulation. Always connect it to extra-low voltage circuits.
Fig 10.2
10-
9
10
10
-10
Input Fuses
In order to conform to the Low Voltage Directive, fuses must be provided for inputs. Use UL-compatible input fuses with ratings higher than the voltages and currents, and fusing I
2 t specifications within the ranges shown in the table below.
Voltage
Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-F7S
Table 10.3 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples
Selection Requirements Input Fuse (Examples)
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I
(A
2 sec)
2 t
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
Fusing
I
2 t
(A
2 sec)
200 V
Class
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
10
10
15
20
30
40
60
80
100
130
150
180
240
300
350
450
12 to 25
12 to 25
23 to 55
34 to 98
82 to 220
220 to 610
290 to 1300
450 to 5000
1200 to 7200
1800 to 7200
870 to 16200
1500 to 23000
2100 to 19000
2700 to 55000
4000 to 55000
7100 to 64000
A60Q12-2
A60Q12-2
CR2LS-20/UL
CR2LS-30/UL
CR2LS-50/UL
CR2LS-75/UL
CR2LS-75/UL
CR2LS-100/UL
CR2L-125/UL
CR2L-150/UL
CR2L-150/UL
CR2L-200/UL
CR2L-260/UL
CR2L-300/UL
CR2L-350/UL
CR2L-450/UL
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
250 V
125 A
250 V
150 A
250 V
150 A
250 V
200 A
250 V
260 A
250 V
300 A
250 V
350 A
250 V
450 A
250 V
50 A
250 V
75 A
250 V
75 A
250 V
100 A
600 V
12 A
600 V
12 A
250 V
20 A
250 V
30 A
17
17
27
60
200
276
560
810
1570
2260
2260
4010
7320
9630
16000
31000
Conformance to CE Markings
Voltage
Class
Table 10.3 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples (Continued)
Selection Requirements Input Fuse (Examples)
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-F7S
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I
(A
2 sec)
2 t
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
400 V
Class
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
5
5
10
10
15
20
25
30
50
60
70
80
100
125
150
150
250
300
350
400
450
600
700
900
6 to 55
6 to 55
10 to 55
18 to 55
34 to 72
50 to 570
100 to 570
100 to 640
150 to 1300
400 to 1800
700 to 4100
240 to 5800
500 to 5800
750 to 5800
920 to 13000
1500 to 13000
3000 to 55000
3800 to 55000
5400 to 23000
7900 to 64000
14000 to 250000
20000 to 250000
34000 to 400000
52000 to 920000
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-30/UL
CR6L-30/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-75/UL
CR6L-100/UL
CR6L-100/UL
CR6L-100/UL
CR6L-150/UL
CR6L-150/UL
CR6L-200/UL
CR6L-300/UL
CR6L-300/UL
A70P350-4
A70P400-4
A70P450-4
A70P600-4
A70P700-4
A70P900-4
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
700 V
450 A
700 V
600 A
700 V
700 A
700 V
900 A
600 V
300 A
600 V
300 A
700 V
350 A
700 V
400 A
600 V
30 A
600 V
30 A
600 V
50 A
600 V
50 A
600 V
50 A
600 V
20 A
600 V
20 A
600 V
20 A
600 V
20 A
600 V
75 A
600 V
100 A
600 V
100 A
600 V
100 A
600 V
150 A
600 V
150 A
600 V
200 A
Fusing
I
2 t
(A
2 sec)
26
26
26
26
59
59
317
317
317
564
1022
1022
1022
3070
3070
5200
17700
17700
15000
19000
24000
43000
59000
97000
10-
11
10
10
-12
EMC Directive
Varispeed F7-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the EMC Directive under the conditions described in European Standard EN61800-3.
Installation Method
In order to ensure that the machinery or installation incorporating the Inverter conforms to the EMC Directive, perform installation according to the method below.
•
•
Install a noise filter that conforms to European Standards on the input side. (Refer to Table 10.4 EMC
Noise Filters ).
Use a shielded line or metal piping for wiring between the Inverter and Motor. Make the wiring as short as possible.
• To suppress harmonics, install a DC reactor in CIMR-F7S20P4, 20P7, 40P4, and 40P7 models. (Refer to
Table 10.5 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics .)
R/L1, S
PE
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Inputs
Filter
Outputs
Inverter
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S /L2, T/L3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Wiring length: 20 m max.
M
Fig 10.3 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-F7S20P4 to 2018, 40P4 to 4018)
Conformance to CE Markings
R/L1, S /L2, T/L3
PE
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Inputs
Filter
Outputs
Inverter
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S /L2, T/L3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Wiring length: 20 m max.
M
Voltage
Class
200V
Class
Fig 10.4 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-F7S2022 to 2110, 4022 to 4300)
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-F7S
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
27P5
2011
2015
2018
Table 10.4 EMC Noise Filters
Noise Filter (Made by Shaffner)
Model Number Rated Current (A) Weight (kg)
FS5972-10-07
FS5972-18-07
FS5973-35-07
FS5973-60-07
FS5973-100-07
FS5973-130-35
FS5973-160-40
FS5973-240-37
FS5972-410-99
10
18
35
60
100
130
160
240
410
1.2
1.7
1.4
3
4.9
4.3
6
11
10.5
Dimensions (mm)
W
141
141
141
206
236
90 ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
D
46
46
46
60
80
180
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
H
330
330
330
355
408
370
120 × 170 × 451
130 × 240 × 610
260 × 115 × 386
10
10-
13
10
-14
Voltage
Class
400V
Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-F7S
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4110
4132
4160
4185
4045
4055
4075
4090
4220
4300
Voltage Class
200 V Class
400 V Class
Table 10.4 EMC Noise Filters (Continued)
Model Number
FS5972-10-07
FS5972-18-07
FS5972-21-07
FS5972-35-07
FS5972-60-07
FS5972-70-52
FS5972-100-35
FS5972-130-35
FS5972-170-40
FN3359-250-28
FS5972-410-99
FS5972-600-99
FS5972-800-99
Noise Filter (Made by Shaffner)
Rated Current (A)
10
18
21
35
60
70
100
130
170
250
410
600
800
Weight (kg)
1.2
1.3
1.8
2.1
4
3.4
4.5
4.7
6
7
10.5
11
31
Table 10.5 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-F7S
Model Number
DC Reactor
Manufacturer Ratings
20P4
UZDA-B YASKAWA 5.4 A 8 mH
20P7
40P4
40P7
UZDA-B YASKAWA 3.2 A 28 mH
Dimensions (mm)
W × D × H
141
141
206 × 50 × 355
206 × 50 × 355
236
80
90
230
260
260
300
×
×
×
×
×
46
46
65
185
×
×
×
×
330
330
408
329
90 × 180 × 370
120 × 170 × 451
×
×
×
×
150
125
115
135
160
×
×
×
×
×
330
300
386
386
716
Code Number
X010084
X010052
Wiring Examples
Wiring Examples
This section provides wiring examples to connect a Braking Unit and other peripheral devices to the main circuits, examples of wiring a transformer to Inverter I/O, and other aspects of Inverter wiring.
Using a Braking Resistor Unit
This example shows wiring for a Braking Resistor Unit.
CIMR-F7A20P4 to -F7A2018 (200 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)
CIMR-F7A40P4 to -F7A4018 (400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)
3-phase power or 380 to 460 V
50/60Hz
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
DC Reactor to improve input power factor
(Optional)
1 2
Braking Resistor Unit
*3
*2 P B
S hort-circuit bar
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz
R
S
T
*1 400/200 V
MC
+ 1 + 2
R/L1
S /L2
T/L3
−
*4
B1
Inverter
B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Low-voltage manual starter
Motor
IPMM
THRX OFF
ON
MC
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
MC
S A
THRX
1 2
MC
S A
TRX
200 V Class Inverters: Ground to
100 Ω max., 400 V Class Inverters:
Ground to 10 Ω max.)
S A
TRX
MA MC
Fault contacts
* 1. A transformer is not required for 200 V Class
* 2. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and + 2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 3. Disable overvoltage inhibit selection by setting L3-11 and using a Braking Resistor
Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
* 4. When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR) to Inverters with built-in braking transistor (200 V/400 V 18.5 kW or less), connect the B1 terminal of the Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the - terminal of the Inverter to the - terminal of the Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used in this case.
Fig 10.5
10
10-
15
10
-16
Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit
This example shows wiring for a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit.
CIMR-F7A2022, -F7A2030 (200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW, 30 kW)
3-phase power
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor
Unit.
DC Reactor to improve input power factor
(Optional)
MCCB
S hort-circuit bar
MC
*1
+ 1 + 2 + 3
Braking Unit
(Optional)
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz
R
S
T
R/L1
S /L2
T/L3
−
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+
−
Level detector
3 4
+
0
−
0
P
B
1 2
Braking Resistor Unit
(Optional)
*2
Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
Low-voltage manual starter
Motor
IPMM
Inverter
THRX OFF
ON
MC
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
MC
S A
THRX
1 2
MC
S A
TRX
Ground to 100 Ω max.
S A
TRX
MA MC
Forward Run/ S top
Fault contacts
Reverse Run/ S top
Braking Unit
External fault 3 4
S 1
*1. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and + 2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
*2. Disable overvoltage inhibit selection by setting L3-11 and using a Braking Resistor
Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Forward Run Command (forward run when ON)
S 2
Reverse Run Command (reverse run when ON)
S 3
Fig 10.6
Wiring Examples
Using Braking Units in Parallel
This example shows wiring for using two Braking Units in parallel.
There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e.) from the second Unit onwards.
3-phase power
200 to 220 V 50 Hz
200 to 230 V 60 Hz
R
S
T
A sequence is required to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
MCCB
MC
+ 3
R/L1
Inverter
S /L2 r
T/L3
Cooling fan
IM
−
+
Thermal protector
1 2
Braking
Resistor
Unit
+ 0
P
MA S TER
−
B
0
Thermal protector
1 2
Braking
Resistor
Unit
− + +
0
P
MA S TER
0
1
Level detector
S LAVE
+15
5 1
6 2
S LAVE
5
Braking Unit
6 2
−
U/T1
3 4
Thermal switch
3 4
Thermal switch
Low-voltage manual starter
Motor
V/T2
W/T3
IPMM
THRX OFF
ON
MC
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
MC
S A
THRX
1 2
MC
S A
TRX
S A
TRX
MA MC
Fault contacts
Forward Run/ S top
Reverse Run/ S top
External fault
Braking Unit
3 4
S 1
S 2
Forward Run Command (forward run when ON)
Reverse Run Command (reverse run when ON)
S 3
Ground to 100 Ω max.
MA
MB
MC
Fault contact output
* Disable overvoltage inhibit selection by setting L3-11 to Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Fig 10.7
10
10-
17
10
-18
Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel
This example shows wiring for using three Braking Resistor Units in parallel.
A sequence is required to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
MCCB
3-phase power
380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz
R
S
T
400/200 V
THRX
OFF
ON
MC
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
MC
S A
THRX
1
MC
2
S A
TRX
MC
S A
TRX
MA MC
Fault contacts
Forward Run/ S top
Reverse Run/ S top
External fault
Braking Unit
3 4
1
−
Thermal protector
1
P
2 Braking
Resistor
Unit
B
+ +
0
−
0
MA S TER
Thermal protector
1 2 Braking
Resistor
Unit
P B
Thermal protector
1 2 Braking
Resistor
Unit
P B *
Lleve drotcete
S LAVE
+15
5
Braking Unit
+ 3 r
R/L1
Inverter
S /L2
T/L3
Voltage setting
Cooling fan
IM
480/460/440/
415/400/380 V
−
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
2 6
3 4
Thermal switch
Low-voltage manual starter
Motor
IPMM
Ground to 10 Ω max.
S 1
S 2
Forward Run Command (forward run when ON)
Reverse Run Command (reverse run when ON)
S 3
MA
MB
MC
Fault contact output
* Disable overvoltage inhibit selection by setting L3-11 to Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Fig 10.8
Wiring Examples
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an Internal Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control board to NPN as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN transistor for an input signal (0-V command and sinking mode) and an internal +24-V power supply.
3-phase power
R
S
T
MCCB
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+ 2 -
Inverter
B1 B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Low-voltage manual starter
Motor
IPMM
Ground
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-function contact inputs
Factory settings
Multi-step speed setting 1
Baseblock command
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S8
CN5 (NPN setting) +24 V 8 mA
SC
E(G)
+24 V
Shield wire connection terminal
External speed references
Pulse train input
Speed setting adjustment
2 k Ω
Speed setter
2 k Ω
3
1
2
0 to +10 V
4 to 20 mA P
P
Fig 10.9
RP
Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 k Ω )
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
+V
A1
A2
AC
Speed setting power
+15 V 20 mA
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 k Ω )
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω )
0 to 10 V (20 k Ω ) input
0 V
10
10-
19
10
-20
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a +24-V Common in Sourcing
Mode
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control board to PNP as shown below for a sequence that uses a PNP transistor for an input signal (+24-V common and sourcing mode) and an internal +24-V power supply.
3-phase power
R
S
T
MCCB
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-function contact inputs
Factory settings
Multi-step speed setting 1
Baseblock command
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
+ 1 + 2 -
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Inverter
B1 B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Low-voltage manual starter
Motor
IPMM
Ground
S8
CN5 (PNP setting)
+24 V 8 mA
SC
E(G)
+24 V
Shield wire connection terminal
External speed references
Pulse train input
Speed setting
2 k Ω adjustment
Speed setter
2 k Ω
3
1
2
0 to +10 V
4 to 20 mA
P
P
RP Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 k
Ω
)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
+V
A1
A2
AC
Speed setting power
+15 V 20 mA
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 k
Ω
)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω )
0 to 10 V (20 k Ω ) input
0 V
Fig 10.10
Wiring Examples
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an External Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control board to EXT as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN transistor for an input signal (0-V command and sinking mode) and an external +24-V power supply.
3-phase power
R
S
T
MCCB
+ 1 + 2 -
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Inverter
B1 B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Low-voltage manual starter
Motor
IPMM
Ground
Forward Run/Stop
Multi-function contact inputs
Factory settings
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-step speed setting 1
Baseblock command
External speed references
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
Pulse train input
Speed setting
2 k Ω adjustment
Speed setter
2 k Ω
3
0 to +10 V
1
2
4 to 20 mA P
P
S8
CN5 (EXT setting) +24 V 8 mA
External
+24V
SC
E(G)
+24 V
Shield wire connection terminal
RP Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 k Ω )
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
+V
A1
A2
AC
Speed setting power
+15 V 20 mA
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 k Ω )
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 k Ω )
0 to 10 V (20 k Ω ) input
0 V
Note:
Set EXT as shown at the right even for a PNP input signal transistor sequence connection (+24-V common/sourcing mode) with a +24-V external power supply.
S8
CN5 (EXT setting)
+24 V 8 mA
External
+24V
SC
+24 V
Fig 10.11
10-
21
10
10
-22
Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs
This example shows wiring for contact outputs and open collector outputs.
The following example is for the CIMR-F7A27P5 (200 V Class Inverter for 7.5 kW).
R
3-phase power S
T
MCCB
+ 1
R/L1
S /L2
T/L3
+ 2 -
Inverter
B1 B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Low-voltage manual starter
Motor
IPMM
AM
FM
AC
E(G)
Ground
㧙
Ammeter scale adjustment resistor
AM
20 k ǡ
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to +10 V 2 mA
㧗
Default: Ouput current,
0 to +10 V
Frequency meter scale adjustment resistor
20 k ǡ
㧙
FM
㧗
Multi-function analog output 1
-10 to +10 V 2 mA
Default: Motor speed,
0 to +10 V
S equence
MA
MB
MC
Error contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
(Default: RUN)
S urge absorber
250 VAC max.
30 VDC max.
Flywheel diode
M1
M2
E(G)
P1
P2
PC
Open collector 1
(Default: zero speed)
Open collector 2
(Default: S peed agree)
Multi-function open collector output
48 VDC 50 mA max.
S equence external power supply
48 VDC max.
Flywheel diode
48 VDC max.
Flywheel diode
Fig 10.12
User Constants
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table.
Table 10.6 User Constants
No.
A1-03 Initialize
A1-04 Password
Name
A1-00
Language selection for Digital
Operator display
A1-01 Constant access level
A1-02 Control method selection
A1-05 Password setting
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting constants b1-01 Reference selection
0
-
1
1 b1-02 Operation method selection b1-03 Stopping method selection 0 b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation b1-05
Operation selection for setting E1-
09 or less b1-06 Read sequence input twice
0
0
1 b1-07 b1-08 b2-01 b3-01
Operation selection after switching to remote mode
Run Command selection in programming modes
Zero-speed level (Base block starting speed)
0
1
1.0
*3
Speed search selection 1
*3 b3-05 Search wait time 1.0
Factory
Setting
1
*1
Setting
2
7
*1
0
0
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
100.0
Setting b5-04 Integral (I) limit b5-05 Derivative (D) time 0.00
100.0
b5-06 PID limit b5-07 PID offset adjustment b5-08 PID primary delay time constant b5-09
PID output characteristics selection b5-10 PID output gain
0.0
0.00
0
1.0
b5-11 PID reverse output selection b5-12 b5-13 b5-14
Selection of PID feedback command loss detection
PID feedback command loss detection level
PID feedback command loss detection time b5-15 PID sleep function operation level
0
0
0
1.0
0.0
b5-16 PID sleep operation delay time b5-17
Acceleration/deceleration time for
PID reference b6-01 Dwell speed at start b6-02 Dwell time at start b6-03 Dwell speed at stop
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
b4-01 b4-02 b5-01 b5-02
Timer function ON-delay time
Timer function OFF-delay time
PID control method selection
Proportional gain (P)
0.0
0.0
0
1.00
b6-04 Dwell time at stop b7-01 Droop control gain b7-02 Droop control delay time
C1-01 Acceleration time 1
C1-02 Deceleration time 1
0.0
0.0
0.05
10.0
10.0
b5-03 Integral (I) time 1.0
C1-03 Acceleration time 2 10.0
10
10-
23
10
-24
Table 10.6 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Name
C1-04 Deceleration time 2
C1-05 Acceleration time 3
C1-06 Deceleration time 3
C1-07 Acceleration time 4
C1-08 Deceleration time 4
C1-09 Emergency stop time
C1-10 Accel/decel time setting unit
C1-11 Accel/decel time switching speed
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1
0.0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
10.00
*3
C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1
C5-03 ASR proportional (P) gain 2
C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2
0.500
*3
10.00
*3
0.500
*3
C5-05 ASR limit 5.0
C5-06 ASR primary delay time
C5-07 ASR switching speed
0.016
*3
0.0
C5-08 ASR integral (I) limit 400
C5-15 ASR proportional (P) gain at start 5.00
*3
C6-01 CT/VT selection 1
*8*9
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection
2
*3 *4 d1-01 Speed reference 1 0.00
10.0
10.0
10.0
1
Factory
Setting
10.0
Setting
No.
Name d1-02 Speed reference 2
10.0
10.0
d1-03 d1-04
Speed reference 3
Speed reference 4 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08
Speed reference 5
Speed reference 6
Speed reference 7
Speed reference 8 d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-14 d1-15 d1-16 d1-17 d2-01 d2-02 d2-03 d3-01 d3-02 d3-03 d3-04 d4-01
Speed reference 9
Speed reference 10
Speed reference 11
Speed reference 12
Speed reference 13
Speed reference 14
Speed reference 15
Speed reference 16
Jog speed reference
Speed reference upper limit
Speed reference lower limit
Master speed reference lower limit
Jump speed 1
Jump speed 2
Jump speed 3
Jump speed width
Speed reference hold function selection
100.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Factory
Setting
0.00
Setting
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
10.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
User Constants
Table 10.6 User Constants (Continued)
No.
d4-02 d5-01 d5-02 d5-03 d5-04
Name
+ - Speed limits
Torque control selection
Torque reference delay time
Speed limit selection
Speed limit
Factory
Setting
10
Setting
0
0
*3
1
0 d5-05 Speed limit bias d5-06
Speed/torque control switching timer
E1-01 Input voltage setting
5
50
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-13
E2-01
V/f pattern selection
Max. speed
Max. voltage
Base speed
Mid. output frequency
Mid. output frequency voltage
Min. speed
Min. output frequency voltage
Motor base voltage
Motor rated current
E2-02
E2-03
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
2.90
*4
1.20
*4
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance 9.842
*4
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
E2-11 Motor rated output
14
*4
0.40
*4
E5-01 Motor capacity selection
0000
*1*6
200
*2*7
F
*1
1750
*2*5
200.0
*2
1750
*2*5
3.0
15.0
*2*9
1.5
*2
175
*2*5
190.0
*2*5*7
1.90
*4
No.
E5-02
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E5-07
Name
E5-09 Motor generated voltage constant
E5-10
Motor rated capacity
Motor rated current
Number of motor poles
Motor armature resistance
Motor d-axis inductance
Motor q-axis inductance
Phase lead compensation
Factory
Setting
0.40
*1*5
1.65
*1*5
Setting
6
*1*5
8.233
*1*5
54.84
*1*5
64.10
*1*5
223.0
*1*5
10.0
*1
E5-11 PG home position offset
F1-02
F1-03
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
Operation selection at overspeed
(OS)
F1-04 Operation selection at deviation
0.0
*1
1
1
*3
3
F1-05
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-14
F1-18
F1-19
F2-01
F3-01
F4-01
F4-02
PG rotation
Overspeed detection level
Overspeed detection delay time
Excessive speed deviation detection level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
PG open-circuit detection time
DV3 Detection selection
DV4 Detection selection
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
Digital input option
Channel 1 monitor selection
Channel 1 gain
115
0.0
10
0.5
2.0
128
5
1
5
0
0
*3
1.00
10-
25
10
10
-26
Table 10.6 User Constants (Continued)
No.
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
F4-07
F4-08
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
F5-08
Name
Channel 2 monitor selection
Channel 2 gain
Channel 1 output monitor bias
Channel 2 output monitor bias
Analog output signal level for channel 1
Analog output signal level for channel 2
F5-01 Channel 1 output selection
Channel 2 output selection
Channel 3 output selection
Channel 4 output selection
Channel 5 output selection
Channel 6 output selection
Channel 7 output selection
Channel 8 output selection
F5-09 DO-08 output mode selection
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
F6-06
Operation selection after communications error
Input level of external fault from
Communications Option Card
Stopping method for external fault from Communications Option Card
Torque reference/torque limit selection from optical option
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection
0
4
0F
6
0F
37
0F
1
0F
2
0F
0F
Factory
Setting
3 *3
Setting
0.50
0.0
0.0
0
0
No.
Name
H1-06 Terminal S8 function selection
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
H2-06
H3-01
Terminal M1-M2 function selection (contact)
Terminal P1 function selection
(open collector)
Terminal P2 function selection
(open collector)
Integral power output level selection
Signal level selection (terminal
A1)
H3-02 Gain (terminal A1)
Factory
Setting
F
Setting
0
1
2
0
0
100.0
0F
0
H3-03 Bias (terminal A1)
H3-04
H3-05
Signal level selection (terminal
A3)
Multi-function analog input (terminal A3) function selection
H3-06 Gain (terminal A3)
H3-07 Bias (terminal A3)
0.0
0
1F
100.0
0.0
H3-08 Signal level selection (terminal A2)
H3-09
Multi-function analog input (terminal A2) function selection
H3-10 Gain (terminal A2)
2
0
100.0
1
0
1
0
24
H3-11 Bias (terminal A2)
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant
H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching
H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM)
H4-02 Gain (terminal FM)
0.0
0.03
5
0
*3
1.00
H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection
H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection
H1-04 Terminal S6 function selection
H1-05 Terminal S7 function selection
14
3 (0)
*10
4 (3)
*10
6 (4)
*10
H4-03 Bias (terminal FM)
H4-04 Monitor selection (terminal AM)
H4-05 Gain (terminal AM)
H4-06 Bias (terminal AM)
0.0
3
*3
0.50
0.0
User Constants
Table 10.6 User Constants (Continued)
No.
H4-07
H4-08
Name
Analog output 1 signal level selection
Analog output 2 signal level selection
Factory
Setting
0
0
H5-01 Slave address 1F
Setting
H5-02 Communication speed selection
H5-03 Communication parity selection
H5-04
H5-05
Stopping method after communication error
Communication error detection selection
H5-06 Send wait time
3
0
3
1
5
No.
Name
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level
Factory
Setting
0.0
Setting
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width
L4-03
L4-04
L4-05
Speed agreement detection level
(+/-)
Speed agreement detection width
(+/-)
Operation when speed reference is missing
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts
4.0
0.0
4.0
0
0
L5-02
L6-01
Auto restart operation selection
Torque detection selection 1
0
0
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF
H6-01 Pulse train input function selection
1
0
L6-02
L6-03
Torque detection level 1
Torque detection time 1
150
0.1
H6-02 Pulse train input scaling
H6-03 Pulse train input gain
H6-04 Pulse train input bias
H6-05 Pulse train input filter time
H6-06 Pulse train monitor selection
H6-07 Pulse train monitor scaling
L1-01 Motor protection selection
L1-02 Motor protection time constant
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L2-05
L2-06
L3-11
Undervoltage detection level
KEB deceleration time
Overvoltage inhibit selection
1440
100.0
0.0
0.10
2
1440
4
*1*3
1.0
0
*3
0.1
*4
0.1
*4
190
*7
30.0
1
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
L7-01
L7-02 Reverse drive torque limit
L7-03 Forward regenerative torque limit
L7-04
L8-09
Torque detection selection 2
Torque detection level 2
Torque detection time 2
Forward drive torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
L8-01
Protect selection for internal DB resistor (Type ERF)
0
150
0.1
160
160
160
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 95
*4
L8-03
L8-05
L8-07
Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
Input open-phase protection selection
Output open-phase protection selection
3
0
0
L8-08 Output open-phase detection level 5.0
*3
Ground protection selection
160
0
1
10
10-
27
10
-28
Table 10.6 User Constants (Continued)
No.
L8-10
L8-11
Name
Cooling fan control selection
Cooling fan control delay time
L8-12 Ambient temperature
L8-15
L8-29
L8-32
N8-01
OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
Current imbalance protection selection
OH1 detection of Inverter’s cooling fan
Current of magnetic pole calculation at start
N8-02 Magnetic pole pull-in current
Factory
Setting
0
60
45
1
1
1
50
Setting
No.
Name o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting
Factory
Setting
0
Setting o2-08
Cumulative operation time selection o2-10 Fan operation time setting
0
0 o2-12 o2-14 o3-01
Fault trace/fault history clear function
Output power monitor clear selection o2-18 Capacitor maintenance setting
Copy function selection
0
0
0
0
80
*3 o3-02 Read permitted selection 0 o1-01 o1-02 o1-03 o1-05 o2-01 o2-02 o2-03
Monitor selection
Monitor selection after power up
Speed units of reference setting and monitor
LCD brightness adjustment
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
User constant initial value o2-04 kVA selection o2-05 o2-06
Speed reference setting method selection
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
0
6
1
1
3
1
1
0
*1*4
0
0
T1-01 Autotuning mode selection
T2-01
T2-02
T2-03
T2-04
T2-05
T2-06
T2-07
T2-08
T2-11
2
*3
Motor rated capacity
(E5-02 correspondence)
Base speed
(E1-06 correspondence)
Base voltage
(E1-13 correspondence)
Motor rated current
(E5-03 correspondence)
Number of motor poles
(E5-04 correspondence)
Motor d axis inductance
(E5-06 correspondence)
Motor q axis inductance
(E5-07 correspondence)
Motor generation voltage constant
(E5-09 correspondence)
Input voltage setting
(E1-01 correspondence)
0.40
1750
190.0
*5*7
1.65
6
*5
54.84
*5
64.10
*5
223.0
*5
200
*5
*5
*5
*7
* 1. Not initialized. (Japanese standard specifications: A1-01 = 1, A1-02 = 2)
* 2. This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation if the control method is open-loop vector control for PM or flux vector control for PM.
* 3. The setting will return to be the factory setting if the control method is changed.
* 4. The factory setting varies in accordance with the Inverter capacity.
* 5. The factory settings vary in accordance with the motor capacity selection (E5-01) or the control method selection (A1-02).
* 6. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of the inverter capacity selection (o2-04) or the control method selection (A1-02).
* 7. Only 1 (VT) can be set for 400 V Class 220 kW and 300 kW Inverters.
* 8. Setting for 200 V Class Inverters. For 400 V Class Inverters, double the value.
* 9. The factory settings vary in accordance with the setting of C6-01 (CT/VT selection). If C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), the factory setting is 1 (2 kHz).
* 10.The values in parentheses indicate factory settings when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Index
Symbols
+/- speed, 6-69
Numerics
2-wire sequence, 6-14
3-wire sequence, 6-15
A
AC reactor, 2-16 acceleration and deceleration times, 6-20 advanced programming mode, 3-5, 3-9
ASIC internal RAM fault, 7-10
ASIC version fault, 7-10 auto restart, 6-59 autotuning mode, 3-5, 3-12
B baseblock circuit error, 7-9 braking resistor, 2-20 braking resistor unit, 2-20, 10-15 braking unit, 10-16
C circuit breaker, 2-15 common specifications, 9-4 communications on standby, 7-15 communications option board A/D converter error, 7-10 communications option board DPRAM error, 7-10 communications option board model code error, 7-10 communications option board self diagnostic error, 7-10 constant selection error, 7-16 constant setting error, 7-17 constant setting range error, 7-16 control circuit terminals, 2-23 control method selection error, 7-16 control power fault, 7-3 cooling fin overheating, 7-4
CPU internal A/D converter error, 7-9
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault, 7-10 crimp terminals, 2-6, 2-23, 2-36
D daily inspection, 8-2
DC reactor, 2-16 detecting motor overspeed, 6-49 detecting motor torque, 6-41 detecting PG open circuit, 6-131 digital operator, 3-2 digital operator communications error 1, 7-9 digital operator communications error 2, 7-9 digital operator connection fault, 7-8 digital output boards, 6-132 drive mode, 3-5, 3-7 dwell function, 6-24
E
EEPROM error, 7-9
EEPROM write error, 7-17 emergency stop, 6-19 enclosed wall-mounted type, 1-5 excessive speed deviation, 7-7, 7-14 external fault function, 6-72
F
FJOG, 6-71
Forward/Reverse Run Commands input together, 7-12 fuse blown, 7-3
G ground fault, 7-2 ground fault interrupter, 2-15 ground wiring, 2-19
I incorrect Inverter capacity setting, 7-16 inductive noise, 2-18 inrush prevention circuit fault, 7-4 installation site, 1-10 installed braking resistor overheating, 7-5 internal braking transistor fault, 7-5
Inverter overload, 7-6
1
2
J jump frequency function, 6-30
L limiting motor rotation direction, 6-49 loaded operation, 4-25
M magnetic contactor, 2-16 main circuit overvoltage, 7-3 main circuit undervoltage, 7-3, 7-12 main circuit voltage fault, 7-4 maintenance and inspection, 8-1
MEMOBUS communications, 6-81
MEMOBUS communications error, 7-9, 7-14 modes, 3-5 motor overheating, 7-13 motor overheating fault, 7-5 motor overload, 7-5 motor protection operation time, 6-48 mounting dimensions, 1-7 multi-function analog input, 6-35 multi-function analog input selection error, 7-16 multi-function input selection error, 7-16 multi-speed operation, 6-9
N noise filter, 2-16 no-load operation, 4-25 number of PG pulses, 6-130
O open chassis type, 1-5 operation errors, 7-16 option board communications error, 7-15 option board connection error, 7-10 option board selection error, 7-16 option communications error, 7-9 output open-phase, 7-4 overcurrent, 7-2 overspeed, 7-6, 7-13 overtorque 1, 7-13 overtorque 2, 7-13 overtorque detected 1, 7-6 overtorque detected 2, 7-6
P password, 4-26, 6-127 periodic inspection, 8-2 periodic maintenance of parts, 8-3
PG disconnection detected, 7-7
PG rotation direction, 6-131
PG speed control board, 6-130
PID control, 6-95
PID control selection error, 7-17
PID feedback reference lost, 7-8, 7-14 power ON, 4-4
Q quick programming mode, 3-5, 3-8
R radio interference, 2-19 rated current, 6-46
RJOG, 6-71
Run Command, 6-14
S
S-curve characteristics, 6-23 speed control with PG, 6-129 speed reference, 6-5, 6-27 stall prevention function, 6-25 standard connection diagrams, 2-14 standard Inverter specifications, 9-2 stopping methods, 6-16 straight solderless terminals, 2-24, 2-36 surge absorber, 2-16 switching monitors when the power supply is ON, 6-121
T terminal block, 2-5 tightening torque, 2-36 timer function, 6-93 torque limit function, 6-35
trial operation, 4-1 troubleshooting, 7-1, 7-20
U undertorque 1, 7-13 undertorque 2, 7-13 undertorque detected 1, 7-6 undertorque detected 2, 7-6 user constant access levels, 4-26
V verify mode, 3-5, 3-11
W watchdog timer fault, 7-10 wire size, 2-23 wiring, 2-1
3
Revision History
The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the bottom of the back cover.
MA N UA L N O .
T O E PC71061616A
C Pr i nted i n J apan J une 2007 07 6
Date of pr i nt i ng
Date of or i g i na l pub li cat i on
Date of Printing
June 2007
September 2008
Rev.
No.
−
1
Section
−
−
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 10
Revised Content
First edition
Revision: Setting range of C6-02
Revision: ・ Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output of U1-08
・ New setting of carrier frequency selection in accordance with software update to PRG
1041
Addition: Note about Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
Revision: ・ Fig 6.1 Overload Current Reduction Level for Flux Vector Control for PM
・ Setting Torque Limits Using Constants and an Analog Input
Revision: Fig 10.4 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter
英文 No.4-4 (A4) メカトロ製品用
Varispeed F7S
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER (SOLUTION CENTER)
480, Kamifujisawa, Iruma, Saitama 358-8555, Japan
Phone 81-4-2962-5696 Fax 81-4-2962-6138
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7370
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Sao Paulo-SP CEP 04304-000, Brazil
Phone 55-11-3585-1100 Fax 55-11-5581-8795
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Hauptstra β e 185, 65760 Eschborn, Germany
Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-569-398
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom
Phone 44-1236-735000 Fax 44-1236-458182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
7F, Doore Bldg. 24, Yeoido-dong, Youngdungpo-Ku, Seoul 150-877, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
No.18 Xizang Zhong Road. Room 1702-1707, Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 200001, China
Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE
Room 1011A, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No.1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing 100738, China
Phone 86-10-8518-4086 Fax 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YASKAWA
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
© 2007-2008 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
MANUAL NO. TOEP C710616 16B
Published in Japan September 2008 07-6
08-5-10
1
Downloaden
Openbare link bijgewerkt
De openbare link naar uw chat is bijgewerkt. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Openbare link document
Advertentie